--- /dev/null
+# $OpenBSD: Makefile,v 1.9 1997/09/21 11:35:28 deraadt Exp $
+
+# To install on versions prior to BSD 4.4 the following may have to be
+# defined with CFLAGS +=
+#
+# -DNET2_STAT Use NET2 or older stat structure. The version of the
+# stat structure is easily determined by looking at the
+# basic type of an off_t (often defined in the file:
+# /usr/include/sys/types.h). If off_t is a long (and is
+# NOT A quad) then you must define NET2_STAT.
+# This define is important, as if you do have a quad_t
+# off_t and define NET2_STAT, pax will compile but will
+# NOT RUN PROPERLY.
+#
+# -DNET2_FTS Use the older NET2 fts. To identify the version,
+# examine the file: /usr/include/fts.h. If FTS_COMFOLLOW
+# is not defined then you must define NET2_FTS.
+# Pax may not compile if this not (un)defined properly.
+#
+# -DNET2_REGEX Use the older regexp.h not regex.h. The regex version
+# is determined by looking at the value returned by
+# regexec() (man 3 regexec). If regexec return a 1 for
+# success (and NOT a 0 for success) you have the older
+# regex routines and must define NET2_REGEX.
+# Pax may not compile if this not (un)defined properly.
+
+PROG= pax
+SRCS= ar_io.c ar_subs.c buf_subs.c cache.c cpio.c file_subs.c ftree.c\
+ gen_subs.c getoldopt.c options.c pat_rep.c pax.c sel_subs.c tables.c\
+ tar.c tty_subs.c
+MAN= pax.1 tar.1 cpio.1
+LINKS= ${BINDIR}/pax ${BINDIR}/tar ${BINDIR}/pax ${BINDIR}/cpio
+
+.include <bsd.prog.mk>
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: ar_io.c,v 1.18 1998/09/20 02:22:21 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: ar_io.c,v 1.5 1996/03/26 23:54:13 mrg Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)ar_io.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: ar_io.c,v 1.18 1998/09/20 02:22:21 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <sys/mtio.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <err.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "options.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * Routines which deal directly with the archive I/O device/file.
+ */
+
+#define DMOD 0666 /* default mode of created archives */
+#define EXT_MODE O_RDONLY /* open mode for list/extract */
+#define AR_MODE (O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC) /* mode for archive */
+#define APP_MODE O_RDWR /* mode for append */
+#define STDO "<STDOUT>" /* psuedo name for stdout */
+#define STDN "<STDIN>" /* psuedo name for stdin */
+static int arfd = -1; /* archive file descriptor */
+static int artyp = ISREG; /* archive type: file/FIFO/tape */
+static int arvol = 1; /* archive volume number */
+static int lstrval = -1; /* return value from last i/o */
+static int io_ok; /* i/o worked on volume after resync */
+static int did_io; /* did i/o ever occur on volume? */
+static int done; /* set via tty termination */
+static struct stat arsb; /* stat of archive device at open */
+static int invld_rec; /* tape has out of spec record size */
+static int wr_trail = 1; /* trailer was rewritten in append */
+static int can_unlnk = 0; /* do we unlink null archives? */
+char *arcname; /* printable name of archive */
+char *gzip_program; /* name of gzip program */
+
+static int get_phys __P((void));
+extern sigset_t s_mask;
+static void ar_start_gzip __P((int));
+
+/*
+ * ar_open()
+ * Opens the next archive volume. Determines the type of the device and
+ * sets up block sizes as required by the archive device and the format.
+ * Note: we may be called with name == NULL on the first open only.
+ * Return:
+ * -1 on failure, 0 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_open(char *name)
+#else
+int
+ar_open(name)
+ char *name;
+#endif
+{
+ struct mtget mb;
+
+ if (arfd != -1)
+ (void)close(arfd);
+ arfd = -1;
+ can_unlnk = did_io = io_ok = invld_rec = 0;
+ artyp = ISREG;
+ flcnt = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * open based on overall operation mode
+ */
+ switch (act) {
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ if (name == NULL) {
+ arfd = STDIN_FILENO;
+ arcname = STDN;
+ } else if ((arfd = open(name, EXT_MODE, DMOD)) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Failed open to read on %s", name);
+ if (zflag)
+ ar_start_gzip(arfd);
+ break;
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ if (name == NULL) {
+ arfd = STDOUT_FILENO;
+ arcname = STDO;
+ } else if ((arfd = open(name, AR_MODE, DMOD)) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Failed open to write on %s", name);
+ else
+ can_unlnk = 1;
+ if (zflag)
+ ar_start_gzip(arfd);
+ break;
+ case APPND:
+ if (zflag)
+ err(1, "can not gzip while appending");
+ if (name == NULL) {
+ arfd = STDOUT_FILENO;
+ arcname = STDO;
+ } else if ((arfd = open(name, APP_MODE, DMOD)) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Failed open to read/write on %s",
+ name);
+ break;
+ case COPY:
+ /*
+ * arfd not used in COPY mode
+ */
+ arcname = "<NONE>";
+ lstrval = 1;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ if (arfd < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ if (chdname != NULL)
+ if (chdir(chdname) != 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed chdir to %s", chdname);
+ /*
+ * set up is based on device type
+ */
+ if (fstat(arfd, &arsb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Failed stat on %s", arcname);
+ (void)close(arfd);
+ arfd = -1;
+ can_unlnk = 0;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (S_ISDIR(arsb.st_mode)) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Cannot write an archive on top of a directory %s",
+ arcname);
+ (void)close(arfd);
+ arfd = -1;
+ can_unlnk = 0;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (S_ISCHR(arsb.st_mode))
+ artyp = ioctl(arfd, MTIOCGET, &mb) ? ISCHR : ISTAPE;
+ else if (S_ISBLK(arsb.st_mode))
+ artyp = ISBLK;
+ else if ((lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR) == -1) && (errno == ESPIPE))
+ artyp = ISPIPE;
+ else
+ artyp = ISREG;
+
+ /*
+ * make sure we beyond any doubt that we only can unlink regular files
+ * we created
+ */
+ if (artyp != ISREG)
+ can_unlnk = 0;
+ /*
+ * if we are writing, we are done
+ */
+ if (act == ARCHIVE) {
+ blksz = rdblksz = wrblksz;
+ lstrval = 1;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * set default blksz on read. APPNDs writes rdblksz on the last volume
+ * On all new archive volumes, we shift to wrblksz (if the user
+ * specified one, otherwize we will continue to use rdblksz). We
+ * must to set blocksize based on what kind of device the archive is
+ * stored.
+ */
+ switch(artyp) {
+ case ISTAPE:
+ /*
+ * Tape drives come in at least two flavors. Those that support
+ * variable sized records and those that have fixed sized
+ * records. They must be treated differently. For tape drives
+ * that support variable sized records, we must make large
+ * reads to make sure we get the entire record, otherwise we
+ * will just get the first part of the record (up to size we
+ * asked). Tapes with fixed sized records may or may not return
+ * multiple records in a single read. We really do not care
+ * what the physical record size is UNLESS we are going to
+ * append. (We will need the physical block size to rewrite
+ * the trailer). Only when we are appending do we go to the
+ * effort to figure out the true PHYSICAL record size.
+ */
+ blksz = rdblksz = MAXBLK;
+ break;
+ case ISPIPE:
+ case ISBLK:
+ case ISCHR:
+ /*
+ * Blocksize is not a major issue with these devices (but must
+ * be kept a multiple of 512). If the user specified a write
+ * block size, we use that to read. Under append, we must
+ * always keep blksz == rdblksz. Otherwise we go ahead and use
+ * the device optimal blocksize as (and if) returned by stat
+ * and if it is within pax specs.
+ */
+ if ((act == APPND) && wrblksz) {
+ blksz = rdblksz = wrblksz;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if ((arsb.st_blksize > 0) && (arsb.st_blksize < MAXBLK) &&
+ ((arsb.st_blksize % BLKMULT) == 0))
+ rdblksz = arsb.st_blksize;
+ else
+ rdblksz = DEVBLK;
+ /*
+ * For performance go for large reads when we can without harm
+ */
+ if ((act == APPND) || (artyp == ISCHR))
+ blksz = rdblksz;
+ else
+ blksz = MAXBLK;
+ break;
+ case ISREG:
+ /*
+ * if the user specified wrblksz works, use it. Under appends
+ * we must always keep blksz == rdblksz
+ */
+ if ((act == APPND) && wrblksz && ((arsb.st_size%wrblksz)==0)){
+ blksz = rdblksz = wrblksz;
+ break;
+ }
+ /*
+ * See if we can find the blocking factor from the file size
+ */
+ for (rdblksz = MAXBLK; rdblksz > 0; rdblksz -= BLKMULT)
+ if ((arsb.st_size % rdblksz) == 0)
+ break;
+ /*
+ * When we cannont find a match, we may have a flawed archive.
+ */
+ if (rdblksz <= 0)
+ rdblksz = FILEBLK;
+ /*
+ * for performance go for large reads when we can
+ */
+ if (act == APPND)
+ blksz = rdblksz;
+ else
+ blksz = MAXBLK;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /*
+ * should never happen, worse case, slow...
+ */
+ blksz = rdblksz = BLKMULT;
+ break;
+ }
+ lstrval = 1;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_close()
+ * closes archive device, increments volume number, and prints i/o summary
+ */
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ar_close(void)
+#else
+void
+ar_close()
+#endif
+{
+
+ if (arfd < 0) {
+ did_io = io_ok = flcnt = 0;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Close archive file. This may take a LONG while on tapes (we may be
+ * forced to wait for the rewind to complete) so tell the user what is
+ * going on (this avoids the user hitting control-c thinking pax is
+ * broken).
+ */
+ if (vflag && (artyp == ISTAPE)) {
+ if (vfpart)
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ (void)fprintf(listf,
+ "%s: Waiting for tape drive close to complete...",
+ argv0);
+ (void)fflush(listf);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if nothing was written to the archive (and we created it), we remove
+ * it
+ */
+ if (can_unlnk && (fstat(arfd, &arsb) == 0) && (S_ISREG(arsb.st_mode)) &&
+ (arsb.st_size == 0)) {
+ (void)unlink(arcname);
+ can_unlnk = 0;
+ }
+
+ (void)close(arfd);
+
+ if (vflag && (artyp == ISTAPE)) {
+ (void)fputs("done.\n", listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ (void)fflush(listf);
+ }
+ arfd = -1;
+
+ if (!io_ok && !did_io) {
+ flcnt = 0;
+ return;
+ }
+ did_io = io_ok = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * The volume number is only increased when the last device has data
+ * and we have already determined the archive format.
+ */
+ if (frmt != NULL)
+ ++arvol;
+
+ if (!vflag) {
+ flcnt = 0;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Print out a summary of I/O for this archive volume.
+ */
+ if (vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * If we have not determined the format yet, we just say how many bytes
+ * we have skipped over looking for a header to id. there is no way we
+ * could have written anything yet.
+ */
+ if (frmt == NULL) {
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ (void)fprintf(listf, "%s: unknown format, %lu bytes skipped.\n",
+# else
+ (void)fprintf(listf, "%s: unknown format, %qu bytes skipped.\n",
+# endif
+ argv0, rdcnt);
+ (void)fflush(listf);
+ flcnt = 0;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ if (strcmp(NM_CPIO, argv0) == 0)
+ (void)fprintf(listf, "%qu blocks\n", (rdcnt ? rdcnt : wrcnt) / 5120);
+ else if (strcmp(NM_TAR, argv0) != 0)
+ (void)fprintf(listf,
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ "%s: %s vol %d, %lu files, %lu bytes read, %lu bytes written.\n",
+# else
+ "%s: %s vol %d, %lu files, %qu bytes read, %qu bytes written.\n",
+# endif
+ argv0, frmt->name, arvol-1, flcnt, rdcnt, wrcnt);
+ (void)fflush(listf);
+ flcnt = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_drain()
+ * drain any archive format independent padding from an archive read
+ * from a socket or a pipe. This is to prevent the process on the
+ * other side of the pipe from getting a SIGPIPE (pax will stop
+ * reading an archive once a format dependent trailer is detected).
+ */
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ar_drain(void)
+#else
+void
+ar_drain()
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ char drbuf[MAXBLK];
+
+ /*
+ * we only drain from a pipe/socket. Other devices can be closed
+ * without reading up to end of file. We sure hope that pipe is closed
+ * on the other side so we will get an EOF.
+ */
+ if ((artyp != ISPIPE) || (lstrval <= 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * keep reading until pipe is drained
+ */
+ while ((res = read(arfd, drbuf, sizeof(drbuf))) > 0)
+ ;
+ lstrval = res;
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_set_wr()
+ * Set up device right before switching from read to write in an append.
+ * device dependent code (if required) to do this should be added here.
+ * For all archive devices we are already positioned at the place we want
+ * to start writing when this routine is called.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if all ready to write, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_set_wr(void)
+#else
+int
+ar_set_wr()
+#endif
+{
+ off_t cpos;
+
+ /*
+ * we must make sure the trailer is rewritten on append, ar_next()
+ * will stop us if the archive containing the trailer was not written
+ */
+ wr_trail = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * Add any device dependent code as required here
+ */
+ if (artyp != ISREG)
+ return(0);
+ /*
+ * Ok we have an archive in a regular file. If we were rewriting a
+ * file, we must get rid of all the stuff after the current offset
+ * (it was not written by pax).
+ */
+ if (((cpos = lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR)) < 0) ||
+ (ftruncate(arfd, cpos) < 0)) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to truncate archive file");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_app_ok()
+ * check if the last volume in the archive allows appends. We cannot check
+ * this until we are ready to write since there is no spec that says all
+ * volumes in a single archive have to be of the same type...
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if we can append, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_app_ok(void)
+#else
+int
+ar_app_ok()
+#endif
+{
+ if (artyp == ISPIPE) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot append to an archive obtained from a pipe.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (!invld_rec)
+ return(0);
+ paxwarn(1,"Cannot append, device record size %d does not support %s spec",
+ rdblksz, argv0);
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_read()
+ * read up to a specified number of bytes from the archive into the
+ * supplied buffer. When dealing with tapes we may not always be able to
+ * read what we want.
+ * Return:
+ * Number of bytes in buffer. 0 for end of file, -1 for a read error.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_read(register char *buf, register int cnt)
+#else
+int
+ar_read(buf, cnt)
+ register char *buf;
+ register int cnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * if last i/o was in error, no more reads until reset or new volume
+ */
+ if (lstrval <= 0)
+ return(lstrval);
+
+ /*
+ * how we read must be based on device type
+ */
+ switch (artyp) {
+ case ISTAPE:
+ if ((res = read(arfd, buf, cnt)) > 0) {
+ /*
+ * CAUTION: tape systems may not always return the same
+ * sized records so we leave blksz == MAXBLK. The
+ * physical record size that a tape drive supports is
+ * very hard to determine in a uniform and portable
+ * manner.
+ */
+ io_ok = 1;
+ if (res != rdblksz) {
+ /*
+ * Record size changed. If this is happens on
+ * any record after the first, we probably have
+ * a tape drive which has a fixed record size
+ * we are getting multiple records in a single
+ * read). Watch out for record blocking that
+ * violates pax spec (must be a multiple of
+ * BLKMULT).
+ */
+ rdblksz = res;
+ if (rdblksz % BLKMULT)
+ invld_rec = 1;
+ }
+ return(res);
+ }
+ break;
+ case ISREG:
+ case ISBLK:
+ case ISCHR:
+ case ISPIPE:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * Files are so easy to deal with. These other things cannot
+ * be trusted at all. So when we are dealing with character
+ * devices and pipes we just take what they have ready for us
+ * and return. Trying to do anything else with them runs the
+ * risk of failure.
+ */
+ if ((res = read(arfd, buf, cnt)) > 0) {
+ io_ok = 1;
+ return(res);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * We are in trouble at this point, something is broken...
+ */
+ lstrval = res;
+ if (res < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed read on archive volume %d", arvol);
+ else
+ paxwarn(0, "End of archive volume %d reached", arvol);
+ return(res);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_write()
+ * Write a specified number of bytes in supplied buffer to the archive
+ * device so it appears as a single "block". Deals with errors and tries
+ * to recover when faced with short writes.
+ * Return:
+ * Number of bytes written. 0 indicates end of volume reached and with no
+ * flaws (as best that can be detected). A -1 indicates an unrecoverable
+ * error in the archive occured.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_write(register char *buf, register int bsz)
+#else
+int
+ar_write(buf, bsz)
+ register char *buf;
+ register int bsz;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ off_t cpos;
+
+ /*
+ * do not allow pax to create a "bad" archive. Once a write fails on
+ * an archive volume prevent further writes to it.
+ */
+ if (lstrval <= 0)
+ return(lstrval);
+
+ if ((res = write(arfd, buf, bsz)) == bsz) {
+ wr_trail = 1;
+ io_ok = 1;
+ return(bsz);
+ }
+ /*
+ * write broke, see what we can do with it. We try to send any partial
+ * writes that may violate pax spec to the next archive volume.
+ */
+ if (res < 0)
+ lstrval = res;
+ else
+ lstrval = 0;
+
+ switch (artyp) {
+ case ISREG:
+ if ((res > 0) && (res % BLKMULT)) {
+ /*
+ * try to fix up partial writes which are not BLKMULT
+ * in size by forcing the runt record to next archive
+ * volume
+ */
+ if ((cpos = lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR)) < 0)
+ break;
+ cpos -= (off_t)res;
+ if (ftruncate(arfd, cpos) < 0)
+ break;
+ res = lstrval = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (res >= 0)
+ break;
+ /*
+ * if file is out of space, handle it like a return of 0
+ */
+ if ((errno == ENOSPC) || (errno == EFBIG) || (errno == EDQUOT))
+ res = lstrval = 0;
+ break;
+ case ISTAPE:
+ case ISCHR:
+ case ISBLK:
+ if (res >= 0)
+ break;
+ if (errno == EACCES) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Write failed, archive is write protected.");
+ res = lstrval = 0;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ /*
+ * see if we reached the end of media, if so force a change to
+ * the next volume
+ */
+ if ((errno == ENOSPC) || (errno == EIO) || (errno == ENXIO))
+ res = lstrval = 0;
+ break;
+ case ISPIPE:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * we cannot fix errors to these devices
+ */
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Better tell the user the bad news...
+ * if this is a block aligned archive format, we may have a bad archive
+ * if the format wants the header to start at a BLKMULT boundry. While
+ * we can deal with the mis-aligned data, it violates spec and other
+ * archive readers will likely fail. if the format is not block
+ * aligned, the user may be lucky (and the archive is ok).
+ */
+ if (res >= 0) {
+ if (res > 0)
+ wr_trail = 1;
+ io_ok = 1;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * If we were trying to rewrite the trailer and it didn't work, we
+ * must quit right away.
+ */
+ if (!wr_trail && (res <= 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to append, trailer re-write failed. Quitting.");
+ return(res);
+ }
+
+ if (res == 0)
+ paxwarn(0, "End of archive volume %d reached", arvol);
+ else if (res < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed write to archive volume: %d", arvol);
+ else if (!frmt->blkalgn || ((res % frmt->blkalgn) == 0))
+ paxwarn(0,"WARNING: partial archive write. Archive MAY BE FLAWED");
+ else
+ paxwarn(1,"WARNING: partial archive write. Archive IS FLAWED");
+ return(res);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_rdsync()
+ * Try to move past a bad spot on a flawed archive as needed to continue
+ * I/O. Clears error flags to allow I/O to continue.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when ok to try i/o again, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_rdsync(void)
+#else
+int
+ar_rdsync()
+#endif
+{
+ long fsbz;
+ off_t cpos;
+ off_t mpos;
+ struct mtop mb;
+
+ /*
+ * Fail resync attempts at user request (done) or this is going to be
+ * an update/append to a existing archive. if last i/o hit media end,
+ * we need to go to the next volume not try a resync
+ */
+ if ((done > 0) || (lstrval == 0))
+ return(-1);
+
+ if ((act == APPND) || (act == ARCHIVE)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot allow updates to an archive with flaws.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (io_ok)
+ did_io = 1;
+
+ switch(artyp) {
+ case ISTAPE:
+ /*
+ * if the last i/o was a successful data transfer, we assume
+ * the fault is just a bad record on the tape that we are now
+ * past. If we did not get any data since the last resync try
+ * to move the tape foward one PHYSICAL record past any
+ * damaged tape section. Some tape drives are stubborn and need
+ * to be pushed.
+ */
+ if (io_ok) {
+ io_ok = 0;
+ lstrval = 1;
+ break;
+ }
+ mb.mt_op = MTFSR;
+ mb.mt_count = 1;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0)
+ break;
+ lstrval = 1;
+ break;
+ case ISREG:
+ case ISCHR:
+ case ISBLK:
+ /*
+ * try to step over the bad part of the device.
+ */
+ io_ok = 0;
+ if (((fsbz = arsb.st_blksize) <= 0) || (artyp != ISREG))
+ fsbz = BLKMULT;
+ if ((cpos = lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR)) < 0)
+ break;
+ mpos = fsbz - (cpos % (off_t)fsbz);
+ if (lseek(arfd, mpos, SEEK_CUR) < 0)
+ break;
+ lstrval = 1;
+ break;
+ case ISPIPE:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * cannot recover on these archive device types
+ */
+ io_ok = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (lstrval <= 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to recover from an archive read failure.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ paxwarn(0, "Attempting to recover from an archive read failure.");
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_fow()
+ * Move the I/O position within the archive foward the specified number of
+ * bytes as supported by the device. If we cannot move the requested
+ * number of bytes, return the actual number of bytes moved in skipped.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if moved the requested distance, -1 on complete failure, 1 on
+ * partial move (the amount moved is in skipped)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_fow(off_t sksz, off_t *skipped)
+#else
+int
+ar_fow(sksz, skipped)
+ off_t sksz;
+ off_t *skipped;
+#endif
+{
+ off_t cpos;
+ off_t mpos;
+
+ *skipped = 0;
+ if (sksz <= 0)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * we cannot move foward at EOF or error
+ */
+ if (lstrval <= 0)
+ return(lstrval);
+
+ /*
+ * Safer to read forward on devices where it is hard to find the end of
+ * the media without reading to it. With tapes we cannot be sure of the
+ * number of physical blocks to skip (we do not know physical block
+ * size at this point), so we must only read foward on tapes!
+ */
+ if (artyp != ISREG)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * figure out where we are in the archive
+ */
+ if ((cpos = lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR)) >= 0) {
+ /*
+ * we can be asked to move farther than there are bytes in this
+ * volume, if so, just go to file end and let normal buf_fill()
+ * deal with the end of file (it will go to next volume by
+ * itself)
+ */
+ if ((mpos = cpos + sksz) > arsb.st_size) {
+ *skipped = arsb.st_size - cpos;
+ mpos = arsb.st_size;
+ } else
+ *skipped = sksz;
+ if (lseek(arfd, mpos, SEEK_SET) >= 0)
+ return(0);
+ }
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Foward positioning operation on archive failed");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_rev()
+ * move the i/o position within the archive backwards the specified byte
+ * count as supported by the device. With tapes drives we RESET rdblksz to
+ * the PHYSICAL blocksize.
+ * NOTE: We should only be called to move backwards so we can rewrite the
+ * last records (the trailer) of an archive (APPEND).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if moved the requested distance, -1 on complete failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_rev(off_t sksz)
+#else
+int
+ar_rev(sksz)
+ off_t sksz;
+#endif
+{
+ off_t cpos;
+ struct mtop mb;
+ register int phyblk;
+
+ /*
+ * make sure we do not have try to reverse on a flawed archive
+ */
+ if (lstrval < 0)
+ return(lstrval);
+
+ switch(artyp) {
+ case ISPIPE:
+ if (sksz <= 0)
+ break;
+ /*
+ * cannot go backwards on these critters
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Reverse positioning on pipes is not supported.");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ case ISREG:
+ case ISBLK:
+ case ISCHR:
+ default:
+ if (sksz <= 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * For things other than files, backwards movement has a very
+ * high probability of failure as we really do not know the
+ * true attributes of the device we are talking to (the device
+ * may not even have the ability to lseek() in any direction).
+ * First we figure out where we are in the archive.
+ */
+ if ((cpos = lseek(arfd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_CUR)) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+ "Unable to obtain current archive byte offset");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we may try to go backwards past the start when the archive
+ * is only a single record. If this hapens and we are on a
+ * multi volume archive, we need to go to the end of the
+ * previous volume and continue our movement backwards from
+ * there.
+ */
+ if ((cpos -= sksz) < (off_t)0L) {
+ if (arvol > 1) {
+ /*
+ * this should never happen
+ */
+ paxwarn(1,"Reverse position on previous volume.");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ cpos = (off_t)0L;
+ }
+ if (lseek(arfd, cpos, SEEK_SET) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to seek archive backwards");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ break;
+ case ISTAPE:
+ /*
+ * Calculate and move the proper number of PHYSICAL tape
+ * blocks. If the sksz is not an even multiple of the physical
+ * tape size, we cannot do the move (this should never happen).
+ * (We also cannot handler trailers spread over two vols).
+ * get_phys() also makes sure we are in front of the filemark.
+ */
+ if ((phyblk = get_phys()) <= 0) {
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * make sure future tape reads only go by physical tape block
+ * size (set rdblksz to the real size).
+ */
+ rdblksz = phyblk;
+
+ /*
+ * if no movement is required, just return (we must be after
+ * get_phys() so the physical blocksize is properly set)
+ */
+ if (sksz <= 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * ok we have to move. Make sure the tape drive can do it.
+ */
+ if (sksz % phyblk) {
+ paxwarn(1,
+ "Tape drive unable to backspace requested amount");
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * move backwards the requested number of bytes
+ */
+ mb.mt_op = MTBSR;
+ mb.mt_count = sksz/phyblk;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1,errno, "Unable to backspace tape %d blocks.",
+ mb.mt_count);
+ lstrval = -1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ lstrval = 1;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * get_phys()
+ * Determine the physical block size on a tape drive. We need the physical
+ * block size so we know how many bytes we skip over when we move with
+ * mtio commands. We also make sure we are BEFORE THE TAPE FILEMARK when
+ * return.
+ * This is one really SLOW routine...
+ * Return:
+ * physical block size if ok (ok > 0), -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+get_phys(void)
+#else
+static int
+get_phys()
+#endif
+{
+ register int padsz = 0;
+ register int res;
+ register int phyblk;
+ struct mtop mb;
+ char scbuf[MAXBLK];
+
+ /*
+ * move to the file mark, and then back up one record and read it.
+ * this should tell us the physical record size the tape is using.
+ */
+ if (lstrval == 1) {
+ /*
+ * we know we are at file mark when we get back a 0 from
+ * read()
+ */
+ while ((res = read(arfd, scbuf, sizeof(scbuf))) > 0)
+ padsz += res;
+ if (res < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to locate tape filemark.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * move backwards over the file mark so we are at the end of the
+ * last record.
+ */
+ mb.mt_op = MTBSF;
+ mb.mt_count = 1;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to backspace over tape filemark.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * move backwards so we are in front of the last record and read it to
+ * get physical tape blocksize.
+ */
+ mb.mt_op = MTBSR;
+ mb.mt_count = 1;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to backspace over last tape block.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if ((phyblk = read(arfd, scbuf, sizeof(scbuf))) <= 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Cannot determine archive tape blocksize.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * read foward to the file mark, then back up in front of the filemark
+ * (this is a bit paranoid, but should be safe to do).
+ */
+ while ((res = read(arfd, scbuf, sizeof(scbuf))) > 0)
+ ;
+ if (res < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to locate tape filemark.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ mb.mt_op = MTBSF;
+ mb.mt_count = 1;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to backspace over tape filemark.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * set lstrval so we know that the filemark has not been seen
+ */
+ lstrval = 1;
+
+ /*
+ * return if there was no padding
+ */
+ if (padsz == 0)
+ return(phyblk);
+
+ /*
+ * make sure we can move backwards over the padding. (this should
+ * never fail).
+ */
+ if (padsz % phyblk) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Tape drive unable to backspace requested amount");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * move backwards over the padding so the head is where it was when
+ * we were first called (if required).
+ */
+ mb.mt_op = MTBSR;
+ mb.mt_count = padsz/phyblk;
+ if (ioctl(arfd, MTIOCTOP, &mb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1,errno,"Unable to backspace tape over %d pad blocks",
+ mb.mt_count);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(phyblk);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_next()
+ * prompts the user for the next volume in this archive. For some devices
+ * we may allow the media to be changed. Otherwise a new archive is
+ * prompted for. By pax spec, if there is no controlling tty or an eof is
+ * read on tty input, we must quit pax.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when ready to continue, -1 when all done
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ar_next(void)
+#else
+int
+ar_next()
+#endif
+{
+ char buf[PAXPATHLEN+2];
+ static int freeit = 0;
+ sigset_t o_mask;
+
+ /*
+ * WE MUST CLOSE THE DEVICE. A lot of devices must see last close, (so
+ * things like writing EOF etc will be done) (Watch out ar_close() can
+ * also be called via a signal handler, so we must prevent a race.
+ */
+ if (sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &s_mask, &o_mask) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Unable to set signal mask");
+ ar_close();
+ if (sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, &o_mask, NULL) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Unable to restore signal mask");
+
+ if (done || !wr_trail || strcmp(NM_TAR, argv0) == 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ tty_prnt("\nATTENTION! %s archive volume change required.\n", argv0);
+
+ /*
+ * if i/o is on stdin or stdout, we cannot reopen it (we do not know
+ * the name), the user will be forced to type it in.
+ */
+ if (strcmp(arcname, STDO) && strcmp(arcname, STDN) && (artyp != ISREG)
+ && (artyp != ISPIPE)) {
+ if (artyp == ISTAPE) {
+ tty_prnt("%s ready for archive tape volume: %d\n",
+ arcname, arvol);
+ tty_prnt("Load the NEXT TAPE on the tape drive");
+ } else {
+ tty_prnt("%s ready for archive volume: %d\n",
+ arcname, arvol);
+ tty_prnt("Load the NEXT STORAGE MEDIA (if required)");
+ }
+
+ if ((act == ARCHIVE) || (act == APPND))
+ tty_prnt(" and make sure it is WRITE ENABLED.\n");
+ else
+ tty_prnt("\n");
+
+ for(;;) {
+ tty_prnt("Type \"y\" to continue, \".\" to quit %s,",
+ argv0);
+ tty_prnt(" or \"s\" to switch to new device.\nIf you");
+ tty_prnt(" cannot change storage media, type \"s\"\n");
+ tty_prnt("Is the device ready and online? > ");
+
+ if ((tty_read(buf,sizeof(buf))<0) || !strcmp(buf,".")){
+ done = 1;
+ lstrval = -1;
+ tty_prnt("Quitting %s!\n", argv0);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if ((buf[0] == '\0') || (buf[1] != '\0')) {
+ tty_prnt("%s unknown command, try again\n",buf);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ switch (buf[0]) {
+ case 'y':
+ case 'Y':
+ /*
+ * we are to continue with the same device
+ */
+ if (ar_open(arcname) >= 0)
+ return(0);
+ tty_prnt("Cannot re-open %s, try again\n",
+ arcname);
+ continue;
+ case 's':
+ case 'S':
+ /*
+ * user wants to open a different device
+ */
+ tty_prnt("Switching to a different archive\n");
+ break;
+ default:
+ tty_prnt("%s unknown command, try again\n",buf);
+ continue;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ } else
+ tty_prnt("Ready for archive volume: %d\n", arvol);
+
+ /*
+ * have to go to a different archive
+ */
+ for (;;) {
+ tty_prnt("Input archive name or \".\" to quit %s.\n", argv0);
+ tty_prnt("Archive name > ");
+
+ if ((tty_read(buf, sizeof(buf)) < 0) || !strcmp(buf, ".")) {
+ done = 1;
+ lstrval = -1;
+ tty_prnt("Quitting %s!\n", argv0);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (buf[0] == '\0') {
+ tty_prnt("Empty file name, try again\n");
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (!strcmp(buf, "..")) {
+ tty_prnt("Illegal file name: .. try again\n");
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (strlen(buf) > PAXPATHLEN) {
+ tty_prnt("File name too long, try again\n");
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * try to open new archive
+ */
+ if (ar_open(buf) >= 0) {
+ if (freeit) {
+ (void)free(arcname);
+ freeit = 0;
+ }
+ if ((arcname = strdup(buf)) == NULL) {
+ done = 1;
+ lstrval = -1;
+ paxwarn(0, "Cannot save archive name.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ freeit = 1;
+ break;
+ }
+ tty_prnt("Cannot open %s, try again\n", buf);
+ continue;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ar_start_gzip()
+ * starts the gzip compression/decompression process as a child, using magic
+ * to keep the fd the same in the calling function (parent).
+ */
+void
+#ifdef __STDC__
+ar_start_gzip(int fd)
+#else
+ar_start_gzip(fd)
+ int fd;
+#endif
+{
+ pid_t pid;
+ int fds[2];
+ char *gzip_flags;
+
+ if (pipe(fds) < 0)
+ err(1, "could not pipe");
+ pid = fork();
+ if (pid < 0)
+ err(1, "could not fork");
+
+ /* parent */
+ if (pid) {
+ switch (act) {
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ dup2(fds[1], fd);
+ break;
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ dup2(fds[0], fd);
+ break;
+ default:
+ errx(1, "ar_start_gzip: impossible");
+ }
+ close(fds[0]);
+ close(fds[1]);
+ } else {
+ switch (act) {
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ dup2(fds[0], STDIN_FILENO);
+ dup2(fd, STDOUT_FILENO);
+ gzip_flags = "-c";
+ break;
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ dup2(fds[1], STDOUT_FILENO);
+ dup2(fd, STDIN_FILENO);
+ gzip_flags = "-dc";
+ break;
+ default:
+ errx(1, "ar_start_gzip: impossible");
+ }
+ close(fds[0]);
+ close(fds[1]);
+ if (execlp(gzip_program, gzip_program, gzip_flags, NULL) < 0)
+ err(1, "could not exec");
+ /* NOTREACHED */
+ }
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: ar_subs.c,v 1.14 1998/09/20 02:22:21 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: ar_subs.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:06 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)ar_subs.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: ar_subs.c,v 1.14 1998/09/20 02:22:21 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+static void wr_archive __P((register ARCHD *, int is_app));
+static int get_arc __P((void));
+static int next_head __P((register ARCHD *));
+extern sigset_t s_mask;
+
+/*
+ * Routines which control the overall operation modes of pax as specified by
+ * the user: list, append, read ...
+ */
+
+static char hdbuf[BLKMULT]; /* space for archive header on read */
+u_long flcnt; /* number of files processed */
+
+/*
+ * list()
+ * list the contents of an archive which match user supplied pattern(s)
+ * (no pattern matches all).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+list(void)
+#else
+void
+list()
+#endif
+{
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int res;
+ ARCHD archd;
+ time_t now;
+
+ arcn = &archd;
+ /*
+ * figure out archive type; pass any format specific options to the
+ * archive option processing routine; call the format init routine. We
+ * also save current time for ls_list() so we do not make a system
+ * call for each file we need to print. If verbose (vflag) start up
+ * the name and group caches.
+ */
+ if ((get_arc() < 0) || ((*frmt->options)() < 0) ||
+ ((*frmt->st_rd)() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ if (vflag && ((uidtb_start() < 0) || (gidtb_start() < 0)))
+ return;
+
+ now = time(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * step through the archive until the format says it is done
+ */
+ while (next_head(arcn) == 0) {
+ /*
+ * check for pattern, and user specified options match.
+ * When all patterns are matched we are done.
+ */
+ if ((res = pat_match(arcn)) < 0)
+ break;
+
+ if ((res == 0) && (sel_chk(arcn) == 0)) {
+ /*
+ * pattern resulted in a selected file
+ */
+ if (pat_sel(arcn) < 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * modify the name as requested by the user if name
+ * survives modification, do a listing of the file
+ */
+ if ((res = mod_name(arcn)) < 0)
+ break;
+ if (res == 0)
+ ls_list(arcn, now, stdout);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * skip to next archive format header using values calculated
+ * by the format header read routine
+ */
+ if (rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad) == 1)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * all done, let format have a chance to cleanup, and make sure that
+ * the patterns supplied by the user were all matched
+ */
+ (void)(*frmt->end_rd)();
+ (void)sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &s_mask, NULL);
+ ar_close();
+ pat_chk();
+}
+
+/*
+ * extract()
+ * extract the member(s) of an archive as specified by user supplied
+ * pattern(s) (no patterns extracts all members)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+extract(void)
+#else
+void
+extract()
+#endif
+{
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int res;
+ off_t cnt;
+ ARCHD archd;
+ struct stat sb;
+ int fd;
+ time_t now;
+
+ arcn = &archd;
+ /*
+ * figure out archive type; pass any format specific options to the
+ * archive option processing routine; call the format init routine;
+ * start up the directory modification time and access mode database
+ */
+ if ((get_arc() < 0) || ((*frmt->options)() < 0) ||
+ ((*frmt->st_rd)() < 0) || (dir_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * When we are doing interactive rename, we store the mapping of names
+ * so we can fix up hard links files later in the archive.
+ */
+ if (iflag && (name_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ now = time(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * step through each entry on the archive until the format read routine
+ * says it is done
+ */
+ while (next_head(arcn) == 0) {
+
+ /*
+ * check for pattern, and user specified options match. When
+ * all the patterns are matched we are done
+ */
+ if ((res = pat_match(arcn)) < 0)
+ break;
+
+ if ((res > 0) || (sel_chk(arcn) != 0)) {
+ /*
+ * file is not selected. skip past any file data and
+ * padding and go back for the next archive member
+ */
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * with -u or -D only extract when the archive member is newer
+ * than the file with the same name in the file system (nos
+ * test of being the same type is required).
+ * NOTE: this test is done BEFORE name modifications as
+ * specified by pax. this operation can be confusing to the
+ * user who might expect the test to be done on an existing
+ * file AFTER the name mod. In honesty the pax spec is probably
+ * flawed in this respect.
+ */
+ if ((uflag || Dflag) && ((lstat(arcn->name, &sb) == 0))) {
+ if (uflag && Dflag) {
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime)) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ } else if (Dflag) {
+ if (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ } else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * this archive member is now been selected. modify the name.
+ */
+ if ((pat_sel(arcn) < 0) || ((res = mod_name(arcn)) < 0))
+ break;
+ if (res > 0) {
+ /*
+ * a bad name mod, skip and purge name from link table
+ */
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Non standard -Y and -Z flag. When the exisiting file is
+ * same age or newer skip
+ */
+ if ((Yflag || Zflag) && ((lstat(arcn->name, &sb) == 0))) {
+ if (Yflag && Zflag) {
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime)) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ } else if (Yflag) {
+ if (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ } else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ if (vflag) {
+ if (vflag > 1)
+ ls_list(arcn, now, listf);
+ else {
+ (void)fputs(arcn->name, listf);
+ vfpart = 1;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if required, chdir around.
+ */
+ if ((arcn->pat != NULL) && (arcn->pat->chdname != NULL))
+ if (chdir(arcn->pat->chdname) != 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Cannot chdir to %s",
+ arcn->pat->chdname);
+
+ /*
+ * all ok, extract this member based on type
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_REG) && (arcn->type != PAX_CTG)) {
+ /*
+ * process archive members that are not regular files.
+ * throw out padding and any data that might follow the
+ * header (as determined by the format).
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_HLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ res = lnk_creat(arcn);
+ else
+ res = node_creat(arcn);
+
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ if (res < 0)
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ continue;
+ }
+ /*
+ * we have a file with data here. If we can not create it, skip
+ * over the data and purge the name from hard link table
+ */
+ if ((fd = file_creat(arcn)) < 0) {
+ (void)rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+ /*
+ * extract the file from the archive and skip over padding and
+ * any unprocessed data
+ */
+ res = (*frmt->rd_data)(arcn, fd, &cnt);
+ file_close(arcn, fd);
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ if (!res)
+ (void)rd_skip(cnt + arcn->pad);
+
+ /*
+ * if required, chdir around.
+ */
+ if ((arcn->pat != NULL) && (arcn->pat->chdname != NULL))
+ if (fchdir(cwdfd) != 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+ "Can't fchdir to starting directory");
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * all done, restore directory modes and times as required; make sure
+ * all patterns supplied by the user were matched; block off signals
+ * to avoid chance for multiple entry into the cleanup code.
+ */
+ (void)(*frmt->end_rd)();
+ (void)sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &s_mask, NULL);
+ ar_close();
+ proc_dir();
+ pat_chk();
+}
+
+/*
+ * wr_archive()
+ * Write an archive. used in both creating a new archive and appends on
+ * previously written archive.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static void
+wr_archive(register ARCHD *arcn, int is_app)
+#else
+static void
+wr_archive(arcn, is_app)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ int is_app;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ register int hlk;
+ register int wr_one;
+ off_t cnt;
+ int (*wrf)();
+ int fd = -1;
+ time_t now;
+
+ /*
+ * if this format supports hard link storage, start up the database
+ * that detects them.
+ */
+ if (((hlk = frmt->hlk) == 1) && (lnk_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * start up the file traversal code and format specific write
+ */
+ if ((ftree_start() < 0) || ((*frmt->st_wr)() < 0))
+ return;
+ wrf = frmt->wr;
+
+ /*
+ * When we are doing interactive rename, we store the mapping of names
+ * so we can fix up hard links files later in the archive.
+ */
+ if (iflag && (name_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * if this not append, and there are no files, we do no write a trailer
+ */
+ wr_one = is_app;
+
+ now = time(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * while there are files to archive, process them one at at time
+ */
+ while (next_file(arcn) == 0) {
+ /*
+ * check if this file meets user specified options match.
+ */
+ if (sel_chk(arcn) != 0)
+ continue;
+ fd = -1;
+ if (uflag) {
+ /*
+ * only archive if this file is newer than a file with
+ * the same name that is already stored on the archive
+ */
+ if ((res = chk_ftime(arcn)) < 0)
+ break;
+ if (res > 0)
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * this file is considered selected now. see if this is a hard
+ * link to a file already stored
+ */
+ ftree_sel(arcn);
+ if (hlk && (chk_lnk(arcn) < 0))
+ break;
+
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_REG) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_CTG)) {
+ /*
+ * we will have to read this file. by opening it now we
+ * can avoid writing a header to the archive for a file
+ * we were later unable to read (we also purge it from
+ * the link table).
+ */
+ if ((fd = open(arcn->org_name, O_RDONLY, 0)) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1,errno, "Unable to open %s to read",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Now modify the name as requested by the user
+ */
+ if ((res = mod_name(arcn)) < 0) {
+ /*
+ * name modification says to skip this file, close the
+ * file and purge link table entry
+ */
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fd);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if ((res > 0) || (docrc && (set_crc(arcn, fd) < 0))) {
+ /*
+ * unable to obtain the crc we need, close the file,
+ * purge link table entry
+ */
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fd);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (vflag) {
+ if (vflag > 1)
+ ls_list(arcn, now, listf);
+ else {
+ (void)fputs(arcn->name, listf);
+ vfpart = 1;
+ }
+ }
+ ++flcnt;
+
+ /*
+ * looks safe to store the file, have the format specific
+ * routine write routine store the file header on the archive
+ */
+ if ((res = (*wrf)(arcn)) < 0) {
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fd);
+ break;
+ }
+ wr_one = 1;
+ if (res > 0) {
+ /*
+ * format write says no file data needs to be stored
+ * so we are done messing with this file
+ */
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fd);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Add file data to the archive, quit on write error. if we
+ * cannot write the entire file contents to the archive we
+ * must pad the archive to replace the missing file data
+ * (otherwise during an extract the file header for the file
+ * which FOLLOWS this one will not be where we expect it to
+ * be).
+ */
+ res = (*frmt->wr_data)(arcn, fd, &cnt);
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fd);
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ if (res < 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * pad as required, cnt is number of bytes not written
+ */
+ if (((cnt > 0) && (wr_skip(cnt) < 0)) ||
+ ((arcn->pad > 0) && (wr_skip(arcn->pad) < 0)))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * tell format to write trailer; pad to block boundry; reset directory
+ * mode/access times, and check if all patterns supplied by the user
+ * were matched. block off signals to avoid chance for multiple entry
+ * into the cleanup code
+ */
+ if (wr_one) {
+ (*frmt->end_wr)();
+ wr_fin();
+ }
+ (void)sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &s_mask, NULL);
+ ar_close();
+ if (tflag)
+ proc_dir();
+ ftree_chk();
+}
+
+/*
+ * append()
+ * Add file to previously written archive. Archive format specified by the
+ * user must agree with archive. The archive is read first to collect
+ * modification times (if -u) and locate the archive trailer. The archive
+ * is positioned in front of the record with the trailer and wr_archive()
+ * is called to add the new members.
+ * PAX IMPLEMENTATION DETAIL NOTE:
+ * -u is implemented by adding the new members to the end of the archive.
+ * Care is taken so that these do not end up as links to the older
+ * version of the same file already stored in the archive. It is expected
+ * when extraction occurs these newer versions will over-write the older
+ * ones stored "earlier" in the archive (this may be a bad assumption as
+ * it depends on the implementation of the program doing the extraction).
+ * It is really difficult to splice in members without either re-writing
+ * the entire archive (from the point were the old version was), or having
+ * assistance of the format specification in terms of a special update
+ * header that invalidates a previous archive record. The posix spec left
+ * the method used to implement -u unspecified. This pax is able to
+ * over write existing files that it creates.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+append(void)
+#else
+void
+append()
+#endif
+{
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int res;
+ ARCHD archd;
+ FSUB *orgfrmt;
+ int udev;
+ off_t tlen;
+
+ arcn = &archd;
+ orgfrmt = frmt;
+
+ /*
+ * Do not allow an append operation if the actual archive is of a
+ * different format than the user specified foramt.
+ */
+ if (get_arc() < 0)
+ return;
+ if ((orgfrmt != NULL) && (orgfrmt != frmt)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot mix current archive format %s with %s",
+ frmt->name, orgfrmt->name);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * pass the format any options and start up format
+ */
+ if (((*frmt->options)() < 0) || ((*frmt->st_rd)() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * if we only are adding members that are newer, we need to save the
+ * mod times for all files we see.
+ */
+ if (uflag && (ftime_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * some archive formats encode hard links by recording the device and
+ * file serial number (inode) but copy the file anyway (multiple times)
+ * to the archive. When we append, we run the risk that newly added
+ * files may have the same device and inode numbers as those recorded
+ * on the archive but during a previous run. If this happens, when the
+ * archive is extracted we get INCORRECT hard links. We avoid this by
+ * remapping the device numbers so that newly added files will never
+ * use the same device number as one found on the archive. remapping
+ * allows new members to safely have links among themselves. remapping
+ * also avoids problems with file inode (serial number) truncations
+ * when the inode number is larger than storage space in the archive
+ * header. See the remap routines for more details.
+ */
+ if ((udev = frmt->udev) && (dev_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * reading the archive may take a long time. If verbose tell the user
+ */
+ if (vflag) {
+ (void)fprintf(listf,
+ "%s: Reading archive to position at the end...", argv0);
+ vfpart = 1;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * step through the archive until the format says it is done
+ */
+ while (next_head(arcn) == 0) {
+ /*
+ * check if this file meets user specified options.
+ */
+ if (sel_chk(arcn) != 0) {
+ if (rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad) == 1)
+ break;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (uflag) {
+ /*
+ * see if this is the newest version of this file has
+ * already been seen, if so skip.
+ */
+ if ((res = chk_ftime(arcn)) < 0)
+ break;
+ if (res > 0) {
+ if (rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad) == 1)
+ break;
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Store this device number. Device numbers seen during the
+ * read phase of append will cause newly appended files with a
+ * device number seen in the old part of the archive to be
+ * remapped to an unused device number.
+ */
+ if ((udev && (add_dev(arcn) < 0)) ||
+ (rd_skip(arcn->skip + arcn->pad) == 1))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * done, finish up read and get the number of bytes to back up so we
+ * can add new members. The format might have used the hard link table,
+ * purge it.
+ */
+ tlen = (*frmt->end_rd)();
+ lnk_end();
+
+ /*
+ * try to postion for write, if this fails quit. if any error occurs,
+ * we will refuse to write
+ */
+ if (appnd_start(tlen) < 0)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * tell the user we are done reading.
+ */
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)fputs("done.\n", listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * go to the writing phase to add the new members
+ */
+ wr_archive(arcn, 1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * archive()
+ * write a new archive
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+archive(void)
+#else
+void
+archive()
+#endif
+{
+ ARCHD archd;
+
+ /*
+ * if we only are adding members that are newer, we need to save the
+ * mod times for all files; set up for writing; pass the format any
+ * options write the archive
+ */
+ if ((uflag && (ftime_start() < 0)) || (wr_start() < 0))
+ return;
+ if ((*frmt->options)() < 0)
+ return;
+
+ wr_archive(&archd, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * copy()
+ * copy files from one part of the file system to another. this does not
+ * use any archive storage. The EFFECT OF THE COPY IS THE SAME as if an
+ * archive was written and then extracted in the destination directory
+ * (except the files are forced to be under the destination directory).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+copy(void)
+#else
+void
+copy()
+#endif
+{
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int res;
+ register int fddest;
+ register char *dest_pt;
+ register int dlen;
+ register int drem;
+ int fdsrc = -1;
+ struct stat sb;
+ ARCHD archd;
+ char dirbuf[PAXPATHLEN+1];
+
+ arcn = &archd;
+ /*
+ * set up the destination dir path and make sure it is a directory. We
+ * make sure we have a trailing / on the destination
+ */
+ dlen = l_strncpy(dirbuf, dirptr, sizeof(dirbuf) - 1);
+ dest_pt = dirbuf + dlen;
+ if (*(dest_pt-1) != '/') {
+ *dest_pt++ = '/';
+ ++dlen;
+ }
+ *dest_pt = '\0';
+ drem = PAXPATHLEN - dlen;
+
+ if (stat(dirptr, &sb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Cannot access destination directory %s",
+ dirptr);
+ return;
+ }
+ if (!S_ISDIR(sb.st_mode)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Destination is not a directory %s", dirptr);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * start up the hard link table; file traversal routines and the
+ * modification time and access mode database
+ */
+ if ((lnk_start() < 0) || (ftree_start() < 0) || (dir_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * When we are doing interactive rename, we store the mapping of names
+ * so we can fix up hard links files later in the archive.
+ */
+ if (iflag && (name_start() < 0))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * set up to cp file trees
+ */
+ cp_start();
+
+ /*
+ * while there are files to archive, process them
+ */
+ while (next_file(arcn) == 0) {
+ fdsrc = -1;
+
+ /*
+ * check if this file meets user specified options
+ */
+ if (sel_chk(arcn) != 0)
+ continue;
+
+ /*
+ * if there is already a file in the destination directory with
+ * the same name and it is newer, skip the one stored on the
+ * archive.
+ * NOTE: this test is done BEFORE name modifications as
+ * specified by pax. this can be confusing to the user who
+ * might expect the test to be done on an existing file AFTER
+ * the name mod. In honesty the pax spec is probably flawed in
+ * this respect
+ */
+ if (uflag || Dflag) {
+ /*
+ * create the destination name
+ */
+ if (*(arcn->name) == '/')
+ res = 1;
+ else
+ res = 0;
+ if ((arcn->nlen - res) > drem) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Destination pathname too long %s",
+ arcn->name);
+ continue;
+ }
+ (void)strncpy(dest_pt, arcn->name + res, drem);
+ dirbuf[PAXPATHLEN] = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * if existing file is same age or newer skip
+ */
+ res = lstat(dirbuf, &sb);
+ *dest_pt = '\0';
+
+ if (res == 0) {
+ if (uflag && Dflag) {
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_mtime<=sb.st_mtime) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime<=sb.st_ctime))
+ continue;
+ } else if (Dflag) {
+ if (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime)
+ continue;
+ } else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime)
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * this file is considered selected. See if this is a hard link
+ * to a previous file; modify the name as requested by the
+ * user; set the final destination.
+ */
+ ftree_sel(arcn);
+ if ((chk_lnk(arcn) < 0) || ((res = mod_name(arcn)) < 0))
+ break;
+ if ((res > 0) || (set_dest(arcn, dirbuf, dlen) < 0)) {
+ /*
+ * skip file, purge from link table
+ */
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Non standard -Y and -Z flag. When the exisiting file is
+ * same age or newer skip
+ */
+ if ((Yflag || Zflag) && ((lstat(arcn->name, &sb) == 0))) {
+ if (Yflag && Zflag) {
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime))
+ continue;
+ } else if (Yflag) {
+ if (arcn->sb.st_ctime <= sb.st_ctime)
+ continue;
+ } else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime <= sb.st_mtime)
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (vflag) {
+ (void)fputs(arcn->name, listf);
+ vfpart = 1;
+ }
+ ++flcnt;
+
+ /*
+ * try to create a hard link to the src file if requested
+ * but make sure we are not trying to overwrite ourselves.
+ */
+ if (lflag)
+ res = cross_lnk(arcn);
+ else
+ res = chk_same(arcn);
+ if (res <= 0) {
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * have to create a new file
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_REG) && (arcn->type != PAX_CTG)) {
+ /*
+ * create a link or special file
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_HLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ res = lnk_creat(arcn);
+ else
+ res = node_creat(arcn);
+ if (res < 0)
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * have to copy a regular file to the destination directory.
+ * first open source file and then create the destination file
+ */
+ if ((fdsrc = open(arcn->org_name, O_RDONLY, 0)) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to open %s to read",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+ if ((fddest = file_creat(arcn)) < 0) {
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fdsrc);
+ purg_lnk(arcn);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * copy source file data to the destination file
+ */
+ cp_file(arcn, fdsrc, fddest);
+ file_close(arcn, fddest);
+ rdfile_close(arcn, &fdsrc);
+
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)putc('\n', listf);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * restore directory modes and times as required; make sure all
+ * patterns were selected block off signals to avoid chance for
+ * multiple entry into the cleanup code.
+ */
+ (void)sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &s_mask, NULL);
+ ar_close();
+ proc_dir();
+ ftree_chk();
+}
+
+/*
+ * next_head()
+ * try to find a valid header in the archive. Uses format specific
+ * routines to extract the header and id the trailer. Trailers may be
+ * located within a valid header or in an invalid header (the location
+ * is format specific. The inhead field from the option table tells us
+ * where to look for the trailer).
+ * We keep reading (and resyncing) until we get enough contiguous data
+ * to check for a header. If we cannot find one, we shift by a byte
+ * add a new byte from the archive to the end of the buffer and try again.
+ * If we get a read error, we throw out what we have (as we must have
+ * contiguous data) and start over again.
+ * ASSUMED: headers fit within a BLKMULT header.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if we got a header, -1 if we are unable to ever find another one
+ * (we reached the end of input, or we reached the limit on retries. see
+ * the specs for rd_wrbuf() for more details)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+next_head(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+next_head(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register int ret;
+ register char *hdend;
+ register int res;
+ register int shftsz;
+ register int hsz;
+ register int in_resync = 0; /* set when we are in resync mode */
+ int cnt = 0; /* counter for trailer function */
+ int first = 1; /* on 1st read, EOF isn't premature. */
+
+ /*
+ * set up initial conditions, we want a whole frmt->hsz block as we
+ * have no data yet.
+ */
+ res = hsz = frmt->hsz;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ shftsz = hsz - 1;
+ for(;;) {
+ /*
+ * keep looping until we get a contiguous FULL buffer
+ * (frmt->hsz is the proper size)
+ */
+ for (;;) {
+ if ((ret = rd_wrbuf(hdend, res)) == res)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * If we read 0 bytes (EOF) from an archive when we
+ * expect to find a header, we have stepped upon
+ * an archive without the customary block of zeroes
+ * end marker. It's just stupid to error out on
+ * them, so exit gracefully.
+ */
+ if (first && ret == 0)
+ return(-1);
+ first = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * some kind of archive read problem, try to resync the
+ * storage device, better give the user the bad news.
+ */
+ if ((ret == 0) || (rd_sync() < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Premature end of file on archive read");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (!in_resync) {
+ if (act == APPND) {
+ paxwarn(1,
+ "Archive I/O error, cannot continue");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1,"Archive I/O error. Trying to recover.");
+ ++in_resync;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * oh well, throw it all out and start over
+ */
+ res = hsz;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * ok we have a contiguous buffer of the right size. Call the
+ * format read routine. If this was not a valid header and this
+ * format stores trailers outside of the header, call the
+ * format specific trailer routine to check for a trailer. We
+ * have to watch out that we do not mis-identify file data or
+ * block padding as a header or trailer. Format specific
+ * trailer functions must NOT check for the trailer while we
+ * are running in resync mode. Some trailer functions may tell
+ * us that this block cannot contain a valid header either, so
+ * we then throw out the entire block and start over.
+ */
+ if ((*frmt->rd)(arcn, hdbuf) == 0)
+ break;
+
+ if (!frmt->inhead) {
+ /*
+ * this format has trailers outside of valid headers
+ */
+ if ((ret = (*frmt->trail)(hdbuf,in_resync,&cnt)) == 0){
+ /*
+ * valid trailer found, drain input as required
+ */
+ ar_drain();
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (ret == 1) {
+ /*
+ * we are in resync and we were told to throw
+ * the whole block out because none of the
+ * bytes in this block can be used to form a
+ * valid header
+ */
+ res = hsz;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ continue;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Brute force section.
+ * not a valid header. We may be able to find a header yet. So
+ * we shift over by one byte, and set up to read one byte at a
+ * time from the archive and place it at the end of the buffer.
+ * We will keep moving byte at a time until we find a header or
+ * get a read error and have to start over.
+ */
+ if (!in_resync) {
+ if (act == APPND) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to append, archive header flaw");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1,"Invalid header, starting valid header search.");
+ ++in_resync;
+ }
+ memmove(hdbuf, hdbuf+1, shftsz);
+ res = 1;
+ hdend = hdbuf + shftsz;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * ok got a valid header, check for trailer if format encodes it in the
+ * the header. NOTE: the parameters are different than trailer routines
+ * which encode trailers outside of the header!
+ */
+ if (frmt->inhead && ((*frmt->trail)(arcn) == 0)) {
+ /*
+ * valid trailer found, drain input as required
+ */
+ ar_drain();
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ ++flcnt;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * get_arc()
+ * Figure out what format an archive is. Handles archive with flaws by
+ * brute force searches for a legal header in any supported format. The
+ * format id routines have to be careful to NOT mis-identify a format.
+ * ASSUMED: headers fit within a BLKMULT header.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if archive found -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+get_arc(void)
+#else
+static int
+get_arc()
+#endif
+{
+ register int i;
+ register int hdsz = 0;
+ register int res;
+ register int minhd = BLKMULT;
+ char *hdend;
+ int notice = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * find the smallest header size in all archive formats and then set up
+ * to read the archive.
+ */
+ for (i = 0; ford[i] >= 0; ++i) {
+ if (fsub[ford[i]].hsz < minhd)
+ minhd = fsub[ford[i]].hsz;
+ }
+ if (rd_start() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ res = BLKMULT;
+ hdsz = 0;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ for(;;) {
+ for (;;) {
+ /*
+ * fill the buffer with at least the smallest header
+ */
+ i = rd_wrbuf(hdend, res);
+ if (i > 0)
+ hdsz += i;
+ if (hdsz >= minhd)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * if we cannot recover from a read error quit
+ */
+ if ((i == 0) || (rd_sync() < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * when we get an error none of the data we already
+ * have can be used to create a legal header (we just
+ * got an error in the middle), so we throw it all out
+ * and refill the buffer with fresh data.
+ */
+ res = BLKMULT;
+ hdsz = 0;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ if (!notice) {
+ if (act == APPND)
+ return(-1);
+ paxwarn(1,"Cannot identify format. Searching...");
+ ++notice;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we have at least the size of the smallest header in any
+ * archive format. Look to see if we have a match. The array
+ * ford[] is used to specify the header id order to reduce the
+ * chance of incorrectly id'ing a valid header (some formats
+ * may be subsets of each other and the order would then be
+ * important).
+ */
+ for (i = 0; ford[i] >= 0; ++i) {
+ if ((*fsub[ford[i]].id)(hdbuf, hdsz) < 0)
+ continue;
+ frmt = &(fsub[ford[i]]);
+ /*
+ * yuck, to avoid slow special case code in the extract
+ * routines, just push this header back as if it was
+ * not seen. We have left extra space at start of the
+ * buffer for this purpose. This is a bit ugly, but
+ * adding all the special case code is far worse.
+ */
+ pback(hdbuf, hdsz);
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * We have a flawed archive, no match. we start searching, but
+ * we never allow additions to flawed archives
+ */
+ if (!notice) {
+ if (act == APPND)
+ return(-1);
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot identify format. Searching...");
+ ++notice;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * brute force search for a header that we can id.
+ * we shift through byte at a time. this is slow, but we cannot
+ * determine the nature of the flaw in the archive in a
+ * portable manner
+ */
+ if (--hdsz > 0) {
+ memmove(hdbuf, hdbuf+1, hdsz);
+ res = BLKMULT - hdsz;
+ hdend = hdbuf + hdsz;
+ } else {
+ res = BLKMULT;
+ hdend = hdbuf;
+ hdsz = 0;
+ }
+ }
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * we cannot find a header, bow, apologize and quit
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Sorry, unable to determine archive format.");
+ return(-1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: buf_subs.c,v 1.7 1997/09/01 18:29:46 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: buf_subs.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:08 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)buf_subs.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: buf_subs.c,v 1.7 1997/09/01 18:29:46 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * routines which implement archive and file buffering
+ */
+
+#define MINFBSZ 512 /* default block size for hole detect */
+#define MAXFLT 10 /* default media read error limit */
+
+/*
+ * Need to change bufmem to dynamic allocation when the upper
+ * limit on blocking size is removed (though that will violate pax spec)
+ * MAXBLK define and tests will also need to be updated.
+ */
+static char bufmem[MAXBLK+BLKMULT]; /* i/o buffer + pushback id space */
+static char *buf; /* normal start of i/o buffer */
+static char *bufend; /* end or last char in i/o buffer */
+static char *bufpt; /* read/write point in i/o buffer */
+int blksz = MAXBLK; /* block input/output size in bytes */
+int wrblksz; /* user spec output size in bytes */
+int maxflt = MAXFLT; /* MAX consecutive media errors */
+int rdblksz; /* first read blksize (tapes only) */
+off_t wrlimit; /* # of bytes written per archive vol */
+off_t wrcnt; /* # of bytes written on current vol */
+off_t rdcnt; /* # of bytes read on current vol */
+
+/*
+ * wr_start()
+ * set up the buffering system to operate in a write mode
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 if the user specified write block size violates pax spec
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+wr_start(void)
+#else
+int
+wr_start()
+#endif
+{
+ buf = &(bufmem[BLKMULT]);
+ /*
+ * Check to make sure the write block size meets pax specs. If the user
+ * does not specify a blocksize, we use the format default blocksize.
+ * We must be picky on writes, so we do not allow the user to create an
+ * archive that might be hard to read elsewhere. If all ok, we then
+ * open the first archive volume
+ */
+ if (!wrblksz)
+ wrblksz = frmt->bsz;
+ if (wrblksz > MAXBLK) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Write block size of %d too large, maximium is: %d",
+ wrblksz, MAXBLK);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (wrblksz % BLKMULT) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Write block size of %d is not a %d byte multiple",
+ wrblksz, BLKMULT);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (wrblksz > MAXBLK_POSIX) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Write block size of %d larger than POSIX max %d, archive may not be portable",
+ wrblksz, MAXBLK_POSIX);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we only allow wrblksz to be used with all archive operations
+ */
+ blksz = rdblksz = wrblksz;
+ if ((ar_open(arcname) < 0) && (ar_next() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ wrcnt = 0;
+ bufend = buf + wrblksz;
+ bufpt = buf;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_start()
+ * set up buffering system to read an archive
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rd_start(void)
+#else
+int
+rd_start()
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * leave space for the header pushback (see get_arc()). If we are
+ * going to append and user specified a write block size, check it
+ * right away
+ */
+ buf = &(bufmem[BLKMULT]);
+ if ((act == APPND) && wrblksz) {
+ if (wrblksz > MAXBLK) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Write block size %d too large, maximium is: %d",
+ wrblksz, MAXBLK);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (wrblksz % BLKMULT) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Write block size %d is not a %d byte multiple",
+ wrblksz, BLKMULT);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * open the archive
+ */
+ if ((ar_open(arcname) < 0) && (ar_next() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ bufend = buf + rdblksz;
+ bufpt = bufend;
+ rdcnt = 0;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * cp_start()
+ * set up buffer system for copying within the file system
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+cp_start(void)
+#else
+void
+cp_start()
+#endif
+{
+ buf = &(bufmem[BLKMULT]);
+ rdblksz = blksz = MAXBLK;
+}
+
+/*
+ * appnd_start()
+ * Set up the buffering system to append new members to an archive that
+ * was just read. The last block(s) of an archive may contain a format
+ * specific trailer. To append a new member, this trailer has to be
+ * removed from the archive. The first byte of the trailer is replaced by
+ * the start of the header of the first file added to the archive. The
+ * format specific end read function tells us how many bytes to move
+ * backwards in the archive to be positioned BEFORE the trailer. Two
+ * different postions have to be adjusted, the O.S. file offset (e.g. the
+ * position of the tape head) and the write point within the data we have
+ * stored in the read (soon to become write) buffer. We may have to move
+ * back several records (the number depends on the size of the archive
+ * record and the size of the format trailer) to read up the record where
+ * the first byte of the trailer is recorded. Trailers may span (and
+ * overlap) record boundries.
+ * We first calculate which record has the first byte of the trailer. We
+ * move the OS file offset back to the start of this record and read it
+ * up. We set the buffer write pointer to be at this byte (the byte where
+ * the trailer starts). We then move the OS file pointer back to the
+ * start of this record so a flush of this buffer will replace the record
+ * in the archive.
+ * A major problem is rewriting this last record. For archives stored
+ * on disk files, this is trival. However, many devices are really picky
+ * about the conditions under which they will allow a write to occur.
+ * Often devices restrict the conditions where writes can be made writes,
+ * so it may not be feasable to append archives stored on all types of
+ * devices.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 for success, -1 for failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+appnd_start(off_t skcnt)
+#else
+int
+appnd_start(skcnt)
+ off_t skcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ off_t cnt;
+
+ if (exit_val != 0) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Cannot append to an archive that may have flaws.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ /*
+ * if the user did not specify a write blocksize, inherit the size used
+ * in the last archive volume read. (If a is set we still use rdblksz
+ * until next volume, cannot shift sizes within a single volume).
+ */
+ if (!wrblksz)
+ wrblksz = blksz = rdblksz;
+ else
+ blksz = rdblksz;
+
+ /*
+ * make sure that this volume allows appends
+ */
+ if (ar_app_ok() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * Calculate bytes to move back and move in front of record where we
+ * need to start writing from. Remember we have to add in any padding
+ * that might be in the buffer after the trailer in the last block. We
+ * travel skcnt + padding ROUNDED UP to blksize.
+ */
+ skcnt += bufend - bufpt;
+ if ((cnt = (skcnt/blksz) * blksz) < skcnt)
+ cnt += blksz;
+ if (ar_rev((off_t)cnt) < 0)
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * We may have gone too far if there is valid data in the block we are
+ * now in front of, read up the block and position the pointer after
+ * the valid data.
+ */
+ if ((cnt -= skcnt) > 0) {
+ /*
+ * watch out for stupid tape drives. ar_rev() will set rdblksz
+ * to be real physical blocksize so we must loop until we get
+ * the old rdblksz (now in blksz). If ar_rev() fouls up the
+ * determination of the physical block size, we will fail.
+ */
+ bufpt = buf;
+ bufend = buf + blksz;
+ while (bufpt < bufend) {
+ if ((res = ar_read(bufpt, rdblksz)) <= 0)
+ goto out;
+ bufpt += res;
+ }
+ if (ar_rev((off_t)(bufpt - buf)) < 0)
+ goto out;
+ bufpt = buf + cnt;
+ bufend = buf + blksz;
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * buffer is empty
+ */
+ bufend = buf + blksz;
+ bufpt = buf;
+ }
+ rdblksz = blksz;
+ rdcnt -= skcnt;
+ wrcnt = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * At this point we are ready to write. If the device requires special
+ * handling to write at a point were previously recorded data resides,
+ * that is handled in ar_set_wr(). From now on we operate under normal
+ * ARCHIVE mode (write) conditions
+ */
+ if (ar_set_wr() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ act = ARCHIVE;
+ return(0);
+
+ out:
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to rewrite archive trailer, cannot append.");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_sync()
+ * A read error occurred on this archive volume. Resync the buffer and
+ * try to reset the device (if possible) so we can continue to read. Keep
+ * trying to do this until we get a valid read, or we reach the limit on
+ * consecutive read faults (at which point we give up). The user can
+ * adjust the read error limit through a command line option.
+ * Returns:
+ * 0 on success, and -1 on failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rd_sync(void)
+#else
+int
+rd_sync()
+#endif
+{
+ register int errcnt = 0;
+ register int res;
+
+ /*
+ * if the user says bail out on first fault, we are out of here...
+ */
+ if (maxflt == 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (act == APPND) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to append when there are archive read errors.");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * poke at device and try to get past media error
+ */
+ if (ar_rdsync() < 0) {
+ if (ar_next() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ else
+ rdcnt = 0;
+ }
+
+ for (;;) {
+ if ((res = ar_read(buf, blksz)) > 0) {
+ /*
+ * All right! got some data, fill that buffer
+ */
+ bufpt = buf;
+ bufend = buf + res;
+ rdcnt += res;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Oh well, yet another failed read...
+ * if error limit reached, ditch. o.w. poke device to move past
+ * bad media and try again. if media is badly damaged, we ask
+ * the poor (and upset user at this point) for the next archive
+ * volume. remember the goal on reads is to get the most we
+ * can extract out of the archive.
+ */
+ if ((maxflt > 0) && (++errcnt > maxflt))
+ paxwarn(0,"Archive read error limit (%d) reached",maxflt);
+ else if (ar_rdsync() == 0)
+ continue;
+ if (ar_next() < 0)
+ break;
+ rdcnt = 0;
+ errcnt = 0;
+ }
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * pback()
+ * push the data used during the archive id phase back into the I/O
+ * buffer. This is required as we cannot be sure that the header does NOT
+ * overlap a block boundry (as in the case we are trying to recover a
+ * flawed archived). This was not designed to be used for any other
+ * purpose. (What software engineering, HA!)
+ * WARNING: do not even THINK of pback greater than BLKMULT, unless the
+ * pback space is increased.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+pback(char *pt, int cnt)
+#else
+void
+pback(pt, cnt)
+ char *pt;
+ int cnt;
+#endif
+{
+ bufpt -= cnt;
+ memcpy(bufpt, pt, cnt);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_skip()
+ * skip foward in the archive during a archive read. Used to get quickly
+ * past file data and padding for files the user did NOT select.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 failure, and 1 when EOF on the archive volume was detected.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rd_skip(off_t skcnt)
+#else
+int
+rd_skip(skcnt)
+ off_t skcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ off_t res;
+ off_t cnt;
+ off_t skipped = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * consume what data we have in the buffer. If we have to move foward
+ * whole records, we call the low level skip function to see if we can
+ * move within the archive without doing the expensive reads on data we
+ * do not want.
+ */
+ if (skcnt == 0)
+ return(0);
+ res = MIN((bufend - bufpt), skcnt);
+ bufpt += res;
+ skcnt -= res;
+
+ /*
+ * if skcnt is now 0, then no additional i/o is needed
+ */
+ if (skcnt == 0)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * We have to read more, calculate complete and partial record reads
+ * based on rdblksz. we skip over "cnt" complete records
+ */
+ res = skcnt%rdblksz;
+ cnt = (skcnt/rdblksz) * rdblksz;
+
+ /*
+ * if the skip fails, we will have to resync. ar_fow will tell us
+ * how much it can skip over. We will have to read the rest.
+ */
+ if (ar_fow(cnt, &skipped) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ res += cnt - skipped;
+ rdcnt += skipped;
+
+ /*
+ * what is left we have to read (which may be the whole thing if
+ * ar_fow() told us the device can only read to skip records);
+ */
+ while (res > 0L) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ /*
+ * if the read fails, we will have to resync
+ */
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_fill()) < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ if (cnt == 0)
+ return(1);
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, res);
+ bufpt += cnt;
+ res -= cnt;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * wr_fin()
+ * flush out any data (and pad if required) the last block. We always pad
+ * with zero (even though we do not have to). Padding with 0 makes it a
+ * lot easier to recover if the archive is damaged. zero paddding SHOULD
+ * BE a requirement....
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+wr_fin(void)
+#else
+void
+wr_fin()
+#endif
+{
+ if (bufpt > buf) {
+ memset(bufpt, 0, bufend - bufpt);
+ bufpt = bufend;
+ (void)buf_flush(blksz);
+ }
+}
+
+/*
+ * wr_rdbuf()
+ * fill the write buffer from data passed to it in a buffer (usually used
+ * by format specific write routines to pass a file header). On failure we
+ * punt. We do not allow the user to continue to write flawed archives.
+ * We assume these headers are not very large (the memory copy we use is
+ * a bit expensive).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if buffer was filled ok, -1 o.w. (buffer flush failure)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+wr_rdbuf(register char *out, register int outcnt)
+#else
+int
+wr_rdbuf(out, outcnt)
+ register char *out;
+ register int outcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+
+ /*
+ * while there is data to copy copy into the write buffer. when the
+ * write buffer fills, flush it to the archive and continue
+ */
+ while (outcnt > 0) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_flush(blksz)) < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ /*
+ * only move what we have space for
+ */
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, outcnt);
+ memcpy(bufpt, out, cnt);
+ bufpt += cnt;
+ out += cnt;
+ outcnt -= cnt;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_wrbuf()
+ * copy from the read buffer into a supplied buffer a specified number of
+ * bytes. If the read buffer is empty fill it and continue to copy.
+ * usually used to obtain a file header for processing by a format
+ * specific read routine.
+ * Return
+ * number of bytes copied to the buffer, 0 indicates EOF on archive volume,
+ * -1 is a read error
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rd_wrbuf(register char *in, register int cpcnt)
+#else
+int
+rd_wrbuf(in, cpcnt)
+ register char *in;
+ register int cpcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ register int cnt;
+ register int incnt = cpcnt;
+
+ /*
+ * loop until we fill the buffer with the requested number of bytes
+ */
+ while (incnt > 0) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_fill()) <= 0)) {
+ /*
+ * read error, return what we got (or the error if
+ * no data was copied). The caller must know that an
+ * error occured and has the best knowledge what to
+ * do with it
+ */
+ if ((res = cpcnt - incnt) > 0)
+ return(res);
+ return(cnt);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * calculate how much data to copy based on whats left and
+ * state of buffer
+ */
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, incnt);
+ memcpy(in, bufpt, cnt);
+ bufpt += cnt;
+ incnt -= cnt;
+ in += cnt;
+ }
+ return(cpcnt);
+}
+
+/*
+ * wr_skip()
+ * skip foward during a write. In other words add padding to the file.
+ * we add zero filled padding as it makes flawed archives much easier to
+ * recover from. the caller tells us how many bytes of padding to add
+ * This routine was not designed to add HUGE amount of padding, just small
+ * amounts (a few 512 byte blocks at most)
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 if there was a buf_flush failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+wr_skip(off_t skcnt)
+#else
+int
+wr_skip(skcnt)
+ off_t skcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+
+ /*
+ * loop while there is more padding to add
+ */
+ while (skcnt > 0L) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_flush(blksz)) < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, skcnt);
+ memset(bufpt, 0, cnt);
+ bufpt += cnt;
+ skcnt -= cnt;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * wr_rdfile()
+ * fill write buffer with the contents of a file. We are passed an open
+ * file descriptor to the file an the archive structure that describes the
+ * file we are storing. The variable "left" is modified to contain the
+ * number of bytes of the file we were NOT able to write to the archive.
+ * it is important that we always write EXACTLY the number of bytes that
+ * the format specific write routine told us to. The file can also get
+ * bigger, so reading to the end of file would create an improper archive,
+ * we just detect this case and warn the user. We never create a bad
+ * archive if we can avoid it. Of course trying to archive files that are
+ * active is asking for trouble. It we fail, we pass back how much we
+ * could NOT copy and let the caller deal with it.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 ok, -1 if archive write failure. a short read of the file returns a
+ * 0, but "left" is set to be greater than zero.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+wr_rdfile(ARCHD *arcn, int ifd, off_t *left)
+#else
+int
+wr_rdfile(arcn, ifd, left)
+ ARCHD *arcn;
+ int ifd;
+ off_t *left;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+ register int res = 0;
+ register off_t size = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * while there are more bytes to write
+ */
+ while (size > 0L) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_flush(blksz)) < 0)) {
+ *left = size;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, size);
+ if ((res = read(ifd, bufpt, cnt)) <= 0)
+ break;
+ size -= res;
+ bufpt += res;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * better check the file did not change during this operation
+ * or the file read failed.
+ */
+ if (res < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Read fault on %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (size != 0L)
+ paxwarn(1, "File changed size during read %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (fstat(ifd, &sb) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed stat on %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime != sb.st_mtime)
+ paxwarn(1, "File %s was modified during copy to archive",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ *left = size;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_wrfile()
+ * extract the contents of a file from the archive. If we are unable to
+ * extract the entire file (due to failure to write the file) we return
+ * the numbers of bytes we did NOT process. This way the caller knows how
+ * many bytes to skip past to find the next archive header. If the failure
+ * was due to an archive read, we will catch that when we try to skip. If
+ * the format supplies a file data crc value, we calculate the actual crc
+ * so that it can be compared to the value stored in the header
+ * NOTE:
+ * We call a special function to write the file. This function attempts to
+ * restore file holes (blocks of zeros) into the file. When files are
+ * sparse this saves space, and is a LOT faster. For non sparse files
+ * the performance hit is small. As of this writing, no archive supports
+ * information on where the file holes are.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 ok, -1 if archive read failure. if we cannot write the entire file,
+ * we return a 0 but "left" is set to be the amount unwritten
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rd_wrfile(ARCHD *arcn, int ofd, off_t *left)
+#else
+int
+rd_wrfile(arcn, ofd, left)
+ ARCHD *arcn;
+ int ofd;
+ off_t *left;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt = 0;
+ register off_t size = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ register int res = 0;
+ register char *fnm = arcn->name;
+ int isem = 1;
+ int rem;
+ int sz = MINFBSZ;
+ struct stat sb;
+ u_long crc = 0L;
+
+ /*
+ * pass the blocksize of the file being written to the write routine,
+ * if the size is zero, use the default MINFBSZ
+ */
+ if (fstat(ofd, &sb) == 0) {
+ if (sb.st_blksize > 0)
+ sz = (int)sb.st_blksize;
+ } else
+ syswarn(0,errno,"Unable to obtain block size for file %s",fnm);
+ rem = sz;
+ *left = 0L;
+
+ /*
+ * Copy the archive to the file the number of bytes specified. We have
+ * to assume that we want to recover file holes as none of the archive
+ * formats can record the location of file holes.
+ */
+ while (size > 0L) {
+ cnt = bufend - bufpt;
+ /*
+ * if we get a read error, we do not want to skip, as we may
+ * miss a header, so we do not set left, but if we get a write
+ * error, we do want to skip over the unprocessed data.
+ */
+ if ((cnt <= 0) && ((cnt = buf_fill()) <= 0))
+ break;
+ cnt = MIN(cnt, size);
+ if ((res = file_write(ofd,bufpt,cnt,&rem,&isem,sz,fnm)) <= 0) {
+ *left = size;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (docrc) {
+ /*
+ * update the actual crc value
+ */
+ cnt = res;
+ while (--cnt >= 0)
+ crc += *bufpt++ & 0xff;
+ } else
+ bufpt += res;
+ size -= res;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if the last block has a file hole (all zero), we must make sure this
+ * gets updated in the file. We force the last block of zeros to be
+ * written. just closing with the file offset moved foward may not put
+ * a hole at the end of the file.
+ */
+ if (isem && (arcn->sb.st_size > 0L))
+ file_flush(ofd, fnm, isem);
+
+ /*
+ * if we failed from archive read, we do not want to skip
+ */
+ if ((size > 0L) && (*left == 0L))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * some formats record a crc on file data. If so, then we compare the
+ * calculated crc to the crc stored in the archive
+ */
+ if (docrc && (size == 0L) && (arcn->crc != crc))
+ paxwarn(1,"Actual crc does not match expected crc %s",arcn->name);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * cp_file()
+ * copy the contents of one file to another. used during -rw phase of pax
+ * just as in rd_wrfile() we use a special write function to write the
+ * destination file so we can properly copy files with holes.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+cp_file(ARCHD *arcn, int fd1, int fd2)
+#else
+void
+cp_file(arcn, fd1, fd2)
+ ARCHD *arcn;
+ int fd1;
+ int fd2;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+ register off_t cpcnt = 0L;
+ register int res = 0;
+ register char *fnm = arcn->name;
+ register int no_hole = 0;
+ int isem = 1;
+ int rem;
+ int sz = MINFBSZ;
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * check for holes in the source file. If none, we will use regular
+ * write instead of file write.
+ */
+ if (((off_t)(arcn->sb.st_blocks * BLKMULT)) >= arcn->sb.st_size)
+ ++no_hole;
+
+ /*
+ * pass the blocksize of the file being written to the write routine,
+ * if the size is zero, use the default MINFBSZ
+ */
+ if (fstat(fd2, &sb) == 0) {
+ if (sb.st_blksize > 0)
+ sz = sb.st_blksize;
+ } else
+ syswarn(0,errno,"Unable to obtain block size for file %s",fnm);
+ rem = sz;
+
+ /*
+ * read the source file and copy to destination file until EOF
+ */
+ for(;;) {
+ if ((cnt = read(fd1, buf, blksz)) <= 0)
+ break;
+ if (no_hole)
+ res = write(fd2, buf, cnt);
+ else
+ res = file_write(fd2, buf, cnt, &rem, &isem, sz, fnm);
+ if (res != cnt)
+ break;
+ cpcnt += cnt;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * check to make sure the copy is valid.
+ */
+ if (res < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed write during copy of %s to %s",
+ arcn->org_name, arcn->name);
+ else if (cpcnt != arcn->sb.st_size)
+ paxwarn(1, "File %s changed size during copy to %s",
+ arcn->org_name, arcn->name);
+ else if (fstat(fd1, &sb) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed stat of %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime != sb.st_mtime)
+ paxwarn(1, "File %s was modified during copy to %s",
+ arcn->org_name, arcn->name);
+
+ /*
+ * if the last block has a file hole (all zero), we must make sure this
+ * gets updated in the file. We force the last block of zeros to be
+ * written. just closing with the file offset moved foward may not put
+ * a hole at the end of the file.
+ */
+ if (!no_hole && isem && (arcn->sb.st_size > 0L))
+ file_flush(fd2, fnm, isem);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * buf_fill()
+ * fill the read buffer with the next record (or what we can get) from
+ * the archive volume.
+ * Return:
+ * Number of bytes of data in the read buffer, -1 for read error, and
+ * 0 when finished (user specified termination in ar_next()).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+buf_fill(void)
+#else
+int
+buf_fill()
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+ static int fini = 0;
+
+ if (fini)
+ return(0);
+
+ for(;;) {
+ /*
+ * try to fill the buffer. on error the next archive volume is
+ * opened and we try again.
+ */
+ if ((cnt = ar_read(buf, blksz)) > 0) {
+ bufpt = buf;
+ bufend = buf + cnt;
+ rdcnt += cnt;
+ return(cnt);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * errors require resync, EOF goes to next archive
+ */
+ if (cnt < 0)
+ break;
+ if (ar_next() < 0) {
+ fini = 1;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ rdcnt = 0;
+ }
+ exit_val = 1;
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * buf_flush()
+ * force the write buffer to the archive. We are passed the number of
+ * bytes in the buffer at the point of the flush. When we change archives
+ * the record size might change. (either larger or smaller).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if all is ok, -1 when a write error occurs.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+buf_flush(register int bufcnt)
+#else
+int
+buf_flush(bufcnt)
+ register int bufcnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+ register int push = 0;
+ register int totcnt = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * if we have reached the user specified byte count for each archive
+ * volume, prompt for the next volume. (The non-standrad -R flag).
+ * NOTE: If the wrlimit is smaller than wrcnt, we will always write
+ * at least one record. We always round limit UP to next blocksize.
+ */
+ if ((wrlimit > 0) && (wrcnt > wrlimit)) {
+ paxwarn(0, "User specified archive volume byte limit reached.");
+ if (ar_next() < 0) {
+ wrcnt = 0;
+ exit_val = 1;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ wrcnt = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * The new archive volume might have changed the size of the
+ * write blocksize. if so we figure out if we need to write
+ * (one or more times), or if there is now free space left in
+ * the buffer (it is no longer full). bufcnt has the number of
+ * bytes in the buffer, (the blocksize, at the point we were
+ * CALLED). Push has the amount of "extra" data in the buffer
+ * if the block size has shrunk from a volume change.
+ */
+ bufend = buf + blksz;
+ if (blksz > bufcnt)
+ return(0);
+ if (blksz < bufcnt)
+ push = bufcnt - blksz;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * We have enough data to write at least one archive block
+ */
+ for (;;) {
+ /*
+ * write a block and check if it all went out ok
+ */
+ cnt = ar_write(buf, blksz);
+ if (cnt == blksz) {
+ /*
+ * the write went ok
+ */
+ wrcnt += cnt;
+ totcnt += cnt;
+ if (push > 0) {
+ /* we have extra data to push to the front.
+ * check for more than 1 block of push, and if
+ * so we loop back to write again
+ */
+ memcpy(buf, bufend, push);
+ bufpt = buf + push;
+ if (push >= blksz) {
+ push -= blksz;
+ continue;
+ }
+ } else
+ bufpt = buf;
+ return(totcnt);
+ } else if (cnt > 0) {
+ /*
+ * Oh drat we got a partial write!
+ * if format doesnt care about alignment let it go,
+ * we warned the user in ar_write().... but this means
+ * the last record on this volume violates pax spec....
+ */
+ totcnt += cnt;
+ wrcnt += cnt;
+ bufpt = buf + cnt;
+ cnt = bufcnt - cnt;
+ memcpy(buf, bufpt, cnt);
+ bufpt = buf + cnt;
+ if (!frmt->blkalgn || ((cnt % frmt->blkalgn) == 0))
+ return(totcnt);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * All done, go to next archive
+ */
+ wrcnt = 0;
+ if (ar_next() < 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * The new archive volume might also have changed the block
+ * size. if so, figure out if we have too much or too little
+ * data for using the new block size
+ */
+ bufend = buf + blksz;
+ if (blksz > bufcnt)
+ return(0);
+ if (blksz < bufcnt)
+ push = bufcnt - blksz;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * write failed, stop pax. we must not create a bad archive!
+ */
+ exit_val = 1;
+ return(-1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: cache.c,v 1.6 1997/07/25 18:58:27 mickey Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: cache.c,v 1.4 1995/03/21 09:07:10 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)cache.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: cache.c,v 1.6 1997/07/25 18:58:27 mickey Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "cache.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * routines that control user, group, uid and gid caches (for the archive
+ * member print routine).
+ * IMPORTANT:
+ * these routines cache BOTH hits and misses, a major performance improvement
+ */
+
+static int pwopn = 0; /* is password file open */
+static int gropn = 0; /* is group file open */
+static UIDC **uidtb = NULL; /* uid to name cache */
+static GIDC **gidtb = NULL; /* gid to name cache */
+static UIDC **usrtb = NULL; /* user name to uid cache */
+static GIDC **grptb = NULL; /* group name to gid cache */
+
+/*
+ * uidtb_start
+ * creates an an empty uidtb
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+uidtb_start(void)
+#else
+int
+uidtb_start()
+#endif
+{
+ static int fail = 0;
+
+ if (uidtb != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if (fail)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((uidtb = (UIDC **)calloc(UID_SZ, sizeof(UIDC *))) == NULL) {
+ ++fail;
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for user id cache table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * gidtb_start
+ * creates an an empty gidtb
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+gidtb_start(void)
+#else
+int
+gidtb_start()
+#endif
+{
+ static int fail = 0;
+
+ if (gidtb != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if (fail)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((gidtb = (GIDC **)calloc(GID_SZ, sizeof(GIDC *))) == NULL) {
+ ++fail;
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for group id cache table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * usrtb_start
+ * creates an an empty usrtb
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+usrtb_start(void)
+#else
+int
+usrtb_start()
+#endif
+{
+ static int fail = 0;
+
+ if (usrtb != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if (fail)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((usrtb = (UIDC **)calloc(UNM_SZ, sizeof(UIDC *))) == NULL) {
+ ++fail;
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for user name cache table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * grptb_start
+ * creates an an empty grptb
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+grptb_start(void)
+#else
+int
+grptb_start()
+#endif
+{
+ static int fail = 0;
+
+ if (grptb != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if (fail)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((grptb = (GIDC **)calloc(GNM_SZ, sizeof(GIDC *))) == NULL) {
+ ++fail;
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to allocate memory for group name cache table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * name_uid()
+ * caches the name (if any) for the uid. If frc set, we always return the
+ * the stored name (if valid or invalid match). We use a simple hash table.
+ * Return
+ * Pointer to stored name (or a empty string)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+char *
+name_uid(uid_t uid, int frc)
+#else
+char *
+name_uid(uid, frc)
+ uid_t uid;
+ int frc;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct passwd *pw;
+ register UIDC *ptr;
+
+ if ((uidtb == NULL) && (uidtb_start() < 0))
+ return("");
+
+ /*
+ * see if we have this uid cached
+ */
+ ptr = uidtb[uid % UID_SZ];
+ if ((ptr != NULL) && (ptr->valid > 0) && (ptr->uid == uid)) {
+ /*
+ * have an entry for this uid
+ */
+ if (frc || (ptr->valid == VALID))
+ return(ptr->name);
+ return("");
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * No entry for this uid, we will add it
+ */
+ if (!pwopn) {
+ setpassent(1);
+ ++pwopn;
+ }
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ ptr = (UIDC *)malloc(sizeof(UIDC));
+
+ if ((pw = getpwuid(uid)) == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * no match for this uid in the local password file
+ * a string that is the uid in numberic format
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ return("");
+ ptr->uid = uid;
+ ptr->valid = INVALID;
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ (void)snprintf(ptr->name, sizeof(ptr->name), "%u", uid);
+# else
+ (void)snprintf(ptr->name, sizeof(ptr->name), "%lu",
+ (unsigned long)uid);
+# endif
+ if (frc == 0)
+ return("");
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * there is an entry for this uid in the password file
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ return(pw->pw_name);
+ ptr->uid = uid;
+ (void)strncpy(ptr->name, pw->pw_name, UNMLEN-1);
+ ptr->name[UNMLEN-1] = '\0';
+ ptr->valid = VALID;
+ }
+ return(ptr->name);
+}
+
+/*
+ * name_gid()
+ * caches the name (if any) for the gid. If frc set, we always return the
+ * the stored name (if valid or invalid match). We use a simple hash table.
+ * Return
+ * Pointer to stored name (or a empty string)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+char *
+name_gid(gid_t gid, int frc)
+#else
+char *
+name_gid(gid, frc)
+ gid_t gid;
+ int frc;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct group *gr;
+ register GIDC *ptr;
+
+ if ((gidtb == NULL) && (gidtb_start() < 0))
+ return("");
+
+ /*
+ * see if we have this gid cached
+ */
+ ptr = gidtb[gid % GID_SZ];
+ if ((ptr != NULL) && (ptr->valid > 0) && (ptr->gid == gid)) {
+ /*
+ * have an entry for this gid
+ */
+ if (frc || (ptr->valid == VALID))
+ return(ptr->name);
+ return("");
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * No entry for this gid, we will add it
+ */
+ if (!gropn) {
+ setgroupent(1);
+ ++gropn;
+ }
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ ptr = (GIDC *)malloc(sizeof(GIDC));
+
+ if ((gr = getgrgid(gid)) == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * no match for this gid in the local group file, put in
+ * a string that is the gid in numberic format
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ return("");
+ ptr->gid = gid;
+ ptr->valid = INVALID;
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ (void)snprintf(ptr->name, sizeof(ptr->name), "%u", gid);
+# else
+ (void)snprintf(ptr->name, sizeof(ptr->name), "%lu",
+ (unsigned long)gid);
+# endif
+ if (frc == 0)
+ return("");
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * there is an entry for this group in the group file
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ return(gr->gr_name);
+ ptr->gid = gid;
+ (void)strncpy(ptr->name, gr->gr_name, GNMLEN-1);
+ ptr->name[GNMLEN-1] = '\0';
+ ptr->valid = VALID;
+ }
+ return(ptr->name);
+}
+
+/*
+ * uid_name()
+ * caches the uid for a given user name. We use a simple hash table.
+ * Return
+ * the uid (if any) for a user name, or a -1 if no match can be found
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+uid_name(char *name, uid_t *uid)
+#else
+int
+uid_name(name, uid)
+ char *name;
+ uid_t *uid;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct passwd *pw;
+ register UIDC *ptr;
+ register int namelen;
+
+ /*
+ * return -1 for mangled names
+ */
+ if (((namelen = strlen(name)) == 0) || (name[0] == '\0'))
+ return(-1);
+ if ((usrtb == NULL) && (usrtb_start() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * look up in hash table, if found and valid return the uid,
+ * if found and invalid, return a -1
+ */
+ ptr = usrtb[st_hash(name, namelen, UNM_SZ)];
+ if ((ptr != NULL) && (ptr->valid > 0) && !strcmp(name, ptr->name)) {
+ if (ptr->valid == INVALID)
+ return(-1);
+ *uid = ptr->uid;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ if (!pwopn) {
+ setpassent(1);
+ ++pwopn;
+ }
+
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ ptr = (UIDC *)malloc(sizeof(UIDC));
+
+ /*
+ * no match, look it up, if no match store it as an invalid entry,
+ * or store the matching uid
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL) {
+ if ((pw = getpwnam(name)) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ *uid = pw->pw_uid;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ (void)strncpy(ptr->name, name, UNMLEN-1);
+ ptr->name[UNMLEN-1] = '\0';
+ if ((pw = getpwnam(name)) == NULL) {
+ ptr->valid = INVALID;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ ptr->valid = VALID;
+ *uid = ptr->uid = pw->pw_uid;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * gid_name()
+ * caches the gid for a given group name. We use a simple hash table.
+ * Return
+ * the gid (if any) for a group name, or a -1 if no match can be found
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+gid_name(char *name, gid_t *gid)
+#else
+int
+gid_name(name, gid)
+ char *name;
+ gid_t *gid;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct group *gr;
+ register GIDC *ptr;
+ register int namelen;
+
+ /*
+ * return -1 for mangled names
+ */
+ if (((namelen = strlen(name)) == 0) || (name[0] == '\0'))
+ return(-1);
+ if ((grptb == NULL) && (grptb_start() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * look up in hash table, if found and valid return the uid,
+ * if found and invalid, return a -1
+ */
+ ptr = grptb[st_hash(name, namelen, GID_SZ)];
+ if ((ptr != NULL) && (ptr->valid > 0) && !strcmp(name, ptr->name)) {
+ if (ptr->valid == INVALID)
+ return(-1);
+ *gid = ptr->gid;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ if (!gropn) {
+ setgroupent(1);
+ ++gropn;
+ }
+ if (ptr == NULL)
+ ptr = (GIDC *)malloc(sizeof(GIDC));
+
+ /*
+ * no match, look it up, if no match store it as an invalid entry,
+ * or store the matching gid
+ */
+ if (ptr == NULL) {
+ if ((gr = getgrnam(name)) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ *gid = gr->gr_gid;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ (void)strncpy(ptr->name, name, GNMLEN-1);
+ ptr->name[GNMLEN-1] = '\0';
+ if ((gr = getgrnam(name)) == NULL) {
+ ptr->valid = INVALID;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ ptr->valid = VALID;
+ *gid = ptr->gid = gr->gr_gid;
+ return(0);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: cache.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:31 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: cache.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:12 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)cache.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Constants and data structures used to implement group and password file
+ * caches. Traditional passwd/group cache routines perform quite poorly with
+ * archives. The chances of hitting a valid lookup with an archive is quite a
+ * bit worse than with files already resident on the file system. These misses
+ * create a MAJOR performance cost. To adress this problem, these routines
+ * cache both hits and misses.
+ *
+ * NOTE: name lengths must be as large as those stored in ANY PROTOCOL and
+ * as stored in the passwd and group files. CACHE SIZES MUST BE PRIME
+ */
+#define UNMLEN 32 /* >= user name found in any protocol */
+#define GNMLEN 32 /* >= group name found in any protocol */
+#define UID_SZ 317 /* size of user_name/uid cache */
+#define UNM_SZ 317 /* size of user_name/uid cache */
+#define GID_SZ 251 /* size of gid cache */
+#define GNM_SZ 317 /* size of group name cache */
+#define VALID 1 /* entry and name are valid */
+#define INVALID 2 /* entry valid, name NOT valid */
+
+/*
+ * Node structures used in the user, group, uid, and gid caches.
+ */
+
+typedef struct uidc {
+ int valid; /* is this a valid or a miss entry */
+ char name[UNMLEN]; /* uid name */
+ uid_t uid; /* cached uid */
+} UIDC;
+
+typedef struct gidc {
+ int valid; /* is this a valid or a miss entry */
+ char name[GNMLEN]; /* gid name */
+ gid_t gid; /* cached gid */
+} GIDC;
--- /dev/null
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 SigmaSoft, Th. Lockert
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\" This product includes software developed by SigmaSoft, Th. Lockert.
+.\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
+.\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" $OpenBSD: cpio.1,v 1.5 1998/09/14 22:13:52 aaron Exp $
+.\"
+.Dd February 16, 1997
+.Dt CPIO 1
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm cpio
+.Nd copy file archives in and out
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm cpio
+.Fl o
+.Op Fl aABcLvzZ
+.Op Fl C Ar bytes
+.Op Fl F Ar archive
+.Op Fl H Ar format
+.Op Fl O Ar archive
+.Ar "< name-list"
+.Op Ar "> archive"
+.Nm cpio
+.Fl i
+.Op Fl bBcdfmrsStuvzZ6
+.Op Fl C Ar bytes
+.Op Fl E Ar file
+.Op Fl F Ar archive
+.Op Fl H Ar format
+.Op Fl I Ar archive
+.Op Ar "pattern ..."
+.Op Ar "< archive"
+.Nm cpio
+.Fl p
+.Op Fl adlLmuv
+.Ar destination-directory
+.Ar "< name-list"
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm
+command copies files to and from a
+.Nm
+archive.
+.Pp
+The following options are supported:
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Fl o
+Create an archive. Reads the list of files to store in the
+archive from standard input, and writes the archive on standard
+output.
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Fl a
+Reset the access times on files that have been copied to the
+archive.
+.It Fl A
+Append to the specified archive.
+.It Fl B
+Set block size of output to 5120 bytes.
+.It Fl c
+Use ASCII format for
+.Nm
+header for portability.
+.It Fl C Ar bytes
+Set the block size of output to
+.Ar bytes .
+.It Fl F Ar archive
+.It Fl O Ar archive
+Use the specified file name as the archive to write to.
+.It Fl H Ar format
+Write the archive in the specified format. Recognized
+formats are:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Ar bcpio
+Old binary cpio format.
+.It Ar cpio
+Old octal character cpio format.
+.It Ar sv4cpio
+SVR4 hex cpio format.
+.It Ar tar
+Old tar format.
+.It Ar ustar
+POSIX ustar format.
+.El
+.It Fl L
+Follow symbolic links.
+.It Fl v
+Be verbose about operations. List filenames as they are
+written to the archive.
+.It Fl z
+Compress archive using
+.Xr gzip 1
+format.
+.It Fl Z
+Compress archive using
+.Xr compress 1
+format.
+.El
+.It Fl i
+Restore files from an archive. Reads the archive file from
+standard input and extracts files matching the
+.Ar patterns
+that were specified on the command line.
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Fl b
+Do byte and word swapping after reading in data from the
+archive, for restoring archives created on systems with
+a different byte order.
+.It Fl B
+Set the block size of the archive being read to 5120 bytes.
+.It Fl c
+Expect the archive headers to be in ASCII format.
+.It Fl C Ar bytes
+Read archive written with a block size of
+.Ar bytes .
+.It Fl d
+Create any intermediate directories as needed during
+restore.
+.It Fl E Ar file
+Read list of file name patterns to extract or list from
+.Ar file .
+.It Fl f
+Restore all files except those matching the
+.Ar patterns
+given on the command line.
+.It Fl F Ar archive
+.It Fl I Ar archive
+Use the specified file as the input for the archive.
+.It Fl H Ar format
+Read an archive of the specified format. Recognized
+formats are:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Ar bcpio
+Old binary cpio format.
+.It Ar cpio
+Old octal character cpio format.
+.It Ar sv4cpio
+SVR4 hex cpio format.
+.It Ar tar
+Old tar format.
+.It Ar ustar
+POSIX ustar format.
+.El
+.It Fl m
+Restore modification times on files.
+.It Fl r
+Rename restored files interactively.
+.It Fl s
+Swap bytes after reading data from the archive.
+.It Fl S
+Swap words after reading data from the archive.
+.It Fl t
+Only list the contents of the archive, no files or
+directories will be created.
+.It Fl u
+Overwrite files even when the file in the archive is
+older than the one that will be overwritten.
+.It Fl v
+Be verbose about operations. List filenames as they are
+copied in from the archive.
+.It Fl z
+Uncompress archive using
+.Xr gzip 1
+format.
+.It Fl Z
+Uncompress archive using
+.Xr compress 1
+format.
+.It Fl 6
+Process old-style \*Qcpio\*U format archives.
+.El
+.It Fl p
+Copy files from one location to another in a single pass.
+The list of files to copy are read from standard input and
+written out to a directory relative to the specified
+.Ar directory
+argument.
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Fl a
+Reset the access times on files that have been copied.
+.It Fl d
+Create any intermediate directories as needed to write
+the files at the new location.
+.It Fl l
+When possible, link files rather than creating an
+extra copy.
+.It Fl L
+Follow symbolic links.
+.It Fl m
+Restore modification times on files.
+.It Fl u
+Overwrite files even when the original file being copied is
+older than the one that will be overwritten.
+.It Fl v
+Be verbose about operations. List filenames as they are
+copied.
+.El
+.El
+.Sh ERRORS
+.Nm
+will exit with one of the following values:
+.Bl -tag -width 2n
+.It 0
+All files were processed successfully.
+.It 1
+An error occurred.
+.El
+.Pp
+Whenever
+.Nm
+cannot create a file or a link when extracting an archive or cannot
+find a file while writing an archive, or cannot preserve the user
+ID, group ID, file mode or access and modification times when the
+.Fl p
+option is specified, a diagnostic message is written to standard
+error and a non-zero exit value will be returned, but processing
+will continue. In the case where
+.Nm
+cannot create a link to a file,
+.Nm
+will not create a second copy of the file.
+.Pp
+If the extraction of a file from an archive is prematurely terminated
+by a signal or error,
+.Nm
+may have only partially extracted the file the user wanted.
+Additionally, the file modes of extracted files and directories may
+have incorrect file bits, and the modification and access times may
+be wrong.
+.Pp
+If the creation of an archive is prematurely terminated by a signal
+or error,
+.Nm
+may have only partially created the archive which may violate the
+specific archive format specification.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr pax 1 ,
+.Xr tar 1
+.Sh BUGS
+The
+.Fl s
+and
+.Fl S
+options are currently not implemented.
+.Sh AUTHOR
+Keith Muller at the University of California, San Diego.
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: cpio.c,v 1.5 1997/07/25 18:58:28 mickey Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: cpio.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:13 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)cpio.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: cpio.c,v 1.5 1997/07/25 18:58:28 mickey Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "cpio.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+static int rd_nm __P((register ARCHD *, int));
+static int rd_ln_nm __P((register ARCHD *));
+static int com_rd __P((register ARCHD *));
+
+/*
+ * Routines which support the different cpio versions
+ */
+
+static int swp_head; /* binary cpio header byte swap */
+
+/*
+ * Routines common to all versions of cpio
+ */
+
+/*
+ * cpio_strd()
+ * Fire up the hard link detection code
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok -1 otherwise (the return values of lnk_start())
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_strd(void)
+#else
+int
+cpio_strd()
+#endif
+{
+ return(lnk_start());
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_trail()
+ * Called to determine if a header block is a valid trailer. We are
+ * passed the block, the in_sync flag (which tells us we are in resync
+ * mode; looking for a valid header), and cnt (which starts at zero)
+ * which is used to count the number of empty blocks we have seen so far.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid trailer, -1 if not a valid trailer,
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_trail(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+cpio_trail(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * look for trailer id in file we are about to process
+ */
+ if ((strcmp(arcn->name, TRAILER) == 0) && (arcn->sb.st_size == 0))
+ return(0);
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * com_rd()
+ * operations common to all cpio read functions.
+ * Return:
+ * 0
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+com_rd(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+com_rd(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ arcn->skip = 0;
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+ arcn->org_name = arcn->name;
+ switch(arcn->sb.st_mode & C_IFMT) {
+ case C_ISFIFO:
+ arcn->type = PAX_FIF;
+ break;
+ case C_ISDIR:
+ arcn->type = PAX_DIR;
+ break;
+ case C_ISBLK:
+ arcn->type = PAX_BLK;
+ break;
+ case C_ISCHR:
+ arcn->type = PAX_CHR;
+ break;
+ case C_ISLNK:
+ arcn->type = PAX_SLK;
+ break;
+ case C_ISOCK:
+ arcn->type = PAX_SCK;
+ break;
+ case C_ISCTG:
+ case C_ISREG:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * we have file data, set up skip (pad is set in the format
+ * specific sections)
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (arcn->sb.st_mode & 0xfff) | C_ISREG;
+ arcn->type = PAX_REG;
+ arcn->skip = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (chk_lnk(arcn) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_end_wr()
+ * write the special file with the name trailer in the proper format
+ * Return:
+ * result of the write of the trailer from the cpio specific write func
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_endwr(void)
+#else
+int
+cpio_endwr()
+#endif
+{
+ ARCHD last;
+
+ /*
+ * create a trailer request and call the proper format write function
+ */
+ memset(&last, 0, sizeof(last));
+ last.nlen = sizeof(TRAILER) - 1;
+ last.type = PAX_REG;
+ last.sb.st_nlink = 1;
+ (void)strcpy(last.name, TRAILER);
+ return((*frmt->wr)(&last));
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_nam()
+ * read in the file name which follows the cpio header
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+rd_nm(register ARCHD *arcn, int nsz)
+#else
+static int
+rd_nm(arcn, nsz)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ int nsz;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * do not even try bogus values
+ */
+ if ((nsz == 0) || (nsz > sizeof(arcn->name))) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio file name length %d is out of range", nsz);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * read the name and make sure it is not empty and is \0 terminated
+ */
+ if ((rd_wrbuf(arcn->name,nsz) != nsz) || (arcn->name[nsz-1] != '\0') ||
+ (arcn->name[0] == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio file name in header is corrupted");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rd_ln_nm()
+ * read in the link name for a file with links. The link name is stored
+ * like file data (and is NOT \0 terminated!)
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+rd_ln_nm(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+rd_ln_nm(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * check the length specified for bogus values
+ */
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_size == 0) ||
+ (arcn->sb.st_size >= sizeof(arcn->ln_name))) {
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio link name length is invalid: %lu",
+ arcn->sb.st_size);
+# else
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio link name length is invalid: %qu",
+ arcn->sb.st_size);
+# endif
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * read in the link name and \0 terminate it
+ */
+ if (rd_wrbuf(arcn->ln_name, (int)arcn->sb.st_size) !=
+ (int)arcn->sb.st_size) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio link name read error");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ arcn->ln_nlen = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ arcn->ln_name[arcn->ln_nlen] = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * watch out for those empty link names
+ */
+ if (arcn->ln_name[0] == '\0') {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio link name is corrupt");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Routines common to the extended byte oriented cpio format
+ */
+
+/*
+ * cpio_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a valid extended byte oriented
+ * cpio header
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_id(char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+cpio_id(blk, size)
+ char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ if ((size < sizeof(HD_CPIO)) ||
+ (strncmp(blk, AMAGIC, sizeof(AMAGIC) - 1) != 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_rd()
+ * determine if a buffer is a byte oriented extended cpio archive entry.
+ * convert and store the values in the ARCHD parameter.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_rd(register ARCHD *arcn, register char *buf)
+#else
+int
+cpio_rd(arcn, buf)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register char *buf;
+#endif
+{
+ register int nsz;
+ register HD_CPIO *hd;
+
+ /*
+ * check that this is a valid header, if not return -1
+ */
+ if (cpio_id(buf, sizeof(HD_CPIO)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ hd = (HD_CPIO *)buf;
+
+ /*
+ * byte oriented cpio (posix) does not have padding! extract the octal
+ * ascii fields from the header
+ */
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_dev, sizeof(hd->c_dev), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = (ino_t)asc_ul(hd->c_ino, sizeof(hd->c_ino), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)asc_ul(hd->c_mode, sizeof(hd->c_mode), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)asc_ul(hd->c_uid, sizeof(hd->c_uid), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)asc_ul(hd->c_gid, sizeof(hd->c_gid), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = (nlink_t)asc_ul(hd->c_nlink, sizeof(hd->c_nlink),
+ OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_rdev, sizeof(hd->c_rdev), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)asc_ul(hd->c_mtime, sizeof(hd->c_mtime),
+ OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_ctime = arcn->sb.st_atime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)asc_ul(hd->c_filesize,sizeof(hd->c_filesize),
+ OCT);
+# else
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)asc_uqd(hd->c_filesize,sizeof(hd->c_filesize),
+ OCT);
+# endif
+
+ /*
+ * check name size and if valid, read in the name of this entry (name
+ * follows header in the archive)
+ */
+ if ((nsz = (int)asc_ul(hd->c_namesize,sizeof(hd->c_namesize),OCT)) < 2)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->nlen = nsz - 1;
+ if (rd_nm(arcn, nsz) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ if (((arcn->sb.st_mode&C_IFMT) != C_ISLNK)||(arcn->sb.st_size == 0)) {
+ /*
+ * no link name to read for this file
+ */
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * check link name size and read in the link name. Link names are
+ * stored like file data.
+ */
+ if (rd_ln_nm(arcn) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * we have a valid header (with a link)
+ */
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_endrd()
+ * no cleanup needed here, just return size of the trailer (for append)
+ * Return:
+ * size of trailer header in this format
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+off_t
+cpio_endrd(void)
+#else
+off_t
+cpio_endrd()
+#endif
+{
+ return((off_t)(sizeof(HD_CPIO) + sizeof(TRAILER)));
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_stwr()
+ * start up the device mapping table
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise (what dev_start() returns)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_stwr(void)
+#else
+int
+cpio_stwr()
+#endif
+{
+ return(dev_start());
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_wr()
+ * copy the data in the ARCHD to buffer in extended byte oriented cpio
+ * format.
+ * Return
+ * 0 if file has data to be written after the header, 1 if file has NO
+ * data to write after the header, -1 if archive write failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cpio_wr(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+cpio_wr(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_CPIO *hd;
+ register int nsz;
+ char hdblk[sizeof(HD_CPIO)];
+
+ /*
+ * check and repair truncated device and inode fields in the header
+ */
+ if (map_dev(arcn, (u_long)CPIO_MASK, (u_long)CPIO_MASK) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ nsz = arcn->nlen + 1;
+ hd = (HD_CPIO *)hdblk;
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_BLK) && (arcn->type != PAX_CHR))
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = 0;
+
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ case PAX_REG:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ /*
+ * set data size for file data
+ */
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), OCT)) {
+# else
+ if (uqd_asc((u_quad_t)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), OCT)) {
+# endif
+ paxwarn(1,"File is too large for cpio format %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ break;
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ /*
+ * set data size to hold link name
+ */
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)arcn->ln_nlen, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), OCT))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /*
+ * all other file types have no file data
+ */
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)0, hd->c_filesize, sizeof(hd->c_filesize),
+ OCT))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * copy the values to the header using octal ascii
+ */
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)MAGIC, hd->c_magic, sizeof(hd->c_magic), OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_dev, hd->c_dev, sizeof(hd->c_dev),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_ino, hd->c_ino, sizeof(hd->c_ino),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mode, hd->c_mode, sizeof(hd->c_mode),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_uid, hd->c_uid, sizeof(hd->c_uid),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_gid, hd->c_gid, sizeof(hd->c_gid),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_nlink, hd->c_nlink, sizeof(hd->c_nlink),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_rdev, hd->c_rdev, sizeof(hd->c_rdev),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mtime,hd->c_mtime,sizeof(hd->c_mtime),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)nsz, hd->c_namesize, sizeof(hd->c_namesize), OCT))
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * write the file name to the archive
+ */
+ if ((wr_rdbuf(hdblk, (int)sizeof(HD_CPIO)) < 0) ||
+ (wr_rdbuf(arcn->name, nsz) < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to write cpio header for %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if this file has data, we are done. The caller will write the file
+ * data, if we are link tell caller we are done, go to next file
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CTG) || (arcn->type == PAX_REG) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ return(0);
+ if (arcn->type != PAX_SLK)
+ return(1);
+
+ /*
+ * write the link name to the archive, tell the caller to go to the
+ * next file as we are done.
+ */
+ if (wr_rdbuf(arcn->ln_name, arcn->ln_nlen) < 0) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to write cpio link name for %s",arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(1);
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * header field is out of range
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Cpio header field is too small to store file %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Routines common to the system VR4 version of cpio (with/without file CRC)
+ */
+
+/*
+ * vcpio_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a valid system VR4 cpio header
+ * WITHOUT crc. WATCH it the magic cookies are in OCTAL, the header
+ * uses HEX
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+vcpio_id(char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+vcpio_id(blk, size)
+ char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ if ((size < sizeof(HD_VCPIO)) ||
+ (strncmp(blk, AVMAGIC, sizeof(AVMAGIC) - 1) != 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * crc_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a valid system VR4 cpio header
+ * WITH crc. WATCH it the magic cookies are in OCTAL the header uses HEX
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+crc_id(char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+crc_id(blk, size)
+ char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ if ((size < sizeof(HD_VCPIO)) ||
+ (strncmp(blk, AVCMAGIC, sizeof(AVCMAGIC) - 1) != 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * crc_strd()
+ w set file data CRC calculations. Fire up the hard link detection code
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok -1 otherwise (the return values of lnk_start())
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+crc_strd(void)
+#else
+int
+crc_strd()
+#endif
+{
+ docrc = 1;
+ return(lnk_start());
+}
+
+/*
+ * vcpio_rd()
+ * determine if a buffer is a system VR4 archive entry. (with/without CRC)
+ * convert and store the values in the ARCHD parameter.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+vcpio_rd(register ARCHD *arcn, register char *buf)
+#else
+int
+vcpio_rd(arcn, buf)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register char *buf;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_VCPIO *hd;
+ dev_t devminor;
+ dev_t devmajor;
+ register int nsz;
+
+ /*
+ * during the id phase it was determined if we were using CRC, use the
+ * proper id routine.
+ */
+ if (docrc) {
+ if (crc_id(buf, sizeof(HD_VCPIO)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ } else {
+ if (vcpio_id(buf, sizeof(HD_VCPIO)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ hd = (HD_VCPIO *)buf;
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+
+ /*
+ * extract the hex ascii fields from the header
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = (ino_t)asc_ul(hd->c_ino, sizeof(hd->c_ino), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)asc_ul(hd->c_mode, sizeof(hd->c_mode), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)asc_ul(hd->c_uid, sizeof(hd->c_uid), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)asc_ul(hd->c_gid, sizeof(hd->c_gid), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)asc_ul(hd->c_mtime,sizeof(hd->c_mtime),HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_ctime = arcn->sb.st_atime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)asc_ul(hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), HEX);
+# else
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)asc_uqd(hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), HEX);
+# endif
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = (nlink_t)asc_ul(hd->c_nlink, sizeof(hd->c_nlink),
+ HEX);
+ devmajor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_maj, sizeof(hd->c_maj), HEX);
+ devminor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_min, sizeof(hd->c_min), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = TODEV(devmajor, devminor);
+ devmajor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_rmaj, sizeof(hd->c_maj), HEX);
+ devminor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->c_rmin, sizeof(hd->c_min), HEX);
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = TODEV(devmajor, devminor);
+ arcn->crc = asc_ul(hd->c_chksum, sizeof(hd->c_chksum), HEX);
+
+ /*
+ * check the length of the file name, if ok read it in, return -1 if
+ * bogus
+ */
+ if ((nsz = (int)asc_ul(hd->c_namesize,sizeof(hd->c_namesize),HEX)) < 2)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->nlen = nsz - 1;
+ if (rd_nm(arcn, nsz) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * skip padding. header + filename is aligned to 4 byte boundries
+ */
+ if (rd_skip((off_t)(VCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_VCPIO) + nsz))) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * if not a link (or a file with no data), calculate pad size (for
+ * padding which follows the file data), clear the link name and return
+ */
+ if (((arcn->sb.st_mode&C_IFMT) != C_ISLNK)||(arcn->sb.st_size == 0)) {
+ /*
+ * we have a valid header (not a link)
+ */
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ arcn->pad = VCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * read in the link name and skip over the padding
+ */
+ if ((rd_ln_nm(arcn) < 0) ||
+ (rd_skip((off_t)(VCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size))) < 0))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * we have a valid header (with a link)
+ */
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+}
+
+/*
+ * vcpio_endrd()
+ * no cleanup needed here, just return size of the trailer (for append)
+ * Return:
+ * size of trailer header in this format
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+off_t
+vcpio_endrd(void)
+#else
+off_t
+vcpio_endrd()
+#endif
+{
+ return((off_t)(sizeof(HD_VCPIO) + sizeof(TRAILER) +
+ (VCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_VCPIO) + sizeof(TRAILER)))));
+}
+
+/*
+ * crc_stwr()
+ * start up the device mapping table, enable crc file calculation
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise (what dev_start() returns)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+crc_stwr(void)
+#else
+int
+crc_stwr()
+#endif
+{
+ docrc = 1;
+ return(dev_start());
+}
+
+/*
+ * vcpio_wr()
+ * copy the data in the ARCHD to buffer in system VR4 cpio
+ * (with/without crc) format.
+ * Return
+ * 0 if file has data to be written after the header, 1 if file has
+ * NO data to write after the header, -1 if archive write failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+vcpio_wr(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+vcpio_wr(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_VCPIO *hd;
+ unsigned int nsz;
+ char hdblk[sizeof(HD_VCPIO)];
+
+ /*
+ * check and repair truncated device and inode fields in the cpio
+ * header
+ */
+ if (map_dev(arcn, (u_long)VCPIO_MASK, (u_long)VCPIO_MASK) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ nsz = arcn->nlen + 1;
+ hd = (HD_VCPIO *)hdblk;
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_BLK) && (arcn->type != PAX_CHR))
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * add the proper magic value depending whether we were asked for
+ * file data crc's, and the crc if needed.
+ */
+ if (docrc) {
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)VCMAGIC, hd->c_magic, sizeof(hd->c_magic),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->crc,hd->c_chksum,sizeof(hd->c_chksum),
+ HEX))
+ goto out;
+ } else {
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)VMAGIC, hd->c_magic, sizeof(hd->c_magic),
+ OCT) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)0L, hd->c_chksum, sizeof(hd->c_chksum),HEX))
+ goto out;
+ }
+
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ case PAX_REG:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ /*
+ * caller will copy file data to the archive. tell him how
+ * much to pad.
+ */
+ arcn->pad = VCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), HEX)) {
+# else
+ if (uqd_asc((u_quad_t)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), HEX)) {
+# endif
+ paxwarn(1,"File is too large for sv4cpio format %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ break;
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ /*
+ * no file data for the caller to process, the file data has
+ * the size of the link
+ */
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)arcn->ln_nlen, hd->c_filesize,
+ sizeof(hd->c_filesize), HEX))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /*
+ * no file data for the caller to process
+ */
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)0L, hd->c_filesize, sizeof(hd->c_filesize),
+ HEX))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * set the other fields in the header
+ */
+ if (ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_ino, hd->c_ino, sizeof(hd->c_ino),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mode, hd->c_mode, sizeof(hd->c_mode),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_uid, hd->c_uid, sizeof(hd->c_uid),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_gid, hd->c_gid, sizeof(hd->c_gid),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mtime, hd->c_mtime, sizeof(hd->c_mtime),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)arcn->sb.st_nlink, hd->c_nlink, sizeof(hd->c_nlink),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)MAJOR(arcn->sb.st_dev),hd->c_maj, sizeof(hd->c_maj),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)MINOR(arcn->sb.st_dev),hd->c_min, sizeof(hd->c_min),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)MAJOR(arcn->sb.st_rdev),hd->c_rmaj,sizeof(hd->c_maj),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)MINOR(arcn->sb.st_rdev),hd->c_rmin,sizeof(hd->c_min),
+ HEX) ||
+ ul_asc((u_long)nsz, hd->c_namesize, sizeof(hd->c_namesize), HEX))
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * write the header, the file name and padding as required.
+ */
+ if ((wr_rdbuf(hdblk, (int)sizeof(HD_VCPIO)) < 0) ||
+ (wr_rdbuf(arcn->name, (int)nsz) < 0) ||
+ (wr_skip((off_t)(VCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_VCPIO) + nsz))) < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Could not write sv4cpio header for %s",arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if we have file data, tell the caller we are done, copy the file
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CTG) || (arcn->type == PAX_REG) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * if we are not a link, tell the caller we are done, go to next file
+ */
+ if (arcn->type != PAX_SLK)
+ return(1);
+
+ /*
+ * write the link name, tell the caller we are done.
+ */
+ if ((wr_rdbuf(arcn->ln_name, arcn->ln_nlen) < 0) ||
+ (wr_skip((off_t)(VCPIO_PAD(arcn->ln_nlen))) < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Could not write sv4cpio link name for %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(1);
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * header field is out of range
+ */
+ paxwarn(1,"Sv4cpio header field is too small for file %s",arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Routines common to the old binary header cpio
+ */
+
+/*
+ * bcpio_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a old binary cpio header
+ * (with/without header byte swapping)
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+bcpio_id(char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+bcpio_id(blk, size)
+ char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ if (size < sizeof(HD_BCPIO))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * check both normal and byte swapped magic cookies
+ */
+ if (((u_short)SHRT_EXT(blk)) == MAGIC)
+ return(0);
+ if (((u_short)RSHRT_EXT(blk)) == MAGIC) {
+ if (!swp_head)
+ ++swp_head;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * bcpio_rd()
+ * determine if a buffer is a old binary archive entry. (it may have byte
+ * swapped header) convert and store the values in the ARCHD parameter.
+ * This is a very old header format and should not really be used.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid header, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+bcpio_rd(register ARCHD *arcn, register char *buf)
+#else
+int
+bcpio_rd(arcn, buf)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register char *buf;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_BCPIO *hd;
+ register int nsz;
+
+ /*
+ * check the header
+ */
+ if (bcpio_id(buf, sizeof(HD_BCPIO)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ hd = (HD_BCPIO *)buf;
+ if (swp_head) {
+ /*
+ * header has swapped bytes on 16 bit boundries
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = (dev_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_dev));
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = (ino_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_ino));
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_mode));
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_uid));
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_gid));
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = (nlink_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_nlink));
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = (dev_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_rdev));
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_1));
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (arcn->sb.st_mtime << 16) |
+ ((time_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_2)));
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_1));
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (arcn->sb.st_size << 16) |
+ ((off_t)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_2)));
+ nsz = (int)(RSHRT_EXT(hd->h_namesize));
+ } else {
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = (dev_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_dev));
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = (ino_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_ino));
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mode));
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_uid));
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_gid));
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = (nlink_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_nlink));
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = (dev_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_rdev));
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_1));
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (arcn->sb.st_mtime << 16) |
+ ((time_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_2)));
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (off_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_1));
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (arcn->sb.st_size << 16) |
+ ((off_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_2)));
+ nsz = (int)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_namesize));
+ }
+ arcn->sb.st_ctime = arcn->sb.st_atime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+
+ /*
+ * check the file name size, if bogus give up. otherwise read the file
+ * name
+ */
+ if (nsz < 2)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->nlen = nsz - 1;
+ if (rd_nm(arcn, nsz) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * header + file name are aligned to 2 byte boundries, skip if needed
+ */
+ if (rd_skip((off_t)(BCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_BCPIO) + nsz))) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * if not a link (or a file with no data), calculate pad size (for
+ * padding which follows the file data), clear the link name and return
+ */
+ if (((arcn->sb.st_mode & C_IFMT) != C_ISLNK)||(arcn->sb.st_size == 0)){
+ /*
+ * we have a valid header (not a link)
+ */
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ arcn->pad = BCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+ }
+
+ if ((rd_ln_nm(arcn) < 0) ||
+ (rd_skip((off_t)(BCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size))) < 0))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * we have a valid header (with a link)
+ */
+ return(com_rd(arcn));
+}
+
+/*
+ * bcpio_endrd()
+ * no cleanup needed here, just return size of the trailer (for append)
+ * Return:
+ * size of trailer header in this format
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+off_t
+bcpio_endrd(void)
+#else
+off_t
+bcpio_endrd()
+#endif
+{
+ return((off_t)(sizeof(HD_BCPIO) + sizeof(TRAILER) +
+ (BCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_BCPIO) + sizeof(TRAILER)))));
+}
+
+/*
+ * bcpio_wr()
+ * copy the data in the ARCHD to buffer in old binary cpio format
+ * There is a real chance of field overflow with this critter. So we
+ * always check the conversion is ok. nobody in his their right mind
+ * should write an achive in this format...
+ * Return
+ * 0 if file has data to be written after the header, 1 if file has NO
+ * data to write after the header, -1 if archive write failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+bcpio_wr(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+bcpio_wr(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_BCPIO *hd;
+ register int nsz;
+ char hdblk[sizeof(HD_BCPIO)];
+ off_t t_offt;
+ int t_int;
+ time_t t_timet;
+
+ /*
+ * check and repair truncated device and inode fields in the cpio
+ * header
+ */
+ if (map_dev(arcn, (u_long)BCPIO_MASK, (u_long)BCPIO_MASK) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_BLK) && (arcn->type != PAX_CHR))
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = 0;
+ hd = (HD_BCPIO *)hdblk;
+
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ case PAX_REG:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ /*
+ * caller will copy file data to the archive. tell him how
+ * much to pad.
+ */
+ arcn->pad = BCPIO_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ hd->h_filesize_1[0] = CHR_WR_0(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ hd->h_filesize_1[1] = CHR_WR_1(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ hd->h_filesize_2[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ hd->h_filesize_2[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ t_offt = (off_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_1));
+ t_offt = (t_offt<<16) | ((off_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_2)));
+ if (arcn->sb.st_size != t_offt) {
+ paxwarn(1,"File is too large for bcpio format %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ break;
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ /*
+ * no file data for the caller to process, the file data has
+ * the size of the link
+ */
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ hd->h_filesize_1[0] = CHR_WR_0(arcn->ln_nlen);
+ hd->h_filesize_1[1] = CHR_WR_1(arcn->ln_nlen);
+ hd->h_filesize_2[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->ln_nlen);
+ hd->h_filesize_2[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->ln_nlen);
+ t_int = (int)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_1));
+ t_int = (t_int << 16) | ((int)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_filesize_2)));
+ if (arcn->ln_nlen != t_int)
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ default:
+ /*
+ * no file data for the caller to process
+ */
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+ hd->h_filesize_1[0] = (char)0;
+ hd->h_filesize_1[1] = (char)0;
+ hd->h_filesize_2[0] = (char)0;
+ hd->h_filesize_2[1] = (char)0;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * build up the rest of the fields
+ */
+ hd->h_magic[0] = CHR_WR_2(MAGIC);
+ hd->h_magic[1] = CHR_WR_3(MAGIC);
+ hd->h_dev[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_dev);
+ hd->h_dev[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_dev);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_dev != (dev_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_dev)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_ino[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_ino);
+ hd->h_ino[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_ino);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_ino != (ino_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_ino)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_mode[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_mode);
+ hd->h_mode[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_mode);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_mode != (mode_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mode)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_uid[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_uid);
+ hd->h_uid[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_uid);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_uid != (uid_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_uid)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_gid[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_gid);
+ hd->h_gid[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_gid);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_gid != (gid_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_gid)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_nlink[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_nlink);
+ hd->h_nlink[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_nlink);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_nlink != (nlink_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_nlink)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_rdev[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_rdev);
+ hd->h_rdev[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_rdev);
+ if (arcn->sb.st_rdev != (dev_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_rdev)))
+ goto out;
+ hd->h_mtime_1[0] = CHR_WR_0(arcn->sb.st_mtime);
+ hd->h_mtime_1[1] = CHR_WR_1(arcn->sb.st_mtime);
+ hd->h_mtime_2[0] = CHR_WR_2(arcn->sb.st_mtime);
+ hd->h_mtime_2[1] = CHR_WR_3(arcn->sb.st_mtime);
+ t_timet = (time_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_1));
+ t_timet = (t_timet << 16) | ((time_t)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_mtime_2)));
+ if (arcn->sb.st_mtime != t_timet)
+ goto out;
+ nsz = arcn->nlen + 1;
+ hd->h_namesize[0] = CHR_WR_2(nsz);
+ hd->h_namesize[1] = CHR_WR_3(nsz);
+ if (nsz != (int)(SHRT_EXT(hd->h_namesize)))
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * write the header, the file name and padding as required.
+ */
+ if ((wr_rdbuf(hdblk, (int)sizeof(HD_BCPIO)) < 0) ||
+ (wr_rdbuf(arcn->name, nsz) < 0) ||
+ (wr_skip((off_t)(BCPIO_PAD(sizeof(HD_BCPIO) + nsz))) < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Could not write bcpio header for %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if we have file data, tell the caller we are done
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CTG) || (arcn->type == PAX_REG) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * if we are not a link, tell the caller we are done, go to next file
+ */
+ if (arcn->type != PAX_SLK)
+ return(1);
+
+ /*
+ * write the link name, tell the caller we are done.
+ */
+ if ((wr_rdbuf(arcn->ln_name, arcn->ln_nlen) < 0) ||
+ (wr_skip((off_t)(BCPIO_PAD(arcn->ln_nlen))) < 0)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Could not write bcpio link name for %s",arcn->org_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(1);
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * header field is out of range
+ */
+ paxwarn(1,"Bcpio header field is too small for file %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: cpio.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:32 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: cpio.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:15 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)cpio.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Defines common to all versions of cpio
+ */
+#define TRAILER "TRAILER!!!" /* name in last archive record */
+
+/*
+ * Header encoding of the different file types
+ */
+#define C_ISDIR 040000 /* Directory */
+#define C_ISFIFO 010000 /* FIFO */
+#define C_ISREG 0100000 /* Regular file */
+#define C_ISBLK 060000 /* Block special file */
+#define C_ISCHR 020000 /* Character special file */
+#define C_ISCTG 0110000 /* Reserved for contiguous files */
+#define C_ISLNK 0120000 /* Reserved for symbolic links */
+#define C_ISOCK 0140000 /* Reserved for sockets */
+#define C_IFMT 0170000 /* type of file */
+
+/*
+ * Data Interchange Format - Extended cpio header format - POSIX 1003.1-1990
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ char c_magic[6]; /* magic cookie */
+ char c_dev[6]; /* device number */
+ char c_ino[6]; /* inode number */
+ char c_mode[6]; /* file type/access */
+ char c_uid[6]; /* owners uid */
+ char c_gid[6]; /* owners gid */
+ char c_nlink[6]; /* # of links at archive creation */
+ char c_rdev[6]; /* block/char major/minor # */
+ char c_mtime[11]; /* modification time */
+ char c_namesize[6]; /* length of pathname */
+ char c_filesize[11]; /* length of file in bytes */
+} HD_CPIO;
+
+#define MAGIC 070707 /* transportable archive id */
+
+#ifdef _PAX_
+#define AMAGIC "070707" /* ascii equivalent string of MAGIC */
+#define CPIO_MASK 0x3ffff /* bits valid in the dev/ino fields */
+ /* used for dev/inode remaps */
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
+
+/*
+ * Binary cpio header structure
+ *
+ * CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION!
+ * Each field really represents a 16 bit short (NOT ASCII). Described as
+ * an array of chars in an attempt to improve portability!!
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ u_char h_magic[2];
+ u_char h_dev[2];
+ u_char h_ino[2];
+ u_char h_mode[2];
+ u_char h_uid[2];
+ u_char h_gid[2];
+ u_char h_nlink[2];
+ u_char h_rdev[2];
+ u_char h_mtime_1[2];
+ u_char h_mtime_2[2];
+ u_char h_namesize[2];
+ u_char h_filesize_1[2];
+ u_char h_filesize_2[2];
+} HD_BCPIO;
+
+#ifdef _PAX_
+/*
+ * extraction and creation macros for binary cpio
+ */
+#define SHRT_EXT(ch) ((((unsigned)(ch)[0])<<8) | (((unsigned)(ch)[1])&0xff))
+#define RSHRT_EXT(ch) ((((unsigned)(ch)[1])<<8) | (((unsigned)(ch)[0])&0xff))
+#define CHR_WR_0(val) ((char)(((val) >> 24) & 0xff))
+#define CHR_WR_1(val) ((char)(((val) >> 16) & 0xff))
+#define CHR_WR_2(val) ((char)(((val) >> 8) & 0xff))
+#define CHR_WR_3(val) ((char)((val) & 0xff))
+
+/*
+ * binary cpio masks and pads
+ */
+#define BCPIO_PAD(x) ((2 - ((x) & 1)) & 1) /* pad to next 2 byte word */
+#define BCPIO_MASK 0xffff /* mask for dev/ino fields */
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
+
+/*
+ * System VR4 cpio header structure (with/without file data crc)
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ char c_magic[6]; /* magic cookie */
+ char c_ino[8]; /* inode number */
+ char c_mode[8]; /* file type/access */
+ char c_uid[8]; /* owners uid */
+ char c_gid[8]; /* owners gid */
+ char c_nlink[8]; /* # of links at archive creation */
+ char c_mtime[8]; /* modification time */
+ char c_filesize[8]; /* length of file in bytes */
+ char c_maj[8]; /* block/char major # */
+ char c_min[8]; /* block/char minor # */
+ char c_rmaj[8]; /* special file major # */
+ char c_rmin[8]; /* special file minor # */
+ char c_namesize[8]; /* length of pathname */
+ char c_chksum[8]; /* 0 OR CRC of bytes of FILE data */
+} HD_VCPIO;
+
+#define VMAGIC 070701 /* sVr4 new portable archive id */
+#define VCMAGIC 070702 /* sVr4 new portable archive id CRC */
+#ifdef _PAX_
+#define AVMAGIC "070701" /* ascii string of above */
+#define AVCMAGIC "070702" /* ascii string of above */
+#define VCPIO_PAD(x) ((4 - ((x) & 3)) & 3) /* pad to next 4 byte word */
+#define VCPIO_MASK 0xffffffff /* mask for dev/ino fields */
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: extern.h,v 1.15 1998/09/20 02:22:21 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: extern.h,v 1.5 1996/03/26 23:54:16 mrg Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)extern.h 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+ */
+
+/*
+ * External references from each source file
+ */
+
+#include <sys/cdefs.h>
+
+/*
+ * ar_io.c
+ */
+extern char *arcname;
+extern char *gzip_program;
+int ar_open __P((char *));
+void ar_close __P((void));
+void ar_drain __P((void));
+int ar_set_wr __P((void));
+int ar_app_ok __P((void));
+int ar_read __P((register char *, register int));
+int ar_write __P((register char *, register int));
+int ar_rdsync __P((void));
+int ar_fow __P((off_t, off_t *));
+int ar_rev __P((off_t ));
+int ar_next __P((void));
+
+/*
+ * ar_subs.c
+ */
+extern u_long flcnt;
+void list __P((void));
+void extract __P((void));
+void append __P((void));
+void archive __P((void));
+void copy __P((void));
+
+/*
+ * buf_subs.c
+ */
+extern int blksz;
+extern int wrblksz;
+extern int maxflt;
+extern int rdblksz;
+extern off_t wrlimit;
+extern off_t rdcnt;
+extern off_t wrcnt;
+int wr_start __P((void));
+int rd_start __P((void));
+void cp_start __P((void));
+int appnd_start __P((off_t));
+int rd_sync __P((void));
+void pback __P((char *, int));
+int rd_skip __P((off_t));
+void wr_fin __P((void));
+int wr_rdbuf __P((register char *, register int));
+int rd_wrbuf __P((register char *, register int));
+int wr_skip __P((off_t));
+int wr_rdfile __P((ARCHD *, int, off_t *));
+int rd_wrfile __P((ARCHD *, int, off_t *));
+void cp_file __P((ARCHD *, int, int));
+int buf_fill __P((void));
+int buf_flush __P((register int));
+
+/*
+ * cache.c
+ */
+int uidtb_start __P((void));
+int gidtb_start __P((void));
+int usrtb_start __P((void));
+int grptb_start __P((void));
+char * name_uid __P((uid_t, int));
+char * name_gid __P((gid_t, int));
+int uid_name __P((char *, uid_t *));
+int gid_name __P((char *, gid_t *));
+
+/*
+ * cpio.c
+ */
+int cpio_strd __P((void));
+int cpio_trail __P((register ARCHD *));
+int cpio_endwr __P((void));
+int cpio_id __P((char *, int));
+int cpio_rd __P((register ARCHD *, register char *));
+off_t cpio_endrd __P((void));
+int cpio_stwr __P((void));
+int cpio_wr __P((register ARCHD *));
+int vcpio_id __P((char *, int));
+int crc_id __P((char *, int));
+int crc_strd __P((void));
+int vcpio_rd __P((register ARCHD *, register char *));
+off_t vcpio_endrd __P((void));
+int crc_stwr __P((void));
+int vcpio_wr __P((register ARCHD *));
+int bcpio_id __P((char *, int));
+int bcpio_rd __P((register ARCHD *, register char *));
+off_t bcpio_endrd __P((void));
+int bcpio_wr __P((register ARCHD *));
+
+/*
+ * file_subs.c
+ */
+int file_creat __P((register ARCHD *));
+void file_close __P((register ARCHD *, int));
+int lnk_creat __P((register ARCHD *));
+int cross_lnk __P((register ARCHD *));
+int chk_same __P((register ARCHD *));
+int node_creat __P((register ARCHD *));
+int unlnk_exist __P((register char *, register int));
+int chk_path __P((register char *, uid_t, gid_t));
+void set_ftime __P((char *fnm, time_t mtime, time_t atime, int frc));
+int set_ids __P((char *, uid_t, gid_t));
+int set_lids __P((char *, uid_t, gid_t));
+void set_pmode __P((char *, mode_t));
+int file_write __P((int, char *, register int, int *, int *, int, char *));
+void file_flush __P((int, char *, int));
+void rdfile_close __P((register ARCHD *, register int *));
+int set_crc __P((register ARCHD *, register int));
+
+/*
+ * ftree.c
+ */
+int ftree_start __P((void));
+int ftree_add __P((register char *, int));
+void ftree_sel __P((register ARCHD *));
+void ftree_chk __P((void));
+int next_file __P((register ARCHD *));
+
+/*
+ * gen_subs.c
+ */
+void ls_list __P((register ARCHD *, time_t, FILE *));
+void ls_tty __P((register ARCHD *));
+int l_strncpy __P((register char *, register char *, int));
+u_long asc_ul __P((register char *, int, register int));
+int ul_asc __P((u_long, register char *, register int, register int));
+#ifndef NET2_STAT
+u_quad_t asc_uqd __P((register char *, int, register int));
+int uqd_asc __P((u_quad_t, register char *, register int, register int));
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * getoldopt.c
+ */
+int getoldopt __P((int, char **, char *));
+
+/*
+ * options.c
+ */
+extern FSUB fsub[];
+extern int ford[];
+void options __P((register int, register char **));
+OPLIST * opt_next __P((void));
+int opt_add __P((register char *));
+int bad_opt __P((void));
+char *chdname;
+
+/*
+ * pat_rep.c
+ */
+int rep_add __P((register char *));
+int pat_add __P((char *, char *));
+void pat_chk __P((void));
+int pat_sel __P((register ARCHD *));
+int pat_match __P((register ARCHD *));
+int mod_name __P((register ARCHD *));
+int set_dest __P((register ARCHD *, char *, int));
+
+/*
+ * pax.c
+ */
+extern int act;
+extern FSUB *frmt;
+extern int cflag;
+extern int cwdfd;
+extern int dflag;
+extern int iflag;
+extern int kflag;
+extern int lflag;
+extern int nflag;
+extern int tflag;
+extern int uflag;
+extern int vflag;
+extern int zflag;
+extern int Dflag;
+extern int Hflag;
+extern int Lflag;
+extern int Xflag;
+extern int Yflag;
+extern int Zflag;
+extern int vfpart;
+extern int patime;
+extern int pmtime;
+extern int nodirs;
+extern int pmode;
+extern int pids;
+extern int rmleadslash;
+extern int exit_val;
+extern int docrc;
+extern char *dirptr;
+extern char *ltmfrmt;
+extern char *argv0;
+extern FILE *listf;
+
+int main __P((int, char **));
+void sig_cleanup __P((int));
+
+/*
+ * sel_subs.c
+ */
+int sel_chk __P((register ARCHD *));
+int grp_add __P((register char *));
+int usr_add __P((register char *));
+int trng_add __P((register char *));
+
+/*
+ * tables.c
+ */
+int lnk_start __P((void));
+int chk_lnk __P((register ARCHD *));
+void purg_lnk __P((register ARCHD *));
+void lnk_end __P((void));
+int ftime_start __P((void));
+int chk_ftime __P((register ARCHD *));
+int name_start __P((void));
+int add_name __P((register char *, int, char *));
+void sub_name __P((register char *, int *, size_t));
+int dev_start __P((void));
+int add_dev __P((register ARCHD *));
+int map_dev __P((register ARCHD *, u_long, u_long));
+int atdir_start __P((void));
+void atdir_end __P((void));
+void add_atdir __P((char *, dev_t, ino_t, time_t, time_t));
+int get_atdir __P((dev_t, ino_t, time_t *, time_t *));
+int dir_start __P((void));
+void add_dir __P((char *, int, struct stat *, int));
+void proc_dir __P((void));
+u_int st_hash __P((char *, int, int));
+
+/*
+ * tar.c
+ */
+int tar_endwr __P((void));
+off_t tar_endrd __P((void));
+int tar_trail __P((register char *, register int, register int *));
+int tar_id __P((register char *, int));
+int tar_opt __P((void));
+int tar_rd __P((register ARCHD *, register char *));
+int tar_wr __P((register ARCHD *));
+int ustar_strd __P((void));
+int ustar_stwr __P((void));
+int ustar_id __P((char *, int));
+int ustar_rd __P((register ARCHD *, register char *));
+int ustar_wr __P((register ARCHD *));
+
+/*
+ * tty_subs.c
+ */
+int tty_init __P((void));
+void tty_prnt __P((char *, ...));
+int tty_read __P((char *, int));
+void paxwarn __P((int, char *, ...));
+void syswarn __P((int, int, char *, ...));
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: file_subs.c,v 1.13 1997/09/01 18:29:48 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: file_subs.c,v 1.4 1995/03/21 09:07:18 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)file_subs.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: file_subs.c,v 1.13 1997/09/01 18:29:48 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <sys/uio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "options.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+static int
+mk_link __P((register char *,register struct stat *,register char *, int));
+
+/*
+ * routines that deal with file operations such as: creating, removing;
+ * and setting access modes, uid/gid and times of files
+ */
+
+#define FILEBITS (S_ISVTX | S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXO)
+#define SETBITS (S_ISUID | S_ISGID)
+#define ABITS (FILEBITS | SETBITS)
+
+/*
+ * file_creat()
+ * Create and open a file.
+ * Return:
+ * file descriptor or -1 for failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+file_creat(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+file_creat(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ int fd = -1;
+ mode_t file_mode;
+ int oerrno;
+
+ /*
+ * assume file doesn't exist, so just try to create it, most times this
+ * works. We have to take special handling when the file does exist. To
+ * detect this, we use O_EXCL. For example when trying to create a
+ * file and a character device or fifo exists with the same name, we
+ * can accidently open the device by mistake (or block waiting to open)
+ * If we find that the open has failed, then figure spend the effore to
+ * figure out why. This strategy was found to have better average
+ * performance in common use than checking the file (and the path)
+ * first with lstat.
+ */
+ file_mode = arcn->sb.st_mode & FILEBITS;
+ if ((fd = open(arcn->name, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC | O_EXCL,
+ file_mode)) >= 0)
+ return(fd);
+
+ /*
+ * the file seems to exist. First we try to get rid of it (found to be
+ * the second most common failure when traced). If this fails, only
+ * then we go to the expense to check and create the path to the file
+ */
+ if (unlnk_exist(arcn->name, arcn->type) != 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ for (;;) {
+ /*
+ * try to open it again, if this fails, check all the nodes in
+ * the path and give it a final try. if chk_path() finds that
+ * it cannot fix anything, we will skip the last attempt
+ */
+ if ((fd = open(arcn->name, O_WRONLY | O_CREAT | O_TRUNC,
+ file_mode)) >= 0)
+ break;
+ oerrno = errno;
+ if (nodirs || chk_path(arcn->name,arcn->sb.st_uid,arcn->sb.st_gid) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, oerrno, "Unable to create %s", arcn->name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ }
+ return(fd);
+}
+
+/*
+ * file_close()
+ * Close file descriptor to a file just created by pax. Sets modes,
+ * ownership and times as required.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 for success, -1 for failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+file_close(register ARCHD *arcn, int fd)
+#else
+void
+file_close(arcn, fd)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ int fd;
+#endif
+{
+ int res = 0;
+
+ if (fd < 0)
+ return;
+ if (close(fd) < 0)
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Unable to close file descriptor on %s",
+ arcn->name);
+
+ /*
+ * set owner/groups first as this may strip off mode bits we want
+ * then set file permission modes. Then set file access and
+ * modification times.
+ */
+ if (pids)
+ res = set_ids(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_uid, arcn->sb.st_gid);
+
+ /*
+ * IMPORTANT SECURITY NOTE:
+ * if not preserving mode or we cannot set uid/gid, then PROHIBIT
+ * set uid/gid bits
+ */
+ if (!pmode || res)
+ arcn->sb.st_mode &= ~(SETBITS);
+ if (pmode)
+ set_pmode(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_mode);
+ if (patime || pmtime)
+ set_ftime(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_mtime, arcn->sb.st_atime, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * lnk_creat()
+ * Create a hard link to arcn->ln_name from arcn->name. arcn->ln_name
+ * must exist;
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+lnk_creat(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+lnk_creat(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * we may be running as root, so we have to be sure that link target
+ * is not a directory, so we lstat and check
+ */
+ if (lstat(arcn->ln_name, &sb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1,errno,"Unable to link to %s from %s", arcn->ln_name,
+ arcn->name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (S_ISDIR(sb.st_mode)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "A hard link to the directory %s is not allowed",
+ arcn->ln_name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ return(mk_link(arcn->ln_name, &sb, arcn->name, 0));
+}
+
+/*
+ * cross_lnk()
+ * Create a hard link to arcn->org_name from arcn->name. Only used in copy
+ * with the -l flag. No warning or error if this does not succeed (we will
+ * then just create the file)
+ * Return:
+ * 1 if copy() should try to create this file node
+ * 0 if cross_lnk() ok, -1 for fatal flaw (like linking to self).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+cross_lnk(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+cross_lnk(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * try to make a link to orginal file (-l flag in copy mode). make sure
+ * we do not try to link to directories in case we are running as root
+ * (and it might succeed).
+ */
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_DIR)
+ return(1);
+ return(mk_link(arcn->org_name, &(arcn->sb), arcn->name, 1));
+}
+
+/*
+ * chk_same()
+ * In copy mode if we are not trying to make hard links between the src
+ * and destinations, make sure we are not going to overwrite ourselves by
+ * accident. This slows things down a little, but we have to protect all
+ * those people who make typing errors.
+ * Return:
+ * 1 the target does not exist, go ahead and copy
+ * 0 skip it file exists (-k) or may be the same as source file
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+chk_same(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+chk_same(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * if file does not exist, return. if file exists and -k, skip it
+ * quietly
+ */
+ if (lstat(arcn->name, &sb) < 0)
+ return(1);
+ if (kflag)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * better make sure the user does not have src == dest by mistake
+ */
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_dev == sb.st_dev) && (arcn->sb.st_ino == sb.st_ino)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to copy %s, file would overwrite itself",
+ arcn->name);
+ return(0);
+ }
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * mk_link()
+ * try to make a hard link between two files. if ign set, we do not
+ * complain.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if successful (or we are done with this file but no error, such as
+ * finding the from file exists and the user has set -k).
+ * 1 when ign was set to indicates we could not make the link but we
+ * should try to copy/extract the file as that might work (and is an
+ * allowed option). -1 an error occurred.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+mk_link(register char *to, register struct stat *to_sb, register char *from,
+ int ign)
+#else
+static int
+mk_link(to, to_sb, from, ign)
+ register char *to;
+ register struct stat *to_sb;
+ register char *from;
+ int ign;
+#endif
+{
+ struct stat sb;
+ int oerrno;
+
+ /*
+ * if from file exists, it has to be unlinked to make the link. If the
+ * file exists and -k is set, skip it quietly
+ */
+ if (lstat(from, &sb) == 0) {
+ if (kflag)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * make sure it is not the same file, protect the user
+ */
+ if ((to_sb->st_dev==sb.st_dev)&&(to_sb->st_ino == sb.st_ino)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to link file %s to itself", to);
+ return(-1);;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * try to get rid of the file, based on the type
+ */
+ if (S_ISDIR(sb.st_mode)) {
+ if (rmdir(from) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to remove %s", from);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ } else if (unlink(from) < 0) {
+ if (!ign) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to remove %s", from);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * from file is gone (or did not exist), try to make the hard link.
+ * if it fails, check the path and try it again (if chk_path() says to
+ * try again)
+ */
+ for (;;) {
+ if (link(to, from) == 0)
+ break;
+ oerrno = errno;
+ if (!nodirs && chk_path(from, to_sb->st_uid, to_sb->st_gid) == 0)
+ continue;
+ if (!ign) {
+ syswarn(1, oerrno, "Could not link to %s from %s", to,
+ from);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * all right the link was made
+ */
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * node_creat()
+ * create an entry in the file system (other than a file or hard link).
+ * If successful, sets uid/gid modes and times as required.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+node_creat(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+node_creat(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res;
+ register int ign = 0;
+ register int oerrno;
+ register int pass = 0;
+ mode_t file_mode;
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * create node based on type, if that fails try to unlink the node and
+ * try again. finally check the path and try again. As noted in the
+ * file and link creation routines, this method seems to exhibit the
+ * best performance in general use workloads.
+ */
+ file_mode = arcn->sb.st_mode & FILEBITS;
+
+ for (;;) {
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_DIR:
+ res = mkdir(arcn->name, file_mode);
+ if (ign)
+ res = 0;
+ break;
+ case PAX_CHR:
+ file_mode |= S_IFCHR;
+ res = mknod(arcn->name, file_mode, arcn->sb.st_rdev);
+ break;
+ case PAX_BLK:
+ file_mode |= S_IFBLK;
+ res = mknod(arcn->name, file_mode, arcn->sb.st_rdev);
+ break;
+ case PAX_FIF:
+ res = mkfifo(arcn->name, file_mode);
+ break;
+ case PAX_SCK:
+ /*
+ * Skip sockets, operation has no meaning under BSD
+ */
+ paxwarn(0,
+ "%s skipped. Sockets cannot be copied or extracted",
+ arcn->name);
+ return(-1);
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ res = symlink(arcn->ln_name, arcn->name);
+ break;
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ case PAX_HLK:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ case PAX_REG:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * we should never get here
+ */
+ paxwarn(0, "%s has an unknown file type, skipping",
+ arcn->name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if we were able to create the node break out of the loop,
+ * otherwise try to unlink the node and try again. if that
+ * fails check the full path and try a final time.
+ */
+ if (res == 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * we failed to make the node
+ */
+ oerrno = errno;
+ if ((ign = unlnk_exist(arcn->name, arcn->type)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ if (++pass <= 1)
+ continue;
+
+ if (nodirs || chk_path(arcn->name,arcn->sb.st_uid,arcn->sb.st_gid) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, oerrno, "Could not create: %s", arcn->name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we were able to create the node. set uid/gid, modes and times
+ */
+ if (pids)
+ res = ((arcn->type == PAX_SLK) ?
+ set_lids(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_uid, arcn->sb.st_gid) :
+ set_ids(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_uid, arcn->sb.st_gid));
+ else
+ res = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * symlinks are done now.
+ */
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_SLK)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * IMPORTANT SECURITY NOTE:
+ * if not preserving mode or we cannot set uid/gid, then PROHIBIT any
+ * set uid/gid bits
+ */
+ if (!pmode || res)
+ arcn->sb.st_mode &= ~(SETBITS);
+ if (pmode)
+ set_pmode(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_mode);
+
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_DIR && strcmp(NM_CPIO, argv0) != 0) {
+ /*
+ * Dirs must be processed again at end of extract to set times
+ * and modes to agree with those stored in the archive. However
+ * to allow extract to continue, we may have to also set owner
+ * rights. This allows nodes in the archive that are children
+ * of this directory to be extracted without failure. Both time
+ * and modes will be fixed after the entire archive is read and
+ * before pax exits.
+ */
+ if (access(arcn->name, R_OK | W_OK | X_OK) < 0) {
+ if (lstat(arcn->name, &sb) < 0) {
+ syswarn(0, errno,"Could not access %s (stat)",
+ arcn->name);
+ set_pmode(arcn->name,file_mode | S_IRWXU);
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * We have to add rights to the dir, so we make
+ * sure to restore the mode. The mode must be
+ * restored AS CREATED and not as stored if
+ * pmode is not set.
+ */
+ set_pmode(arcn->name,
+ ((sb.st_mode & FILEBITS) | S_IRWXU));
+ if (!pmode)
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = sb.st_mode;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we have to force the mode to what was set here,
+ * since we changed it from the default as created.
+ */
+ add_dir(arcn->name, arcn->nlen, &(arcn->sb), 1);
+ } else if (pmode || patime || pmtime)
+ add_dir(arcn->name, arcn->nlen, &(arcn->sb), 0);
+ }
+
+ if (patime || pmtime)
+ set_ftime(arcn->name, arcn->sb.st_mtime, arcn->sb.st_atime, 0);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * unlnk_exist()
+ * Remove node from file system with the specified name. We pass the type
+ * of the node that is going to replace it. When we try to create a
+ * directory and find that it already exists, we allow processing to
+ * continue as proper modes etc will always be set for it later on.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 is ok to proceed, no file with the specified name exists
+ * -1 we were unable to remove the node, or we should not remove it (-k)
+ * 1 we found a directory and we were going to create a directory.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+unlnk_exist(register char *name, register int type)
+#else
+int
+unlnk_exist(name, type)
+ register char *name;
+ register int type;
+#endif
+{
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ /*
+ * the file does not exist, or -k we are done
+ */
+ if (lstat(name, &sb) < 0)
+ return(0);
+ if (kflag)
+ return(-1);
+
+ if (S_ISDIR(sb.st_mode)) {
+ /*
+ * try to remove a directory, if it fails and we were going to
+ * create a directory anyway, tell the caller (return a 1)
+ */
+ if (rmdir(name) < 0) {
+ if (type == PAX_DIR)
+ return(1);
+ syswarn(1,errno,"Unable to remove directory %s", name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * try to get rid of all non-directory type nodes
+ */
+ if (unlink(name) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Could not unlink %s", name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * chk_path()
+ * We were trying to create some kind of node in the file system and it
+ * failed. chk_path() makes sure the path up to the node exists and is
+ * writeable. When we have to create a directory that is missing along the
+ * path somewhere, the directory we create will be set to the same
+ * uid/gid as the file has (when uid and gid are being preserved).
+ * NOTE: this routine is a real performance loss. It is only used as a
+ * last resort when trying to create entries in the file system.
+ * Return:
+ * -1 when it could find nothing it is allowed to fix.
+ * 0 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+chk_path( register char *name, uid_t st_uid, gid_t st_gid)
+#else
+int
+chk_path(name, st_uid, st_gid)
+ register char *name;
+ uid_t st_uid;
+ gid_t st_gid;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *spt = name;
+ struct stat sb;
+ int retval = -1;
+
+ /*
+ * watch out for paths with nodes stored directly in / (e.g. /bozo)
+ */
+ if (*spt == '/')
+ ++spt;
+
+ for(;;) {
+ /*
+ * work foward from the first / and check each part of the path
+ */
+ spt = strchr(spt, '/');
+ if (spt == NULL)
+ break;
+ *spt = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * if it exists we assume it is a directory, it is not within
+ * the spec (at least it seems to read that way) to alter the
+ * file system for nodes NOT EXPLICITLY stored on the archive.
+ * If that assumption is changed, you would test the node here
+ * and figure out how to get rid of it (probably like some
+ * recursive unlink()) or fix up the directory permissions if
+ * required (do an access()).
+ */
+ if (lstat(name, &sb) == 0) {
+ *(spt++) = '/';
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * the path fails at this point, see if we can create the
+ * needed directory and continue on
+ */
+ if (mkdir(name, S_IRWXU | S_IRWXG | S_IRWXO) < 0) {
+ *spt = '/';
+ retval = -1;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we were able to create the directory. We will tell the
+ * caller that we found something to fix, and it is ok to try
+ * and create the node again.
+ */
+ retval = 0;
+ if (pids)
+ (void)set_ids(name, st_uid, st_gid);
+
+ /*
+ * make sure the user doen't have some strange umask that
+ * causes this newly created directory to be unusable. We fix
+ * the modes and restore them back to the creation default at
+ * the end of pax
+ */
+ if ((access(name, R_OK | W_OK | X_OK) < 0) &&
+ (lstat(name, &sb) == 0)) {
+ set_pmode(name, ((sb.st_mode & FILEBITS) | S_IRWXU));
+ add_dir(name, spt - name, &sb, 1);
+ }
+ *(spt++) = '/';
+ continue;
+ }
+ return(retval);
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_ftime()
+ * Set the access time and modification time for a named file. If frc is
+ * non-zero we force these times to be set even if the user did not
+ * request access and/or modification time preservation (this is also
+ * used by -t to reset access times).
+ * When ign is zero, only those times the user has asked for are set, the
+ * other ones are left alone. We do not assume the un-documented feature
+ * of many utimes() implementations that consider a 0 time value as a do
+ * not set request.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+set_ftime(char *fnm, time_t mtime, time_t atime, int frc)
+#else
+void
+set_ftime(fnm, mtime, atime, frc)
+ char *fnm;
+ time_t mtime;
+ time_t atime;
+ int frc;
+#endif
+{
+ static struct timeval tv[2] = {{0L, 0L}, {0L, 0L}};
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ tv[0].tv_sec = (long)atime;
+ tv[1].tv_sec = (long)mtime;
+ if (!frc && (!patime || !pmtime)) {
+ /*
+ * if we are not forcing, only set those times the user wants
+ * set. We get the current values of the times if we need them.
+ */
+ if (lstat(fnm, &sb) == 0) {
+ if (!patime)
+ tv[0].tv_sec = (long)sb.st_atime;
+ if (!pmtime)
+ tv[1].tv_sec = (long)sb.st_mtime;
+ } else
+ syswarn(0,errno,"Unable to obtain file stats %s", fnm);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * set the times
+ */
+ if (utimes(fnm, tv) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Access/modification time set failed on: %s",
+ fnm);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_ids()
+ * set the uid and gid of a file system node
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when set, -1 on failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+set_ids(char *fnm, uid_t uid, gid_t gid)
+#else
+int
+set_ids(fnm, uid, gid)
+ char *fnm;
+ uid_t uid;
+ gid_t gid;
+#endif
+{
+ if (chown(fnm, uid, gid) < 0) {
+ /*
+ * ignore EPERM unless in verbose mode or being run by root.
+ * if running as pax, POSIX requires a warning.
+ */
+ if (strcmp(NM_PAX, argv0) == 0 || errno != EPERM || vflag ||
+ geteuid() == 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to set file uid/gid of %s",
+ fnm);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_lids()
+ * set the uid and gid of a file system node
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when set, -1 on failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+set_lids(char *fnm, uid_t uid, gid_t gid)
+#else
+int
+set_lids(fnm, uid, gid)
+ char *fnm;
+ uid_t uid;
+ gid_t gid;
+#endif
+{
+ if (lchown(fnm, uid, gid) < 0) {
+ /*
+ * ignore EPERM unless in verbose mode or being run by root.
+ * if running as pax, POSIX requires a warning.
+ */
+ if (strcmp(NM_PAX, argv0) == 0 || errno != EPERM || vflag ||
+ geteuid() == 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to set file uid/gid of %s",
+ fnm);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_pmode()
+ * Set file access mode
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+set_pmode(char *fnm, mode_t mode)
+#else
+void
+set_pmode(fnm, mode)
+ char *fnm;
+ mode_t mode;
+#endif
+{
+ mode &= ABITS;
+ if (chmod(fnm, mode) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Could not set permissions on %s", fnm);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * file_write()
+ * Write/copy a file (during copy or archive extract). This routine knows
+ * how to copy files with lseek holes in it. (Which are read as file
+ * blocks containing all 0's but do not have any file blocks associated
+ * with the data). Typical examples of these are files created by dbm
+ * variants (.pag files). While the file size of these files are huge, the
+ * actual storage is quite small (the files are sparse). The problem is
+ * the holes read as all zeros so are probably stored on the archive that
+ * way (there is no way to determine if the file block is really a hole,
+ * we only know that a file block of all zero's can be a hole).
+ * At this writing, no major archive format knows how to archive files
+ * with holes. However, on extraction (or during copy, -rw) we have to
+ * deal with these files. Without detecting the holes, the files can
+ * consume a lot of file space if just written to disk. This replacement
+ * for write when passed the basic allocation size of a file system block,
+ * uses lseek whenever it detects the input data is all 0 within that
+ * file block. In more detail, the strategy is as follows:
+ * While the input is all zero keep doing an lseek. Keep track of when we
+ * pass over file block boundries. Only write when we hit a non zero
+ * input. once we have written a file block, we continue to write it to
+ * the end (we stop looking at the input). When we reach the start of the
+ * next file block, start checking for zero blocks again. Working on file
+ * block boundries significantly reduces the overhead when copying files
+ * that are NOT very sparse. This overhead (when compared to a write) is
+ * almost below the measurement resolution on many systems. Without it,
+ * files with holes cannot be safely copied. It does has a side effect as
+ * it can put holes into files that did not have them before, but that is
+ * not a problem since the file contents are unchanged (in fact it saves
+ * file space). (Except on paging files for diskless clients. But since we
+ * cannot determine one of those file from here, we ignore them). If this
+ * ever ends up on a system where CTG files are supported and the holes
+ * are not desired, just do a conditional test in those routines that
+ * call file_write() and have it call write() instead. BEFORE CLOSING THE
+ * FILE, make sure to call file_flush() when the last write finishes with
+ * an empty block. A lot of file systems will not create an lseek hole at
+ * the end. In this case we drop a single 0 at the end to force the
+ * trailing 0's in the file.
+ * ---Parameters---
+ * rem: how many bytes left in this file system block
+ * isempt: have we written to the file block yet (is it empty)
+ * sz: basic file block allocation size
+ * cnt: number of bytes on this write
+ * str: buffer to write
+ * Return:
+ * number of bytes written, -1 on write (or lseek) error.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+file_write(int fd, char *str, register int cnt, int *rem, int *isempt, int sz,
+ char *name)
+#else
+int
+file_write(fd, str, cnt, rem, isempt, sz, name)
+ int fd;
+ char *str;
+ register int cnt;
+ int *rem;
+ int *isempt;
+ int sz;
+ char *name;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+ register char *end;
+ register int wcnt;
+ register char *st = str;
+
+ /*
+ * while we have data to process
+ */
+ while (cnt) {
+ if (!*rem) {
+ /*
+ * We are now at the start of file system block again
+ * (or what we think one is...). start looking for
+ * empty blocks again
+ */
+ *isempt = 1;
+ *rem = sz;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * only examine up to the end of the current file block or
+ * remaining characters to write, whatever is smaller
+ */
+ wcnt = MIN(cnt, *rem);
+ cnt -= wcnt;
+ *rem -= wcnt;
+ if (*isempt) {
+ /*
+ * have not written to this block yet, so we keep
+ * looking for zero's
+ */
+ pt = st;
+ end = st + wcnt;
+
+ /*
+ * look for a zero filled buffer
+ */
+ while ((pt < end) && (*pt == '\0'))
+ ++pt;
+
+ if (pt == end) {
+ /*
+ * skip, buf is empty so far
+ */
+ if (lseek(fd, (off_t)wcnt, SEEK_CUR) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1,errno,"File seek on %s",
+ name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ st = pt;
+ continue;
+ }
+ /*
+ * drat, the buf is not zero filled
+ */
+ *isempt = 0;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * have non-zero data in this file system block, have to write
+ */
+ if (write(fd, st, wcnt) != wcnt) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed write to file %s", name);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ st += wcnt;
+ }
+ return(st - str);
+}
+
+/*
+ * file_flush()
+ * when the last file block in a file is zero, many file systems will not
+ * let us create a hole at the end. To get the last block with zeros, we
+ * write the last BYTE with a zero (back up one byte and write a zero).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+file_flush(int fd, char *fname, int isempt)
+#else
+void
+file_flush(fd, fname, isempt)
+ int fd;
+ char *fname;
+ int isempt;
+#endif
+{
+ static char blnk[] = "\0";
+
+ /*
+ * silly test, but make sure we are only called when the last block is
+ * filled with all zeros.
+ */
+ if (!isempt)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * move back one byte and write a zero
+ */
+ if (lseek(fd, (off_t)-1, SEEK_CUR) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed seek on file %s", fname);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ if (write(fd, blnk, 1) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed write to file %s", fname);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * rdfile_close()
+ * close a file we have beed reading (to copy or archive). If we have to
+ * reset access time (tflag) do so (the times are stored in arcn).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+rdfile_close(register ARCHD *arcn, register int *fd)
+#else
+void
+rdfile_close(arcn, fd)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int *fd;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * make sure the file is open
+ */
+ if (*fd < 0)
+ return;
+
+ (void)close(*fd);
+ *fd = -1;
+ if (!tflag)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * user wants last access time reset
+ */
+ set_ftime(arcn->org_name, arcn->sb.st_mtime, arcn->sb.st_atime, 1);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_crc()
+ * read a file to calculate its crc. This is a real drag. Archive formats
+ * that have this, end up reading the file twice (we have to write the
+ * header WITH the crc before writing the file contents. Oh well...
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if was able to calculate the crc, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+set_crc(register ARCHD *arcn, register int fd)
+#else
+int
+set_crc(arcn, fd)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register int fd;
+#endif
+{
+ register int i;
+ register int res;
+ off_t cpcnt = 0L;
+ u_long size;
+ unsigned long crc = 0L;
+ char tbuf[FILEBLK];
+ struct stat sb;
+
+ if (fd < 0) {
+ /*
+ * hmm, no fd, should never happen. well no crc then.
+ */
+ arcn->crc = 0L;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ if ((size = (u_long)arcn->sb.st_blksize) > (u_long)sizeof(tbuf))
+ size = (u_long)sizeof(tbuf);
+
+ /*
+ * read all the bytes we think that there are in the file. If the user
+ * is trying to archive an active file, forget this file.
+ */
+ for(;;) {
+ if ((res = read(fd, tbuf, size)) <= 0)
+ break;
+ cpcnt += res;
+ for (i = 0; i < res; ++i)
+ crc += (tbuf[i] & 0xff);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * safety check. we want to avoid archiving files that are active as
+ * they can create inconsistant archive copies.
+ */
+ if (cpcnt != arcn->sb.st_size)
+ paxwarn(1, "File changed size %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (fstat(fd, &sb) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed stat on %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (arcn->sb.st_mtime != sb.st_mtime)
+ paxwarn(1, "File %s was modified during read", arcn->org_name);
+ else if (lseek(fd, (off_t)0L, SEEK_SET) < 0)
+ syswarn(1, errno, "File rewind failed on: %s", arcn->org_name);
+ else {
+ arcn->crc = crc;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ return(-1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: ftree.c,v 1.9 1998/06/09 07:28:41 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: ftree.c,v 1.4 1995/03/21 09:07:21 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)ftree.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: ftree.c,v 1.9 1998/06/09 07:28:41 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <fts.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "ftree.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * routines to interface with the fts library function.
+ *
+ * file args supplied to pax are stored on a single linked list (of type FTREE)
+ * and given to fts to be processed one at a time. pax "selects" files from
+ * the expansion of each arg into the corresponding file tree (if the arg is a
+ * directory, otherwise the node itself is just passed to pax). The selection
+ * is modified by the -n and -u flags. The user is informed when a specific
+ * file arg does not generate any selected files. -n keeps expanding the file
+ * tree arg until one of its files is selected, then skips to the next file
+ * arg. when the user does not supply the file trees as command line args to
+ * pax, they are read from stdin
+ */
+
+static FTS *ftsp = NULL; /* curent FTS handle */
+static int ftsopts; /* options to be used on fts_open */
+static char *farray[2]; /* array for passing each arg to fts */
+static FTREE *fthead = NULL; /* head of linked list of file args */
+static FTREE *fttail = NULL; /* tail of linked list of file args */
+static FTREE *ftcur = NULL; /* current file arg being processed */
+static FTSENT *ftent = NULL; /* current file tree entry */
+static int ftree_skip; /* when set skip to next file arg */
+
+static int ftree_arg __P((void));
+
+/*
+ * ftree_start()
+ * initialize the options passed to fts_open() during this run of pax
+ * options are based on the selection of pax options by the user
+ * fts_start() also calls fts_arg() to open the first valid file arg. We
+ * also attempt to reset directory access times when -t (tflag) is set.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if there is at least one valid file arg to process, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ftree_start(void)
+#else
+int
+ftree_start()
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * set up the operation mode of fts, open the first file arg. We must
+ * use FTS_NOCHDIR, as the user may have to open multiple archives and
+ * if fts did a chdir off into the boondocks, we may create an archive
+ * volume in an place where the user did not expect to.
+ */
+ ftsopts = FTS_NOCHDIR;
+
+ /*
+ * optional user flags that effect file traversal
+ * -H command line symlink follow only (half follow)
+ * -L follow sylinks (logical)
+ * -P do not follow sylinks (physical). This is the default.
+ * -X do not cross over mount points
+ * -t preserve access times on files read.
+ * -n select only the first member of a file tree when a match is found
+ * -d do not extract subtrees rooted at a directory arg.
+ */
+ if (Lflag)
+ ftsopts |= FTS_LOGICAL;
+ else
+ ftsopts |= FTS_PHYSICAL;
+ if (Hflag)
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ paxwarn(0, "The -H flag is not supported on this version");
+# else
+ ftsopts |= FTS_COMFOLLOW;
+# endif
+ if (Xflag)
+ ftsopts |= FTS_XDEV;
+
+ if ((fthead == NULL) && ((farray[0] = malloc(PAXPATHLEN+2)) == NULL)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for file name buffer");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (ftree_arg() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (tflag && (atdir_start() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ftree_add()
+ * add the arg to the linked list of files to process. Each will be
+ * processed by fts one at a time
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if added to the linked list, -1 if failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ftree_add(register char *str, int chflg)
+#else
+int
+ftree_add(str, chflg)
+ register char *str;
+ int chflg;
+#endif
+{
+ register FTREE *ft;
+ register int len;
+
+ /*
+ * simple check for bad args
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Invalid file name arguement");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * allocate FTREE node and add to the end of the linked list (args are
+ * processed in the same order they were passed to pax). Get rid of any
+ * trailing / the user may pass us. (watch out for / by itself).
+ */
+ if ((ft = (FTREE *)malloc(sizeof(FTREE))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Unable to allocate memory for filename");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ if (((len = strlen(str) - 1) > 0) && (str[len] == '/'))
+ str[len] = '\0';
+ ft->fname = str;
+ ft->refcnt = 0;
+ ft->chflg = chflg;
+ ft->fow = NULL;
+ if (fthead == NULL) {
+ fttail = fthead = ft;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ fttail->fow = ft;
+ fttail = ft;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ftree_sel()
+ * this entry has been selected by pax. bump up reference count and handle
+ * -n and -d processing.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ftree_sel(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+void
+ftree_sel(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * set reference bit for this pattern. This linked list is only used
+ * when file trees are supplied pax as args. The list is not used when
+ * the trees are read from stdin.
+ */
+ if (ftcur != NULL)
+ ftcur->refcnt = 1;
+
+ /*
+ * if -n we are done with this arg, force a skip to the next arg when
+ * pax asks for the next file in next_file().
+ * if -d we tell fts only to match the directory (if the arg is a dir)
+ * and not the entire file tree rooted at that point.
+ */
+ if (nflag)
+ ftree_skip = 1;
+
+ if (!dflag || (arcn->type != PAX_DIR))
+ return;
+
+ if (ftent != NULL)
+ (void)fts_set(ftsp, ftent, FTS_SKIP);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ftree_chk()
+ * called at end on pax execution. Prints all those file args that did not
+ * have a selected member (reference count still 0)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ftree_chk(void)
+#else
+void
+ftree_chk()
+#endif
+{
+ register FTREE *ft;
+ register int wban = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * make sure all dir access times were reset.
+ */
+ if (tflag)
+ atdir_end();
+
+ /*
+ * walk down list and check reference count. Print out those members
+ * that never had a match
+ */
+ for (ft = fthead; ft != NULL; ft = ft->fow) {
+ if ((ft->refcnt > 0) || ft->chflg)
+ continue;
+ if (wban == 0) {
+ paxwarn(1,"WARNING! These file names were not selected:");
+ ++wban;
+ }
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", ft->fname);
+ }
+}
+
+/*
+ * ftree_arg()
+ * Get the next file arg for fts to process. Can be from either the linked
+ * list or read from stdin when the user did not them as args to pax. Each
+ * arg is processed until the first successful fts_open().
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when the next arg is ready to go, -1 if out of file args (or EOF on
+ * stdin).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+ftree_arg(void)
+#else
+static int
+ftree_arg()
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * close off the current file tree
+ */
+ if (ftsp != NULL) {
+ (void)fts_close(ftsp);
+ ftsp = NULL;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * keep looping until we get a valid file tree to process. Stop when we
+ * reach the end of the list (or get an eof on stdin)
+ */
+ for(;;) {
+ if (fthead == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * the user didn't supply any args, get the file trees
+ * to process from stdin;
+ */
+ if (fgets(farray[0], PAXPATHLEN+1, stdin) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((pt = strchr(farray[0], '\n')) != NULL)
+ *pt = '\0';
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * the user supplied the file args as arguements to pax
+ */
+ if (ftcur == NULL)
+ ftcur = fthead;
+ else if ((ftcur = ftcur->fow) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ if (ftcur->chflg) {
+ /* First fchdir() back... */
+ if (fchdir(cwdfd) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+ "Can't fchdir to starting directory");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (chdir(ftcur->fname) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Can't chdir to %s",
+ ftcur->fname);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ continue;
+ } else
+ farray[0] = ftcur->fname;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * watch it, fts wants the file arg stored in a array of char
+ * ptrs, with the last one a null. we use a two element array
+ * and set farray[0] to point at the buffer with the file name
+ * in it. We cannnot pass all the file args to fts at one shot
+ * as we need to keep a handle on which file arg generates what
+ * files (the -n and -d flags need this). If the open is
+ * successful, return a 0.
+ */
+ if ((ftsp = fts_open(farray, ftsopts, NULL)) != NULL)
+ break;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * next_file()
+ * supplies the next file to process in the supplied archd structure.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 when contents of arcn have been set with the next file, -1 when done.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+next_file(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+next_file(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register int cnt;
+ time_t atime;
+ time_t mtime;
+
+ /*
+ * ftree_sel() might have set the ftree_skip flag if the user has the
+ * -n option and a file was selected from this file arg tree. (-n says
+ * only one member is matched for each pattern) ftree_skip being 1
+ * forces us to go to the next arg now.
+ */
+ if (ftree_skip) {
+ /*
+ * clear and go to next arg
+ */
+ ftree_skip = 0;
+ if (ftree_arg() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * loop until we get a valid file to process
+ */
+ for(;;) {
+ if ((ftent = fts_read(ftsp)) == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * out of files in this tree, go to next arg, if none
+ * we are done
+ */
+ if (ftree_arg() < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * handle each type of fts_read() flag
+ */
+ switch(ftent->fts_info) {
+ case FTS_D:
+ case FTS_DEFAULT:
+ case FTS_F:
+ case FTS_SL:
+ case FTS_SLNONE:
+ /*
+ * these are all ok
+ */
+ break;
+ case FTS_DP:
+ /*
+ * already saw this directory. If the user wants file
+ * access times reset, we use this to restore the
+ * access time for this directory since this is the
+ * last time we will see it in this file subtree
+ * remember to force the time (this is -t on a read
+ * directory, not a created directory).
+ */
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ if (!tflag || (get_atdir(ftent->fts_statb.st_dev,
+ ftent->fts_statb.st_ino, &mtime, &atime) < 0))
+# else
+ if (!tflag || (get_atdir(ftent->fts_statp->st_dev,
+ ftent->fts_statp->st_ino, &mtime, &atime) < 0))
+# endif
+ continue;
+ set_ftime(ftent->fts_path, mtime, atime, 1);
+ continue;
+ case FTS_DC:
+ /*
+ * fts claims a file system cycle
+ */
+ paxwarn(1,"File system cycle found at %s",ftent->fts_path);
+ continue;
+ case FTS_DNR:
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+# else
+ syswarn(1, ftent->fts_errno,
+# endif
+ "Unable to read directory %s", ftent->fts_path);
+ continue;
+ case FTS_ERR:
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+# else
+ syswarn(1, ftent->fts_errno,
+# endif
+ "File system traversal error");
+ continue;
+ case FTS_NS:
+ case FTS_NSOK:
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+# else
+ syswarn(1, ftent->fts_errno,
+# endif
+ "Unable to access %s", ftent->fts_path);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * ok got a file tree node to process. copy info into arcn
+ * structure (initialize as required)
+ */
+ arcn->skip = 0;
+ arcn->pad = 0;
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+# ifdef NET2_FTS
+ arcn->sb = ftent->fts_statb;
+# else
+ arcn->sb = *(ftent->fts_statp);
+# endif
+
+ /*
+ * file type based set up and copy into the arcn struct
+ * SIDE NOTE:
+ * we try to reset the access time on all files and directories
+ * we may read when the -t flag is specified. files are reset
+ * when we close them after copying. we reset the directories
+ * when we are done with their file tree (we also clean up at
+ * end in case we cut short a file tree traversal). However
+ * there is no way to reset access times on symlinks.
+ */
+ switch(S_IFMT & arcn->sb.st_mode) {
+ case S_IFDIR:
+ arcn->type = PAX_DIR;
+ if (!tflag)
+ break;
+ add_atdir(ftent->fts_path, arcn->sb.st_dev,
+ arcn->sb.st_ino, arcn->sb.st_mtime,
+ arcn->sb.st_atime);
+ break;
+ case S_IFCHR:
+ arcn->type = PAX_CHR;
+ break;
+ case S_IFBLK:
+ arcn->type = PAX_BLK;
+ break;
+ case S_IFREG:
+ /*
+ * only regular files with have data to store on the
+ * archive. all others will store a zero length skip.
+ * the skip field is used by pax for actual data it has
+ * to read (or skip over).
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_REG;
+ arcn->skip = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ break;
+ case S_IFLNK:
+ arcn->type = PAX_SLK;
+ /*
+ * have to read the symlink path from the file
+ */
+ if ((cnt = readlink(ftent->fts_path, arcn->ln_name,
+ PAXPATHLEN)) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to read symlink %s",
+ ftent->fts_path);
+ continue;
+ }
+ /*
+ * set link name length, watch out readlink does not
+ * always NUL terminate the link path
+ */
+ arcn->ln_name[cnt] = '\0';
+ arcn->ln_nlen = cnt;
+ break;
+ case S_IFSOCK:
+ /*
+ * under BSD storing a socket is senseless but we will
+ * let the format specific write function make the
+ * decision of what to do with it.
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_SCK;
+ break;
+ case S_IFIFO:
+ arcn->type = PAX_FIF;
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * copy file name, set file name length
+ */
+ arcn->nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->name, ftent->fts_path, sizeof(arcn->name) - 1);
+ arcn->name[arcn->nlen] = '\0';
+ arcn->org_name = ftent->fts_path;
+ return(0);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: ftree.h,v 1.3 1996/10/27 06:45:11 downsj Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: ftree.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:23 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)ftree.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Data structure used by the ftree.c routines to store the file args to be
+ * handed to fts(). It keeps a reference count of which args generated a
+ * "selected" member
+ */
+
+typedef struct ftree {
+ char *fname; /* file tree name */
+ int refcnt; /* has tree had a selected file? */
+ int chflg; /* change directory flag */
+ struct ftree *fow; /* pointer to next entry on list */
+} FTREE;
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: gen_subs.c,v 1.8 1997/09/01 18:29:51 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: gen_subs.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:26 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)gen_subs.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: gen_subs.c,v 1.8 1997/09/01 18:29:51 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tzfile.h>
+#include <utmp.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * a collection of general purpose subroutines used by pax
+ */
+
+/*
+ * constants used by ls_list() when printing out archive members
+ */
+#define MODELEN 20
+#define DATELEN 64
+#define SIXMONTHS ((DAYSPERNYEAR / 2) * SECSPERDAY)
+#define CURFRMT "%b %e %H:%M"
+#define OLDFRMT "%b %e %Y"
+#ifndef UT_NAMESIZE
+#define UT_NAMESIZE 8
+#endif
+#define UT_GRPSIZE 6
+
+/*
+ * ls_list()
+ * list the members of an archive in ls format
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ls_list(register ARCHD *arcn, time_t now, FILE *fp)
+#else
+void
+ls_list(arcn, now, fp)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ time_t now;
+ FILE *fp;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct stat *sbp;
+ char f_mode[MODELEN];
+ char f_date[DATELEN];
+ char *timefrmt;
+
+ /*
+ * if not verbose, just print the file name
+ */
+ if (!vflag) {
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%s\n", arcn->name);
+ (void)fflush(fp);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * user wants long mode
+ */
+ sbp = &(arcn->sb);
+ strmode(sbp->st_mode, f_mode);
+
+ if (ltmfrmt == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * no locale specified format. time format based on age
+ * compared to the time pax was started.
+ */
+ if ((sbp->st_mtime + SIXMONTHS) <= now)
+ timefrmt = OLDFRMT;
+ else
+ timefrmt = CURFRMT;
+ } else
+ timefrmt = ltmfrmt;
+
+ /*
+ * print file mode, link count, uid, gid and time
+ */
+ if (strftime(f_date,DATELEN,timefrmt,localtime(&(sbp->st_mtime))) == 0)
+ f_date[0] = '\0';
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%s%2u %-*s %-*s ", f_mode, sbp->st_nlink,
+ UT_NAMESIZE, name_uid(sbp->st_uid, 1), UT_GRPSIZE,
+ name_gid(sbp->st_gid, 1));
+
+ /*
+ * print device id's for devices, or sizes for other nodes
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CHR) || (arcn->type == PAX_BLK))
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%4u,%4u ", MAJOR(sbp->st_rdev),
+# else
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%4lu,%4lu ", (unsigned long)MAJOR(sbp->st_rdev),
+# endif
+ (unsigned long)MINOR(sbp->st_rdev));
+ else {
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%9lu ", sbp->st_size);
+# else
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%9qu ", sbp->st_size);
+# endif
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * print name and link info for hard and soft links
+ */
+ (void)fprintf(fp, "%s %s", f_date, arcn->name);
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_HLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ (void)fprintf(fp, " == %s\n", arcn->ln_name);
+ else if (arcn->type == PAX_SLK)
+ (void)fprintf(fp, " => %s\n", arcn->ln_name);
+ else
+ (void)putc('\n', fp);
+ (void)fflush(fp);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * tty_ls()
+ * print a short summary of file to tty.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+ls_tty(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+void
+ls_tty(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ char f_date[DATELEN];
+ char f_mode[MODELEN];
+ char *timefrmt;
+
+ if (ltmfrmt == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * no locale specified format
+ */
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_mtime + SIXMONTHS) <= time(NULL))
+ timefrmt = OLDFRMT;
+ else
+ timefrmt = CURFRMT;
+ } else
+ timefrmt = ltmfrmt;
+
+ /*
+ * convert time to string, and print
+ */
+ if (strftime(f_date, DATELEN, timefrmt,
+ localtime(&(arcn->sb.st_mtime))) == 0)
+ f_date[0] = '\0';
+ strmode(arcn->sb.st_mode, f_mode);
+ tty_prnt("%s%s %s\n", f_mode, f_date, arcn->name);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * l_strncpy()
+ * copy src to dest up to len chars (stopping at first '\0').
+ * when src is shorter than len, pads to len with '\0'.
+ * Return:
+ * number of chars copied. (Note this is a real performance win over
+ * doing a strncpy(), a strlen(), and then a possible memset())
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+l_strncpy(register char *dest, register char *src, int len)
+#else
+int
+l_strncpy(dest, src, len)
+ register char *dest;
+ register char *src;
+ int len;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *stop;
+ register char *start;
+
+ stop = dest + len;
+ start = dest;
+ while ((dest < stop) && (*src != '\0'))
+ *dest++ = *src++;
+ len = dest - start;
+ while (dest < stop)
+ *dest++ = '\0';
+ return(len);
+}
+
+/*
+ * asc_ul()
+ * convert hex/octal character string into a u_long. We do not have to
+ * check for overflow! (the headers in all supported formats are not large
+ * enough to create an overflow).
+ * NOTE: strings passed to us are NOT TERMINATED.
+ * Return:
+ * unsigned long value
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+u_long
+asc_ul(register char *str, int len, register int base)
+#else
+u_long
+asc_ul(str, len, base)
+ register char *str;
+ int len;
+ register int base;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *stop;
+ u_long tval = 0;
+
+ stop = str + len;
+
+ /*
+ * skip over leading blanks and zeros
+ */
+ while ((str < stop) && ((*str == ' ') || (*str == '0')))
+ ++str;
+
+ /*
+ * for each valid digit, shift running value (tval) over to next digit
+ * and add next digit
+ */
+ if (base == HEX) {
+ while (str < stop) {
+ if ((*str >= '0') && (*str <= '9'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + (*str++ - '0');
+ else if ((*str >= 'A') && (*str <= 'F'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + 10 + (*str++ - 'A');
+ else if ((*str >= 'a') && (*str <= 'f'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + 10 + (*str++ - 'a');
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+ } else {
+ while ((str < stop) && (*str >= '0') && (*str <= '7'))
+ tval = (tval << 3) + (*str++ - '0');
+ }
+ return(tval);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ul_asc()
+ * convert an unsigned long into an hex/oct ascii string. pads with LEADING
+ * ascii 0's to fill string completely
+ * NOTE: the string created is NOT TERMINATED.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ul_asc(u_long val, register char *str, register int len, register int base)
+#else
+int
+ul_asc(val, str, len, base)
+ u_long val;
+ register char *str;
+ register int len;
+ register int base;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+ u_long digit;
+
+ /*
+ * WARNING str is not '\0' terminated by this routine
+ */
+ pt = str + len - 1;
+
+ /*
+ * do a tailwise conversion (start at right most end of string to place
+ * least significant digit). Keep shifting until conversion value goes
+ * to zero (all digits were converted)
+ */
+ if (base == HEX) {
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ if ((digit = (val & 0xf)) < 10)
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)digit;
+ else
+ *pt-- = 'a' + (char)(digit - 10);
+ if ((val = (val >> 4)) == (u_long)0)
+ break;
+ }
+ } else {
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)(val & 0x7);
+ if ((val = (val >> 3)) == (u_long)0)
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * pad with leading ascii ZEROS. We return -1 if we ran out of space.
+ */
+ while (pt >= str)
+ *pt-- = '0';
+ if (val != (u_long)0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+#ifndef NET2_STAT
+/*
+ * asc_uqd()
+ * convert hex/octal character string into a u_quad_t. We do not have to
+ * check for overflow! (the headers in all supported formats are not large
+ * enough to create an overflow).
+ * NOTE: strings passed to us are NOT TERMINATED.
+ * Return:
+ * u_quad_t value
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+u_quad_t
+asc_uqd(register char *str, int len, register int base)
+#else
+u_quad_t
+asc_uqd(str, len, base)
+ register char *str;
+ int len;
+ register int base;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *stop;
+ u_quad_t tval = 0;
+
+ stop = str + len;
+
+ /*
+ * skip over leading blanks and zeros
+ */
+ while ((str < stop) && ((*str == ' ') || (*str == '0')))
+ ++str;
+
+ /*
+ * for each valid digit, shift running value (tval) over to next digit
+ * and add next digit
+ */
+ if (base == HEX) {
+ while (str < stop) {
+ if ((*str >= '0') && (*str <= '9'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + (*str++ - '0');
+ else if ((*str >= 'A') && (*str <= 'F'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + 10 + (*str++ - 'A');
+ else if ((*str >= 'a') && (*str <= 'f'))
+ tval = (tval << 4) + 10 + (*str++ - 'a');
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+ } else {
+ while ((str < stop) && (*str >= '0') && (*str <= '7'))
+ tval = (tval << 3) + (*str++ - '0');
+ }
+ return(tval);
+}
+
+/*
+ * uqd_asc()
+ * convert an u_quad_t into a hex/oct ascii string. pads with LEADING
+ * ascii 0's to fill string completely
+ * NOTE: the string created is NOT TERMINATED.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+uqd_asc(u_quad_t val, register char *str, register int len, register int base)
+#else
+int
+uqd_asc(val, str, len, base)
+ u_quad_t val;
+ register char *str;
+ register int len;
+ register int base;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+ u_quad_t digit;
+
+ /*
+ * WARNING str is not '\0' terminated by this routine
+ */
+ pt = str + len - 1;
+
+ /*
+ * do a tailwise conversion (start at right most end of string to place
+ * least significant digit). Keep shifting until conversion value goes
+ * to zero (all digits were converted)
+ */
+ if (base == HEX) {
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ if ((digit = (val & 0xf)) < 10)
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)digit;
+ else
+ *pt-- = 'a' + (char)(digit - 10);
+ if ((val = (val >> 4)) == (u_quad_t)0)
+ break;
+ }
+ } else {
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)(val & 0x7);
+ if ((val = (val >> 3)) == (u_quad_t)0)
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * pad with leading ascii ZEROS. We return -1 if we ran out of space.
+ */
+ while (pt >= str)
+ *pt-- = '0';
+ if (val != (u_quad_t)0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+#endif
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: getoldopt.c,v 1.3 1997/09/01 18:29:52 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: getoldopt.c,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:28 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*
+ * Plug-compatible replacement for getopt() for parsing tar-like
+ * arguments. If the first argument begins with "-", it uses getopt;
+ * otherwise, it uses the old rules used by tar, dump, and ps.
+ *
+ * Written 25 August 1985 by John Gilmore (ihnp4!hoptoad!gnu) and placed
+ * in the Pubic Domain for your edification and enjoyment.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: getoldopt.c,v 1.3 1997/09/01 18:29:52 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+int
+getoldopt(argc, argv, optstring)
+ int argc;
+ char **argv;
+ char *optstring;
+{
+ extern char *optarg; /* Points to next arg */
+ extern int optind; /* Global argv index */
+ static char *key; /* Points to next keyletter */
+ static char use_getopt; /* !=0 if argv[1][0] was '-' */
+ char c;
+ char *place;
+
+ optarg = NULL;
+
+ if (key == NULL) { /* First time */
+ if (argc < 2) return EOF;
+ key = argv[1];
+ if (*key == '-')
+ use_getopt++;
+ else
+ optind = 2;
+ }
+
+ if (use_getopt)
+ return getopt(argc, argv, optstring);
+
+ c = *key++;
+ if (c == '\0') {
+ key--;
+ return EOF;
+ }
+ place = strchr(optstring, c);
+
+ if (place == NULL || c == ':') {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown option %c\n", argv[0], c);
+ return('?');
+ }
+
+ place++;
+ if (*place == ':') {
+ if (optind < argc) {
+ optarg = argv[optind];
+ optind++;
+ } else {
+ fprintf(stderr, "%s: %c argument missing\n",
+ argv[0], c);
+ return('?');
+ }
+ }
+
+ return(c);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: options.c,v 1.34 1998/09/20 02:22:22 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: options.c,v 1.6 1996/03/26 23:54:18 mrg Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)options.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: options.c,v 1.34 1998/09/20 02:22:22 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/mtio.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <paths.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "options.h"
+#include "cpio.h"
+#include "tar.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * Routines which handle command line options
+ */
+
+static char flgch[] = FLGCH; /* list of all possible flags */
+static OPLIST *ophead = NULL; /* head for format specific options -x */
+static OPLIST *optail = NULL; /* option tail */
+
+static int no_op __P((void));
+static void printflg __P((unsigned int));
+static int c_frmt __P((const void *, const void *));
+static off_t str_offt __P((char *));
+static void pax_options __P((register int, register char **));
+static void pax_usage __P((void));
+static void tar_options __P((register int, register char **));
+static void tar_usage __P((void));
+static void cpio_options __P((register int, register char **));
+static void cpio_usage __P((void));
+
+#define GZIP_CMD "gzip" /* command to run as gzip */
+#define COMPRESS_CMD "compress" /* command to run as compress */
+
+/*
+ * Format specific routine table - MUST BE IN SORTED ORDER BY NAME
+ * (see pax.h for description of each function)
+ *
+ * name, blksz, hdsz, udev, hlk, blkagn, inhead, id, st_read,
+ * read, end_read, st_write, write, end_write, trail,
+ * rd_data, wr_data, options
+ */
+
+FSUB fsub[] = {
+/* 0: OLD BINARY CPIO */
+ {"bcpio", 5120, sizeof(HD_BCPIO), 1, 0, 0, 1, bcpio_id, cpio_strd,
+ bcpio_rd, bcpio_endrd, cpio_stwr, bcpio_wr, cpio_endwr, cpio_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, bad_opt},
+
+/* 1: OLD OCTAL CHARACTER CPIO */
+ {"cpio", 5120, sizeof(HD_CPIO), 1, 0, 0, 1, cpio_id, cpio_strd,
+ cpio_rd, cpio_endrd, cpio_stwr, cpio_wr, cpio_endwr, cpio_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, bad_opt},
+
+/* 2: SVR4 HEX CPIO */
+ {"sv4cpio", 5120, sizeof(HD_VCPIO), 1, 0, 0, 1, vcpio_id, cpio_strd,
+ vcpio_rd, vcpio_endrd, cpio_stwr, vcpio_wr, cpio_endwr, cpio_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, bad_opt},
+
+/* 3: SVR4 HEX CPIO WITH CRC */
+ {"sv4crc", 5120, sizeof(HD_VCPIO), 1, 0, 0, 1, crc_id, crc_strd,
+ vcpio_rd, vcpio_endrd, crc_stwr, vcpio_wr, cpio_endwr, cpio_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, bad_opt},
+
+/* 4: OLD TAR */
+ {"tar", 10240, BLKMULT, 0, 1, BLKMULT, 0, tar_id, no_op,
+ tar_rd, tar_endrd, no_op, tar_wr, tar_endwr, tar_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, tar_opt},
+
+/* 5: POSIX USTAR */
+ {"ustar", 10240, BLKMULT, 0, 1, BLKMULT, 0, ustar_id, ustar_strd,
+ ustar_rd, tar_endrd, ustar_stwr, ustar_wr, tar_endwr, tar_trail,
+ rd_wrfile, wr_rdfile, bad_opt},
+};
+#define F_OCPIO 0 /* format when called as cpio -6 */
+#define F_ACPIO 1 /* format when called as cpio -c */
+#define F_CPIO 3 /* format when called as cpio */
+#define F_OTAR 4 /* format when called as tar -o */
+#define F_TAR 5 /* format when called as tar */
+#define DEFLT 5 /* default write format from list above */
+
+/*
+ * ford is the archive search order used by get_arc() to determine what kind
+ * of archive we are dealing with. This helps to properly id archive formats
+ * some formats may be subsets of others....
+ */
+int ford[] = {5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0, -1 };
+
+/*
+ * options()
+ * figure out if we are pax, tar or cpio. Call the appropriate options
+ * parser
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+options(register int argc, register char **argv)
+#else
+void
+options(argc, argv)
+ register int argc;
+ register char **argv;
+#endif
+{
+
+ /*
+ * Are we acting like pax, tar or cpio (based on argv[0])
+ */
+ if ((argv0 = strrchr(argv[0], '/')) != NULL)
+ argv0++;
+ else
+ argv0 = argv[0];
+
+ if (strcmp(NM_TAR, argv0) == 0)
+ return(tar_options(argc, argv));
+ else if (strcmp(NM_CPIO, argv0) == 0)
+ return(cpio_options(argc, argv));
+ /*
+ * assume pax as the default
+ */
+ argv0 = NM_PAX;
+ return(pax_options(argc, argv));
+}
+
+/*
+ * pax_options()
+ * look at the user specified flags. set globals as required and check if
+ * the user specified a legal set of flags. If not, complain and exit
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static void
+pax_options(register int argc, register char **argv)
+#else
+static void
+pax_options(argc, argv)
+ register int argc;
+ register char **argv;
+#endif
+{
+ register int c;
+ register int i;
+ unsigned int flg = 0;
+ unsigned int bflg = 0;
+ register char *pt;
+ FSUB tmp;
+ extern char *optarg;
+ extern int optind;
+
+ /*
+ * process option flags
+ */
+ while ((c=getopt(argc,argv,"ab:cdf:iklno:p:rs:tuvwx:zB:DE:G:HLPT:U:XYZ"))
+ != EOF) {
+ switch (c) {
+ case 'a':
+ /*
+ * append
+ */
+ flg |= AF;
+ break;
+ case 'b':
+ /*
+ * specify blocksize
+ */
+ flg |= BF;
+ if ((wrblksz = (int)str_offt(optarg)) <= 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid block size %s", optarg);
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'c':
+ /*
+ * inverse match on patterns
+ */
+ cflag = 1;
+ flg |= CF;
+ break;
+ case 'd':
+ /*
+ * match only dir on extract, not the subtree at dir
+ */
+ dflag = 1;
+ flg |= DF;
+ break;
+ case 'f':
+ /*
+ * filename where the archive is stored
+ */
+ arcname = optarg;
+ flg |= FF;
+ break;
+ case 'i':
+ /*
+ * interactive file rename
+ */
+ iflag = 1;
+ flg |= IF;
+ break;
+ case 'k':
+ /*
+ * do not clobber files that exist
+ */
+ kflag = 1;
+ flg |= KF;
+ break;
+ case 'l':
+ /*
+ * try to link src to dest with copy (-rw)
+ */
+ lflag = 1;
+ flg |= LF;
+ break;
+ case 'n':
+ /*
+ * select first match for a pattern only
+ */
+ nflag = 1;
+ flg |= NF;
+ break;
+ case 'o':
+ /*
+ * pass format specific options
+ */
+ flg |= OF;
+ if (opt_add(optarg) < 0)
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ case 'p':
+ /*
+ * specify file characteristic options
+ */
+ for (pt = optarg; *pt != '\0'; ++pt) {
+ switch(*pt) {
+ case 'a':
+ /*
+ * do not preserve access time
+ */
+ patime = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'e':
+ /*
+ * preserve user id, group id, file
+ * mode, access/modification times
+ */
+ pids = 1;
+ pmode = 1;
+ patime = 1;
+ pmtime = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'm':
+ /*
+ * do not preserve modification time
+ */
+ pmtime = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'o':
+ /*
+ * preserve uid/gid
+ */
+ pids = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'p':
+ /*
+ * preserver file mode bits
+ */
+ pmode = 1;
+ break;
+ default:
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid -p string: %c", *pt);
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ flg |= PF;
+ break;
+ case 'r':
+ /*
+ * read the archive
+ */
+ flg |= RF;
+ break;
+ case 's':
+ /*
+ * file name substitution name pattern
+ */
+ if (rep_add(optarg) < 0) {
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ flg |= SF;
+ break;
+ case 't':
+ /*
+ * preserve access time on filesystem nodes we read
+ */
+ tflag = 1;
+ flg |= TF;
+ break;
+ case 'u':
+ /*
+ * ignore those older files
+ */
+ uflag = 1;
+ flg |= UF;
+ break;
+ case 'v':
+ /*
+ * verbose operation mode
+ */
+ vflag = 1;
+ flg |= VF;
+ break;
+ case 'w':
+ /*
+ * write an archive
+ */
+ flg |= WF;
+ break;
+ case 'x':
+ /*
+ * specify an archive format on write
+ */
+ tmp.name = optarg;
+ if ((frmt = (FSUB *)bsearch((void *)&tmp, (void *)fsub,
+ sizeof(fsub)/sizeof(FSUB), sizeof(FSUB), c_frmt)) != NULL) {
+ flg |= XF;
+ break;
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "Unknown -x format: %s", optarg);
+ (void)fputs("pax: Known -x formats are:", stderr);
+ for (i = 0; i < (sizeof(fsub)/sizeof(FSUB)); ++i)
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, " %s", fsub[i].name);
+ (void)fputs("\n\n", stderr);
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ case 'z':
+ /*
+ * use gzip. Non standard option.
+ */
+ zflag = 1;
+ gzip_program = GZIP_CMD;
+ break;
+ case 'B':
+ /*
+ * non-standard option on number of bytes written on a
+ * single archive volume.
+ */
+ if ((wrlimit = str_offt(optarg)) <= 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid write limit %s", optarg);
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+ if (wrlimit % BLKMULT) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Write limit is not a %d byte multiple",
+ BLKMULT);
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+ flg |= CBF;
+ break;
+ case 'D':
+ /*
+ * On extraction check file inode change time before the
+ * modification of the file name. Non standard option.
+ */
+ Dflag = 1;
+ flg |= CDF;
+ break;
+ case 'E':
+ /*
+ * non-standard limit on read faults
+ * 0 indicates stop after first error, values
+ * indicate a limit, "NONE" try forever
+ */
+ flg |= CEF;
+ if (strcmp(NONE, optarg) == 0)
+ maxflt = -1;
+ else if ((maxflt = atoi(optarg)) < 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Error count value must be positive");
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+ break;
+ case 'G':
+ /*
+ * non-standard option for selecting files within an
+ * archive by group (gid or name)
+ */
+ if (grp_add(optarg) < 0) {
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ flg |= CGF;
+ break;
+ case 'H':
+ /*
+ * follow command line symlinks only
+ */
+ Hflag = 1;
+ flg |= CHF;
+ break;
+ case 'L':
+ /*
+ * follow symlinks
+ */
+ Lflag = 1;
+ flg |= CLF;
+ break;
+ case 'P':
+ /*
+ * do NOT follow symlinks (default)
+ */
+ Lflag = 0;
+ flg |= CPF;
+ break;
+ case 'T':
+ /*
+ * non-standard option for selecting files within an
+ * archive by modification time range (lower,upper)
+ */
+ if (trng_add(optarg) < 0) {
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ flg |= CTF;
+ break;
+ case 'U':
+ /*
+ * non-standard option for selecting files within an
+ * archive by user (uid or name)
+ */
+ if (usr_add(optarg) < 0) {
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ flg |= CUF;
+ break;
+ case 'X':
+ /*
+ * do not pass over mount points in the file system
+ */
+ Xflag = 1;
+ flg |= CXF;
+ break;
+ case 'Y':
+ /*
+ * On extraction check file inode change time after the
+ * modification of the file name. Non standard option.
+ */
+ Yflag = 1;
+ flg |= CYF;
+ break;
+ case 'Z':
+ /*
+ * On extraction check modification time after the
+ * modification of the file name. Non standard option.
+ */
+ Zflag = 1;
+ flg |= CZF;
+ break;
+ default:
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * figure out the operation mode of pax read,write,extract,copy,append
+ * or list. check that we have not been given a bogus set of flags
+ * for the operation mode.
+ */
+ if (ISLIST(flg)) {
+ act = LIST;
+ listf = stdout;
+ bflg = flg & BDLIST;
+ } else if (ISEXTRACT(flg)) {
+ act = EXTRACT;
+ bflg = flg & BDEXTR;
+ } else if (ISARCHIVE(flg)) {
+ act = ARCHIVE;
+ bflg = flg & BDARCH;
+ } else if (ISAPPND(flg)) {
+ act = APPND;
+ bflg = flg & BDARCH;
+ } else if (ISCOPY(flg)) {
+ act = COPY;
+ bflg = flg & BDCOPY;
+ } else
+ pax_usage();
+ if (bflg) {
+ printflg(flg);
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if we are writing (ARCHIVE) we use the default format if the user
+ * did not specify a format. when we write during an APPEND, we will
+ * adopt the format of the existing archive if none was supplied.
+ */
+ if (!(flg & XF) && (act == ARCHIVE))
+ frmt = &(fsub[DEFLT]);
+
+ /*
+ * process the args as they are interpreted by the operation mode
+ */
+ switch (act) {
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ for (; optind < argc; optind++)
+ if (pat_add(argv[optind], NULL) < 0)
+ pax_usage();
+ break;
+ case COPY:
+ if (optind >= argc) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Destination directory was not supplied");
+ pax_usage();
+ }
+ --argc;
+ dirptr = argv[argc];
+ /* FALL THROUGH */
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ case APPND:
+ for (; optind < argc; optind++)
+ if (ftree_add(argv[optind], 0) < 0)
+ pax_usage();
+ /*
+ * no read errors allowed on updates/append operation!
+ */
+ maxflt = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * tar_options()
+ * look at the user specified flags. set globals as required and check if
+ * the user specified a legal set of flags. If not, complain and exit
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static void
+tar_options(register int argc, register char **argv)
+#else
+static void
+tar_options(argc, argv)
+ register int argc;
+ register char **argv;
+#endif
+{
+ register int c;
+ int fstdin = 0;
+ int Oflag = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * Set default values.
+ */
+ rmleadslash = 1;
+
+ /*
+ * process option flags
+ */
+ while ((c = getoldopt(argc, argv,
+ "b:cef:hmopruts:vwxzBC:HLOPXZ014578"))
+ != EOF) {
+ switch(c) {
+ case 'b':
+ /*
+ * specify blocksize in 512-byte blocks
+ */
+ if ((wrblksz = (int)str_offt(optarg)) <= 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid block size %s", optarg);
+ tar_usage();
+ }
+ wrblksz *= 512; /* XXX - check for int oflow */
+ break;
+ case 'c':
+ /*
+ * create an archive
+ */
+ act = ARCHIVE;
+ break;
+ case 'e':
+ /*
+ * stop after first error
+ */
+ maxflt = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'f':
+ /*
+ * filename where the archive is stored
+ */
+ if ((optarg[0] == '-') && (optarg[1]== '\0')) {
+ /*
+ * treat a - as stdin
+ */
+ fstdin = 1;
+ arcname = NULL;
+ break;
+ }
+ fstdin = 0;
+ arcname = optarg;
+ break;
+ case 'h':
+ /*
+ * follow symlinks
+ */
+ Lflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'm':
+ /*
+ * do not preserve modification time
+ */
+ pmtime = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'o':
+ if (opt_add("write_opt=nodir") < 0)
+ tar_usage();
+ case 'O':
+ Oflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'p':
+ /*
+ * preserve uid/gid and file mode, regardless of umask
+ */
+ pmode = 1;
+ pids = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'r':
+ case 'u':
+ /*
+ * append to the archive
+ */
+ act = APPND;
+ break;
+ case 's':
+ /*
+ * file name substitution name pattern
+ */
+ if (rep_add(optarg) < 0) {
+ tar_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+ case 't':
+ /*
+ * list contents of the tape
+ */
+ act = LIST;
+ break;
+ case 'v':
+ /*
+ * verbose operation mode
+ */
+ vflag++;
+ break;
+ case 'w':
+ /*
+ * interactive file rename
+ */
+ iflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'x':
+ /*
+ * extract an archive, preserving mode,
+ * and mtime if possible.
+ */
+ act = EXTRACT;
+ pmtime = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'z':
+ /*
+ * use gzip. Non standard option.
+ */
+ zflag = 1;
+ gzip_program = GZIP_CMD;
+ break;
+ case 'B':
+ /*
+ * Nothing to do here, this is pax default
+ */
+ break;
+ case 'C':
+ chdname = optarg;
+ break;
+ case 'H':
+ /*
+ * follow command line symlinks only
+ */
+ Hflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'L':
+ /*
+ * follow symlinks
+ */
+ Lflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'P':
+ /*
+ * do not remove leading '/' from pathnames
+ */
+ rmleadslash = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'X':
+ /*
+ * do not pass over mount points in the file system
+ */
+ Xflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'Z':
+ /*
+ * use compress.
+ */
+ zflag = 1;
+ gzip_program = COMPRESS_CMD;
+ break;
+ case '0':
+ arcname = DEV_0;
+ break;
+ case '1':
+ arcname = DEV_1;
+ break;
+ case '4':
+ arcname = DEV_4;
+ break;
+ case '5':
+ arcname = DEV_5;
+ break;
+ case '7':
+ arcname = DEV_7;
+ break;
+ case '8':
+ arcname = DEV_8;
+ break;
+ default:
+ tar_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ argc -= optind;
+ argv += optind;
+
+ /* Traditional tar behaviour (pax uses stderr unless in list mode) */
+ if (fstdin == 1 && act == ARCHIVE)
+ listf = stderr;
+ else
+ listf = stdout;
+
+ /* Traditional tar behaviour (pax wants to read filelist from stdin) */
+ if ((act == ARCHIVE || act == APPND) && argc == 0)
+ exit(0);
+
+ /*
+ * if we are writing (ARCHIVE) specify tar, otherwise run like pax
+ * (unless -o specified)
+ */
+ if (act == ARCHIVE || act == APPND)
+ frmt = &(fsub[Oflag ? F_OTAR : F_TAR]);
+ else if (Oflag) {
+ paxwarn(1, "The -O/-o options are only valid when writing an archive");
+ tar_usage(); /* only valid when writing */
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * process the args as they are interpreted by the operation mode
+ */
+ switch (act) {
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ default:
+ {
+ int sawpat = 0;
+
+ while (*argv != NULL) {
+ if (strcmp(*argv, "-C") == 0) {
+ if(*++argv == NULL)
+ break;
+ chdname = *argv++;
+
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (pat_add(*argv++, chdname) < 0)
+ tar_usage();
+ sawpat++;
+ }
+ /*
+ * if patterns were added, we are doing chdir()
+ * on a file-by-file basis, else, just one
+ * global chdir (if any) after opening input.
+ */
+ if (sawpat > 0)
+ chdname = NULL;
+ }
+ break;
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ case APPND:
+ if (chdname != NULL) { /* initial chdir() */
+ if (ftree_add(chdname, 1) < 0)
+ tar_usage();
+ }
+
+ while (*argv != NULL) {
+ if (!strcmp(*argv, "-C")) {
+ if (*++argv == NULL)
+ break;
+ if (ftree_add(*argv++, 1) < 0)
+ tar_usage();
+ } else {
+ if (ftree_add(*argv++, 0) < 0)
+ tar_usage();
+ }
+ }
+ /*
+ * no read errors allowed on updates/append operation!
+ */
+ maxflt = 0;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (!fstdin && ((arcname == NULL) || (*arcname == '\0'))) {
+ arcname = getenv("TAPE");
+ if ((arcname == NULL) || (*arcname == '\0'))
+ arcname = _PATH_DEFTAPE;
+ }
+}
+
+int
+mkpath(path)
+ char *path;
+{
+ struct stat sb;
+ register char *slash;
+ int done = 0;
+
+ slash = path;
+
+ while (!done) {
+ slash += strspn(slash, "/");
+ slash += strcspn(slash, "/");
+
+ done = (*slash == '\0');
+ *slash = '\0';
+
+ if (stat(path, &sb)) {
+ if (errno != ENOENT || mkdir(path, 0777)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "%s", path);
+ return (-1);
+ }
+ } else if (!S_ISDIR(sb.st_mode)) {
+ syswarn(1, ENOTDIR, "%s", path);
+ return (-1);
+ }
+
+ if (!done)
+ *slash = '/';
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+}
+/*
+ * cpio_options()
+ * look at the user specified flags. set globals as required and check if
+ * the user specified a legal set of flags. If not, complain and exit
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static void
+cpio_options(register int argc, register char **argv)
+#else
+static void
+cpio_options(argc, argv)
+ register int argc;
+ register char **argv;
+#endif
+{
+ register int c, i;
+ size_t len;
+ char *str;
+ FSUB tmp;
+ FILE *fp;
+
+ kflag = 1;
+ pids = 1;
+ pmode = 1;
+ pmtime = 0;
+ arcname = NULL;
+ dflag = 1;
+ act = -1;
+ nodirs = 1;
+ while ((c=getopt(argc,argv,"abcdfiklmoprstuvzABC:E:F:H:I:LO:SZ6")) != EOF)
+ switch (c) {
+ case 'a':
+ /*
+ * preserve access time on files read
+ */
+ tflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'b':
+ /*
+ * swap bytes and half-words when reading data
+ */
+ break;
+ case 'c':
+ /*
+ * ASCII cpio header
+ */
+ frmt = &(fsub[F_ACPIO]);
+ break;
+ case 'd':
+ /*
+ * create directories as needed
+ */
+ nodirs = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'f':
+ /*
+ * invert meaning of pattern list
+ */
+ cflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'i':
+ /*
+ * restore an archive
+ */
+ act = EXTRACT;
+ break;
+ case 'k':
+ break;
+ case 'l':
+ /*
+ * use links instead of copies when possible
+ */
+ lflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'm':
+ /*
+ * preserve modification time
+ */
+ pmtime = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'o':
+ /*
+ * create an archive
+ */
+ act = ARCHIVE;
+ frmt = &(fsub[F_CPIO]);
+ break;
+ case 'p':
+ /*
+ * copy-pass mode
+ */
+ act = COPY;
+ break;
+ case 'r':
+ /*
+ * interactively rename files
+ */
+ iflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 's':
+ /*
+ * swap bytes after reading data
+ */
+ break;
+ case 't':
+ /*
+ * list contents of archive
+ */
+ act = LIST;
+ listf = stdout;
+ break;
+ case 'u':
+ /*
+ * replace newer files
+ */
+ kflag = 0;
+ break;
+ case 'v':
+ /*
+ * verbose operation mode
+ */
+ vflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'z':
+ /*
+ * use gzip. Non standard option.
+ */
+ zflag = 1;
+ gzip_program = GZIP_CMD;
+ break;
+ case 'A':
+ /*
+ * append mode
+ */
+ act = APPND;
+ break;
+ case 'B':
+ /*
+ * Use 5120 byte block size
+ */
+ wrblksz = 5120;
+ break;
+ case 'C':
+ /*
+ * set block size in bytes
+ */
+ wrblksz = atoi(optarg);
+ break;
+ case 'E':
+ /*
+ * file with patterns to extract or list
+ */
+ if ((fp = fopen(optarg, "r")) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to open file '%s' for read", optarg);
+ cpio_usage();
+ }
+ while ((str = fgetln(fp, &len)) != NULL) {
+ str[len - 1] = '\0';
+ pat_add(str, NULL);
+ }
+ fclose(fp);
+ break;
+ case 'F':
+ case 'I':
+ case 'O':
+ /*
+ * filename where the archive is stored
+ */
+ if ((optarg[0] == '-') && (optarg[1]== '\0')) {
+ /*
+ * treat a - as stdin
+ */
+ arcname = NULL;
+ break;
+ }
+ arcname = optarg;
+ break;
+ case 'H':
+ /*
+ * specify an archive format on write
+ */
+ tmp.name = optarg;
+ if ((frmt = (FSUB *)bsearch((void *)&tmp, (void *)fsub,
+ sizeof(fsub)/sizeof(FSUB), sizeof(FSUB), c_frmt)) != NULL)
+ break;
+ paxwarn(1, "Unknown -H format: %s", optarg);
+ (void)fputs("cpio: Known -H formats are:", stderr);
+ for (i = 0; i < (sizeof(fsub)/sizeof(FSUB)); ++i)
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, " %s", fsub[i].name);
+ (void)fputs("\n\n", stderr);
+ cpio_usage();
+ break;
+ case 'L':
+ /*
+ * follow symbolic links
+ */
+ Lflag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'S':
+ /*
+ * swap halfwords after reading data
+ */
+ break;
+ case 'Z':
+ /*
+ * use compress. Non standard option.
+ */
+ zflag = 1;
+ gzip_program = COMPRESS_CMD;
+ break;
+ case '6':
+ /*
+ * process Version 6 cpio format
+ */
+ frmt = &(fsub[F_OCPIO]);
+ break;
+ case '?':
+ default:
+ cpio_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+ argc -= optind;
+ argv += optind;
+
+ /*
+ * process the args as they are interpreted by the operation mode
+ */
+ switch (act) {
+ case LIST:
+ case EXTRACT:
+ while (*argv != NULL)
+ if (pat_add(*argv++, NULL) < 0)
+ cpio_usage();
+ break;
+ case COPY:
+ if (*argv == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Destination directory was not supplied");
+ cpio_usage();
+ }
+ dirptr = *argv;
+ if (mkpath(dirptr) < 0)
+ cpio_usage();
+ --argc;
+ ++argv;
+ /* FALL THROUGH */
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ case APPND:
+ if (*argv != NULL)
+ cpio_usage();
+ /*
+ * no read errors allowed on updates/append operation!
+ */
+ maxflt = 0;
+ while ((str = fgetln(stdin, &len)) != NULL) {
+ str[len - 1] = '\0';
+ ftree_add(strdup(str), NULL);
+ }
+ break;
+ default:
+ cpio_usage();
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/*
+ * printflg()
+ * print out those invalid flag sets found to the user
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static void
+printflg(unsigned int flg)
+#else
+static void
+printflg(flg)
+ unsigned int flg;
+#endif
+{
+ int nxt;
+ int pos = 0;
+
+ (void)fprintf(stderr,"%s: Invalid combination of options:", argv0);
+ while ((nxt = ffs(flg)) != 0) {
+ flg = flg >> nxt;
+ pos += nxt;
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, " -%c", flgch[pos-1]);
+ }
+ (void)putc('\n', stderr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * c_frmt()
+ * comparison routine used by bsearch to find the format specified
+ * by the user
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+c_frmt(const void *a, const void *b)
+#else
+static int
+c_frmt(a, b)
+ void *a;
+ void *b;
+#endif
+{
+ return(strcmp(((FSUB *)a)->name, ((FSUB *)b)->name));
+}
+
+/*
+ * opt_next()
+ * called by format specific options routines to get each format specific
+ * flag and value specified with -o
+ * Return:
+ * pointer to next OPLIST entry or NULL (end of list).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+OPLIST *
+opt_next(void)
+#else
+OPLIST *
+opt_next()
+#endif
+{
+ OPLIST *opt;
+
+ if ((opt = ophead) != NULL)
+ ophead = ophead->fow;
+ return(opt);
+}
+
+/*
+ * bad_opt()
+ * generic routine used to complain about a format specific options
+ * when the format does not support options.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+bad_opt(void)
+#else
+int
+bad_opt()
+#endif
+{
+ register OPLIST *opt;
+
+ if (ophead == NULL)
+ return(0);
+ /*
+ * print all we were given
+ */
+ paxwarn(1,"These format options are not supported");
+ while ((opt = opt_next()) != NULL)
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, "\t%s = %s\n", opt->name, opt->value);
+ pax_usage();
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * opt_add()
+ * breaks the value supplied to -o into a option name and value. options
+ * are given to -o in the form -o name-value,name=value
+ * mulltiple -o may be specified.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if format in name=value format, -1 if -o is passed junk
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+opt_add(register char *str)
+#else
+int
+opt_add(str)
+ register char *str;
+#endif
+{
+ register OPLIST *opt;
+ register char *frpt;
+ register char *pt;
+ register char *endpt;
+
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Invalid option name");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if ((str = strdup(str)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Unable to allocate space for option list");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ frpt = endpt = str;
+
+ /*
+ * break into name and values pieces and stuff each one into a
+ * OPLIST structure. When we know the format, the format specific
+ * option function will go through this list
+ */
+ while ((frpt != NULL) && (*frpt != '\0')) {
+ if ((endpt = strchr(frpt, ',')) != NULL)
+ *endpt = '\0';
+ if ((pt = strchr(frpt, '=')) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Invalid options format");
+ free(str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if ((opt = (OPLIST *)malloc(sizeof(OPLIST))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(0, "Unable to allocate space for option list");
+ free(str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ *pt++ = '\0';
+ opt->name = frpt;
+ opt->value = pt;
+ opt->fow = NULL;
+ if (endpt != NULL)
+ frpt = endpt + 1;
+ else
+ frpt = NULL;
+ if (ophead == NULL) {
+ optail = ophead = opt;
+ continue;
+ }
+ optail->fow = opt;
+ optail = opt;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * str_offt()
+ * Convert an expression of the following forms to an off_t > 0.
+ * 1) A positive decimal number.
+ * 2) A positive decimal number followed by a b (mult by 512).
+ * 3) A positive decimal number followed by a k (mult by 1024).
+ * 4) A positive decimal number followed by a m (mult by 512).
+ * 5) A positive decimal number followed by a w (mult by sizeof int)
+ * 6) Two or more positive decimal numbers (with/without k,b or w).
+ * seperated by x (also * for backwards compatibility), specifying
+ * the product of the indicated values.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 for an error, a positive value o.w.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static off_t
+str_offt(char *val)
+#else
+static off_t
+str_offt(val)
+ char *val;
+#endif
+{
+ char *expr;
+ off_t num, t;
+
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ num = strtol(val, &expr, 0);
+ if ((num == LONG_MAX) || (num <= 0) || (expr == val))
+# else
+ num = strtoq(val, &expr, 0);
+ if ((num == QUAD_MAX) || (num <= 0) || (expr == val))
+# endif
+ return(0);
+
+ switch(*expr) {
+ case 'b':
+ t = num;
+ num *= 512;
+ if (t > num)
+ return(0);
+ ++expr;
+ break;
+ case 'k':
+ t = num;
+ num *= 1024;
+ if (t > num)
+ return(0);
+ ++expr;
+ break;
+ case 'm':
+ t = num;
+ num *= 1048576;
+ if (t > num)
+ return(0);
+ ++expr;
+ break;
+ case 'w':
+ t = num;
+ num *= sizeof(int);
+ if (t > num)
+ return(0);
+ ++expr;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ switch(*expr) {
+ case '\0':
+ break;
+ case '*':
+ case 'x':
+ t = num;
+ num *= str_offt(expr + 1);
+ if (t > num)
+ return(0);
+ break;
+ default:
+ return(0);
+ }
+ return(num);
+}
+
+/*
+ * no_op()
+ * for those option functions where the archive format has nothing to do.
+ * Return:
+ * 0
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+no_op(void)
+#else
+static int
+no_op()
+#endif
+{
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * pax_usage()
+ * print the usage summary to the user
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+pax_usage(void)
+#else
+void
+pax_usage()
+#endif
+{
+ (void)fputs("usage: pax [-cdnv] [-E limit] [-f archive] ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-s replstr] ... [-U user] ...", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("\n [-G group] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-T [from_date][,to_date]] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[pattern ...]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" pax -r [-cdiknuvDYZ] [-E limit] ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-f archive] [-o options] ... \n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" [-p string] ... [-s replstr] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-U user] ... [-G group] ...\n ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-T [from_date][,to_date]] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" [pattern ...]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" pax -w [-dituvHLPX] [-b blocksize] ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[ [-a] [-f archive] ] [-x format] \n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" [-B bytes] [-s replstr] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-o options] ... [-U user] ...", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("\n [-G group] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-T [from_date][,to_date][/[c][m]]] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[file ...]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" pax -r -w [-diklntuvDHLPXYZ] ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-p string] ... [-s replstr] ...", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("\n [-U user] ... [-G group] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[-T [from_date][,to_date][/[c][m]]] ... ", stderr);
+ (void)fputs("\n [file ...] directory\n", stderr);
+ exit(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tar_usage()
+ * print the usage summary to the user
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+tar_usage(void)
+#else
+void
+tar_usage()
+#endif
+{
+ (void)fputs("usage: tar -{txru}[cevfbmopswzBHLPXZ014578] [tapefile] ",
+ stderr);
+ (void)fputs("[blocksize] [replstr] [-C directory] file1 file2...\n",
+ stderr);
+ exit(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * cpio_usage()
+ * print the usage summary to the user
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+cpio_usage(void)
+#else
+void
+cpio_usage()
+#endif
+{
+ (void)fputs("usage: cpio -o [-aABcLvVzZ] [-C bytes] [-H format] [-O archive]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" [-F archive] < name-list [> archive]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" cpio -i [-bBcdfmnrsStuvVzZ6] [-C bytes] [-E file] [-H format]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" [-I archive] [-F archive] [pattern...] [< archive]\n", stderr);
+ (void)fputs(" cpio -p [-adlLmuvV] destination-directory < name-list\n", stderr);
+ exit(1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: options.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:37 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: options.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:32 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)options.h 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+ */
+
+/*
+ * argv[0] names. Used for tar and cpio emulation
+ */
+
+#define NM_TAR "tar"
+#define NM_CPIO "cpio"
+#define NM_PAX "pax"
+
+/*
+ * Constants used to specify the legal sets of flags in pax. For each major
+ * operation mode of pax, a set of illegal flags is defined. If any one of
+ * those illegal flags are found set, we scream and exit
+ */
+#define NONE "none"
+
+/*
+ * flags (one for each option).
+ */
+#define AF 0x00000001
+#define BF 0x00000002
+#define CF 0x00000004
+#define DF 0x00000008
+#define FF 0x00000010
+#define IF 0x00000020
+#define KF 0x00000040
+#define LF 0x00000080
+#define NF 0x00000100
+#define OF 0x00000200
+#define PF 0x00000400
+#define RF 0x00000800
+#define SF 0x00001000
+#define TF 0x00002000
+#define UF 0x00004000
+#define VF 0x00008000
+#define WF 0x00010000
+#define XF 0x00020000
+#define CBF 0x00040000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CDF 0x00080000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CEF 0x00100000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CGF 0x00200000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CHF 0x00400000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CLF 0x00800000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CPF 0x01000000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CTF 0x02000000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CUF 0x04000000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CXF 0x08000000
+#define CYF 0x10000000 /* nonstandard extension */
+#define CZF 0x20000000 /* nonstandard extension */
+
+/*
+ * ascii string indexed by bit position above (alter the above and you must
+ * alter this string) used to tell the user what flags caused us to complain
+ */
+#define FLGCH "abcdfiklnoprstuvwxBDEGHLPTUXYZ"
+
+/*
+ * legal pax operation bit patterns
+ */
+
+#define ISLIST(x) (((x) & (RF|WF)) == 0)
+#define ISEXTRACT(x) (((x) & (RF|WF)) == RF)
+#define ISARCHIVE(x) (((x) & (AF|RF|WF)) == WF)
+#define ISAPPND(x) (((x) & (AF|RF|WF)) == (AF|WF))
+#define ISCOPY(x) (((x) & (RF|WF)) == (RF|WF))
+#define ISWRITE(x) (((x) & (RF|WF)) == WF)
+
+/*
+ * Illegal option flag subsets based on pax operation
+ */
+
+#define BDEXTR (AF|BF|LF|TF|WF|XF|CBF|CHF|CLF|CPF|CXF)
+#define BDARCH (CF|KF|LF|NF|PF|RF|CDF|CEF|CYF|CZF)
+#define BDCOPY (AF|BF|FF|OF|XF|CBF|CEF)
+#define BDLIST (AF|BF|IF|KF|LF|OF|PF|RF|TF|UF|WF|XF|CBF|CDF|CHF|CLF|CPF|CXF|CYF|CZF)
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: pat_rep.c,v 1.11 1997/09/01 18:29:56 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: pat_rep.c,v 1.4 1995/03/21 09:07:33 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)pat_rep.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: pat_rep.c,v 1.11 1997/09/01 18:29:56 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#ifdef NET2_REGEX
+#include <regexp.h>
+#else
+#include <regex.h>
+#endif
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "pat_rep.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * routines to handle pattern matching, name modification (regular expression
+ * substitution and interactive renames), and destination name modification for
+ * copy (-rw). Both file name and link names are adjusted as required in these
+ * routines.
+ */
+
+#define MAXSUBEXP 10 /* max subexpressions, DO NOT CHANGE */
+static PATTERN *pathead = NULL; /* file pattern match list head */
+static PATTERN *pattail = NULL; /* file pattern match list tail */
+static REPLACE *rephead = NULL; /* replacement string list head */
+static REPLACE *reptail = NULL; /* replacement string list tail */
+
+static int rep_name __P((char *, int *, int));
+static int tty_rename __P((register ARCHD *));
+static int fix_path __P((char *, int *, char *, int));
+static int fn_match __P((register char *, register char *, char **));
+static char * range_match __P((register char *, register int));
+#ifdef NET2_REGEX
+static int resub __P((regexp *, char *, char *, register char *));
+#else
+static int resub __P((regex_t *, regmatch_t *, char *, char *, char *));
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * rep_add()
+ * parses the -s replacement string; compiles the regular expression
+ * and stores the compiled value and it's replacement string together in
+ * replacement string list. Input to this function is of the form:
+ * /old/new/pg
+ * The first char in the string specifies the delimiter used by this
+ * replacement string. "Old" is a regular expression in "ed" format which
+ * is compiled by regcomp() and is applied to filenames. "new" is the
+ * substitution string; p and g are options flags for printing and global
+ * replacement (over the single filename)
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a proper replacement string and regular expression was added to
+ * the list of replacement patterns; -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+rep_add(register char *str)
+#else
+int
+rep_add(str)
+ register char *str;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt1;
+ register char *pt2;
+ register REPLACE *rep;
+# ifndef NET2_REGEX
+ register int res;
+ char rebuf[BUFSIZ];
+# endif
+
+ /*
+ * throw out the bad parameters
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Empty replacement string");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * first character in the string specifies what the delimiter is for
+ * this expression
+ */
+ if ((pt1 = strchr(str+1, *str)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid replacement string %s", str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * allocate space for the node that handles this replacement pattern
+ * and split out the regular expression and try to compile it
+ */
+ if ((rep = (REPLACE *)malloc(sizeof(REPLACE))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for replacement string");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ *pt1 = '\0';
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ if ((rep->rcmp = regcomp(str+1)) == NULL) {
+# else
+ if ((res = regcomp(&(rep->rcmp), str+1, 0)) != 0) {
+ regerror(res, &(rep->rcmp), rebuf, sizeof(rebuf));
+ paxwarn(1, "%s while compiling regular expression %s", rebuf, str);
+# endif
+ (void)free((char *)rep);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * put the delimiter back in case we need an error message and
+ * locate the delimiter at the end of the replacement string
+ * we then point the node at the new substitution string
+ */
+ *pt1++ = *str;
+ if ((pt2 = strchr(pt1, *str)) == NULL) {
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ (void)free((char *)rep->rcmp);
+# else
+ regfree(&(rep->rcmp));
+# endif
+ (void)free((char *)rep);
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid replacement string %s", str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ *pt2 = '\0';
+ rep->nstr = pt1;
+ pt1 = pt2++;
+ rep->flgs = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * set the options if any
+ */
+ while (*pt2 != '\0') {
+ switch(*pt2) {
+ case 'g':
+ case 'G':
+ rep->flgs |= GLOB;
+ break;
+ case 'p':
+ case 'P':
+ rep->flgs |= PRNT;
+ break;
+ default:
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ (void)free((char *)rep->rcmp);
+# else
+ regfree(&(rep->rcmp));
+# endif
+ (void)free((char *)rep);
+ *pt1 = *str;
+ paxwarn(1, "Invalid replacement string option %s", str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ ++pt2;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * all done, link it in at the end
+ */
+ rep->fow = NULL;
+ if (rephead == NULL) {
+ reptail = rephead = rep;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ reptail->fow = rep;
+ reptail = rep;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * pat_add()
+ * add a pattern match to the pattern match list. Pattern matches are used
+ * to select which archive members are extracted. (They appear as
+ * arguments to pax in the list and read modes). If no patterns are
+ * supplied to pax, all members in the archive will be selected (and the
+ * pattern match list is empty).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the pattern was added to the list, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+pat_add(char *str, char *chdname)
+#else
+int
+pat_add(str, chdname)
+ char *str;
+ char *chdname;
+#endif
+{
+ register PATTERN *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * throw out the junk
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Empty pattern string");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * allocate space for the pattern and store the pattern. the pattern is
+ * part of argv so do not bother to copy it, just point at it. Add the
+ * node to the end of the pattern list
+ */
+ if ((pt = (PATTERN *)malloc(sizeof(PATTERN))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for pattern string");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ pt->pstr = str;
+ pt->pend = NULL;
+ pt->plen = strlen(str);
+ pt->fow = NULL;
+ pt->flgs = 0;
+ pt->chdname = chdname;
+
+ if (pathead == NULL) {
+ pattail = pathead = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ pattail->fow = pt;
+ pattail = pt;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * pat_chk()
+ * complain if any the user supplied pattern did not result in a match to
+ * a selected archive member.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+pat_chk(void)
+#else
+void
+pat_chk()
+#endif
+{
+ register PATTERN *pt;
+ register int wban = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * walk down the list checking the flags to make sure MTCH was set,
+ * if not complain
+ */
+ for (pt = pathead; pt != NULL; pt = pt->fow) {
+ if (pt->flgs & MTCH)
+ continue;
+ if (!wban) {
+ paxwarn(1, "WARNING! These patterns were not matched:");
+ ++wban;
+ }
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", pt->pstr);
+ }
+}
+
+/*
+ * pat_sel()
+ * the archive member which matches a pattern was selected. Mark the
+ * pattern as having selected an archive member. arcn->pat points at the
+ * pattern that was matched. arcn->pat is set in pat_match()
+ *
+ * NOTE: When the -c option is used, we are called when there was no match
+ * by pat_match() (that means we did match before the inverted sense of
+ * the logic). Now this seems really strange at first, but with -c we
+ * need to keep track of those patterns that cause a archive member to NOT
+ * be selected (it found an archive member with a specified pattern)
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the pattern pointed at by arcn->pat was tagged as creating a
+ * match, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+pat_sel(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+pat_sel(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register PATTERN *pt;
+ register PATTERN **ppt;
+ register int len;
+
+ /*
+ * if no patterns just return
+ */
+ if ((pathead == NULL) || ((pt = arcn->pat) == NULL))
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * when we are NOT limited to a single match per pattern mark the
+ * pattern and return
+ */
+ if (!nflag) {
+ pt->flgs |= MTCH;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we reach this point only when we allow a single selected match per
+ * pattern, if the pattern matches a directory and we do not have -d
+ * (dflag) we are done with this pattern. We may also be handed a file
+ * in the subtree of a directory. in that case when we are operating
+ * with -d, this pattern was already selected and we are done
+ */
+ if (pt->flgs & DIR_MTCH)
+ return(0);
+
+ if (!dflag && ((pt->pend != NULL) || (arcn->type == PAX_DIR))) {
+ /*
+ * ok we matched a directory and we are allowing
+ * subtree matches but because of the -n only its children will
+ * match. This is tagged as a DIR_MTCH type.
+ * WATCH IT, the code assumes that pt->pend points
+ * into arcn->name and arcn->name has not been modified.
+ * If not we will have a big mess. Yup this is another kludge
+ */
+
+ /*
+ * if this was a prefix match, remove trailing part of path
+ * so we can copy it. Future matches will be exact prefix match
+ */
+ if (pt->pend != NULL)
+ *pt->pend = '\0';
+
+ if ((pt->pstr = strdup(arcn->name)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Pattern select out of memory");
+ if (pt->pend != NULL)
+ *pt->pend = '/';
+ pt->pend = NULL;
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * put the trailing / back in the source string
+ */
+ if (pt->pend != NULL) {
+ *pt->pend = '/';
+ pt->pend = NULL;
+ }
+ pt->plen = strlen(pt->pstr);
+
+ /*
+ * strip off any trailing /, this should really never happen
+ */
+ len = pt->plen - 1;
+ if (*(pt->pstr + len) == '/') {
+ *(pt->pstr + len) = '\0';
+ pt->plen = len;
+ }
+ pt->flgs = DIR_MTCH | MTCH;
+ arcn->pat = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we are then done with this pattern, so we delete it from the list
+ * because it can never be used for another match.
+ * Seems kind of strange to do for a -c, but the pax spec is really
+ * vague on the interaction of -c -n and -d. We assume that when -c
+ * and the pattern rejects a member (i.e. it matched it) it is done.
+ * In effect we place the order of the flags as having -c last.
+ */
+ pt = pathead;
+ ppt = &pathead;
+ while ((pt != NULL) && (pt != arcn->pat)) {
+ ppt = &(pt->fow);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ if (pt == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * should never happen....
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Pattern list inconsistant");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ *ppt = pt->fow;
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * pat_match()
+ * see if this archive member matches any supplied pattern, if a match
+ * is found, arcn->pat is set to point at the potential pattern. Later if
+ * this archive member is "selected" we process and mark the pattern as
+ * one which matched a selected archive member (see pat_sel())
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be
+ * skipped and -1 if we are done with all patterns (and pax should quit
+ * looking for more members)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+pat_match(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+pat_match(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register PATTERN *pt;
+
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+
+ /*
+ * if there are no more patterns and we have -n (and not -c) we are
+ * done. otherwise with no patterns to match, matches all
+ */
+ if (pathead == NULL) {
+ if (nflag && !cflag)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * have to search down the list one at a time looking for a match.
+ */
+ pt = pathead;
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * check for a file name match unless we have DIR_MTCH set in
+ * this pattern then we want a prefix match
+ */
+ if (pt->flgs & DIR_MTCH) {
+ /*
+ * this pattern was matched before to a directory
+ * as we must have -n set for this (but not -d). We can
+ * only match CHILDREN of that directory so we must use
+ * an exact prefix match (no wildcards).
+ */
+ if ((arcn->name[pt->plen] == '/') &&
+ (strncmp(pt->pstr, arcn->name, pt->plen) == 0))
+ break;
+ } else if (fn_match(pt->pstr, arcn->name, &pt->pend) == 0)
+ break;
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * return the result, remember that cflag (-c) inverts the sense of a
+ * match
+ */
+ if (pt == NULL)
+ return(cflag ? 0 : 1);
+
+ /*
+ * we had a match, now when we invert the sense (-c) we reject this
+ * member. However we have to tag the pattern a being successful, (in a
+ * match, not in selecting a archive member) so we call pat_sel() here.
+ */
+ arcn->pat = pt;
+ if (!cflag)
+ return(0);
+
+ if (pat_sel(arcn) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * fn_match()
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be
+ * skipped and -1 if we are done with all patterns (and pax should quit
+ * looking for more members)
+ * Note: *pend may be changed to show where the prefix ends.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+fn_match(register char *pattern, register char *string, char **pend)
+#else
+static int
+fn_match(pattern, string, pend)
+ register char *pattern;
+ register char *string;
+ char **pend;
+#endif
+{
+ register char c;
+ char test;
+
+ *pend = NULL;
+ for (;;) {
+ switch (c = *pattern++) {
+ case '\0':
+ /*
+ * Ok we found an exact match
+ */
+ if (*string == '\0')
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * Check if it is a prefix match
+ */
+ if ((dflag == 1) || (*string != '/'))
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * It is a prefix match, remember where the trailing
+ * / is located
+ */
+ *pend = string;
+ return(0);
+ case '?':
+ if ((test = *string++) == '\0')
+ return (-1);
+ break;
+ case '*':
+ c = *pattern;
+ /*
+ * Collapse multiple *'s.
+ */
+ while (c == '*')
+ c = *++pattern;
+
+ /*
+ * Optimized hack for pattern with a * at the end
+ */
+ if (c == '\0')
+ return (0);
+
+ /*
+ * General case, use recursion.
+ */
+ while ((test = *string) != '\0') {
+ if (!fn_match(pattern, string, pend))
+ return (0);
+ ++string;
+ }
+ return (-1);
+ case '[':
+ /*
+ * range match
+ */
+ if (((test = *string++) == '\0') ||
+ ((pattern = range_match(pattern, test)) == NULL))
+ return (-1);
+ break;
+ case '\\':
+ default:
+ if (c != *string++)
+ return (-1);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ /* NOTREACHED */
+}
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static char *
+range_match(register char *pattern, register int test)
+#else
+static char *
+range_match(pattern, test)
+ register char *pattern;
+ register int test;
+#endif
+{
+ register char c;
+ register char c2;
+ int negate;
+ int ok = 0;
+
+ if ((negate = (*pattern == '!')) != 0)
+ ++pattern;
+
+ while ((c = *pattern++) != ']') {
+ /*
+ * Illegal pattern
+ */
+ if (c == '\0')
+ return (NULL);
+
+ if ((*pattern == '-') && ((c2 = pattern[1]) != '\0') &&
+ (c2 != ']')) {
+ if ((c <= test) && (test <= c2))
+ ok = 1;
+ pattern += 2;
+ } else if (c == test)
+ ok = 1;
+ }
+ return (ok == negate ? NULL : pattern);
+}
+
+/*
+ * mod_name()
+ * modify a selected file name. first attempt to apply replacement string
+ * expressions, then apply interactive file rename. We apply replacement
+ * string expressions to both filenames and file links (if we didn't the
+ * links would point to the wrong place, and we could never be able to
+ * move an archive that has a file link in it). When we rename files
+ * interactively, we store that mapping (old name to user input name) so
+ * if we spot any file links to the old file name in the future, we will
+ * know exactly how to fix the file link.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 continue to process file, 1 skip this file, -1 pax is finished
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+mod_name(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+mod_name(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register int res = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * Strip off leading '/' if appropriate.
+ * Currently, this option is only set for the tar format.
+ */
+ if (rmleadslash && arcn->name[0] == '/') {
+ if (arcn->name[1] == '\0') {
+ arcn->name[0] = '.';
+ } else {
+ (void)memmove(arcn->name, &arcn->name[1],
+ strlen(arcn->name));
+ arcn->nlen--;
+ }
+ if (rmleadslash < 2) {
+ rmleadslash = 2;
+ paxwarn(0, "Removing leading / from absolute path names in the archive");
+ }
+ }
+ if (rmleadslash && arcn->ln_name[0] == '/' &&
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HLK || arcn->type == PAX_HRG)) {
+ if (arcn->ln_name[1] == '\0') {
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '.';
+ } else {
+ (void)memmove(arcn->ln_name, &arcn->ln_name[1],
+ strlen(arcn->ln_name));
+ arcn->ln_nlen--;
+ }
+ if (rmleadslash < 2) {
+ rmleadslash = 2;
+ paxwarn(0, "Removing leading / from absolute path names in the archive");
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * IMPORTANT: We have a problem. what do we do with symlinks?
+ * Modifying a hard link name makes sense, as we know the file it
+ * points at should have been seen already in the archive (and if it
+ * wasn't seen because of a read error or a bad archive, we lose
+ * anyway). But there are no such requirements for symlinks. On one
+ * hand the symlink that refers to a file in the archive will have to
+ * be modified to so it will still work at its new location in the
+ * file system. On the other hand a symlink that points elsewhere (and
+ * should continue to do so) should not be modified. There is clearly
+ * no perfect solution here. So we handle them like hardlinks. Clearly
+ * a replacement made by the interactive rename mapping is very likely
+ * to be correct since it applies to a single file and is an exact
+ * match. The regular expression replacements are a little harder to
+ * justify though. We claim that the symlink name is only likely
+ * to be replaced when it points within the file tree being moved and
+ * in that case it should be modified. what we really need to do is to
+ * call an oracle here. :)
+ */
+ if (rephead != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * we have replacement strings, modify the name and the link
+ * name if any.
+ */
+ if ((res = rep_name(arcn->name, &(arcn->nlen), 1)) != 0)
+ return(res);
+
+ if (((arcn->type == PAX_SLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HLK) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG)) &&
+ ((res = rep_name(arcn->ln_name, &(arcn->ln_nlen), 0)) != 0))
+ return(res);
+ }
+
+ if (iflag) {
+ /*
+ * perform interactive file rename, then map the link if any
+ */
+ if ((res = tty_rename(arcn)) != 0)
+ return(res);
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_SLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HLK) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ sub_name(arcn->ln_name, &(arcn->ln_nlen), sizeof(arcn->ln_name));
+ }
+ return(res);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tty_rename()
+ * Prompt the user for a replacement file name. A "." keeps the old name,
+ * a empty line skips the file, and an EOF on reading the tty, will cause
+ * pax to stop processing and exit. Otherwise the file name input, replaces
+ * the old one.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 process this file, 1 skip this file, -1 we need to exit pax
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+tty_rename(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+tty_rename(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ char tmpname[PAXPATHLEN+2];
+ int res;
+
+ /*
+ * prompt user for the replacement name for a file, keep trying until
+ * we get some reasonable input. Archives may have more than one file
+ * on them with the same name (from updates etc). We print verbose info
+ * on the file so the user knows what is up.
+ */
+ tty_prnt("\nATTENTION: %s interactive file rename operation.\n", argv0);
+
+ for (;;) {
+ ls_tty(arcn);
+ tty_prnt("Input new name, or a \".\" to keep the old name, ");
+ tty_prnt("or a \"return\" to skip this file.\n");
+ tty_prnt("Input > ");
+ if (tty_read(tmpname, sizeof(tmpname)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (strcmp(tmpname, "..") == 0) {
+ tty_prnt("Try again, illegal file name: ..\n");
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (strlen(tmpname) > PAXPATHLEN) {
+ tty_prnt("Try again, file name too long\n");
+ continue;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * empty file name, skips this file. a "." leaves it alone
+ */
+ if (tmpname[0] == '\0') {
+ tty_prnt("Skipping file.\n");
+ return(1);
+ }
+ if ((tmpname[0] == '.') && (tmpname[1] == '\0')) {
+ tty_prnt("Processing continues, name unchanged.\n");
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * ok the name changed. We may run into links that point at this
+ * file later. we have to remember where the user sent the file
+ * in order to repair any links.
+ */
+ tty_prnt("Processing continues, name changed to: %s\n", tmpname);
+ res = add_name(arcn->name, arcn->nlen, tmpname);
+ arcn->nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->name, tmpname, sizeof(arcn->name) - 1);
+ arcn->name[arcn->nlen] = '\0';
+ if (res < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * set_dest()
+ * fix up the file name and the link name (if any) so this file will land
+ * in the destination directory (used during copy() -rw).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 if failure (name too long)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+set_dest(register ARCHD *arcn, char *dest_dir, int dir_len)
+#else
+int
+set_dest(arcn, dest_dir, dir_len)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ char *dest_dir;
+ int dir_len;
+#endif
+{
+ if (fix_path(arcn->name, &(arcn->nlen), dest_dir, dir_len) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * It is really hard to deal with symlinks here, we cannot be sure
+ * if the name they point was moved (or will be moved). It is best to
+ * leave them alone.
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type != PAX_HLK) && (arcn->type != PAX_HRG))
+ return(0);
+
+ if (fix_path(arcn->ln_name, &(arcn->ln_nlen), dest_dir, dir_len) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * fix_path
+ * concatenate dir_name and or_name and store the result in or_name (if
+ * it fits). This is one ugly function.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 if the final name is too long
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+fix_path( char *or_name, int *or_len, char *dir_name, int dir_len)
+#else
+static int
+fix_path(or_name, or_len, dir_name, dir_len)
+ char *or_name;
+ int *or_len;
+ char *dir_name;
+ int dir_len;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *src;
+ register char *dest;
+ register char *start;
+ int len;
+
+ /*
+ * we shift the or_name to the right enough to tack in the dir_name
+ * at the front. We make sure we have enough space for it all before
+ * we start. since dest always ends in a slash, we skip of or_name
+ * if it also starts with one.
+ */
+ start = or_name;
+ src = start + *or_len;
+ dest = src + dir_len;
+ if (*start == '/') {
+ ++start;
+ --dest;
+ }
+ if ((len = dest - or_name) > PAXPATHLEN) {
+ paxwarn(1, "File name %s/%s, too long", dir_name, start);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ *or_len = len;
+
+ /*
+ * enough space, shift
+ */
+ while (src >= start)
+ *dest-- = *src--;
+ src = dir_name + dir_len - 1;
+
+ /*
+ * splice in the destination directory name
+ */
+ while (src >= dir_name)
+ *dest-- = *src--;
+
+ *(or_name + len) = '\0';
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * rep_name()
+ * walk down the list of replacement strings applying each one in order.
+ * when we find one with a successful substitution, we modify the name
+ * as specified. if required, we print the results. if the resulting name
+ * is empty, we will skip this archive member. We use the regexp(3)
+ * routines (regexp() ought to win a prize as having the most cryptic
+ * library function manual page).
+ * --Parameters--
+ * name is the file name we are going to apply the regular expressions to
+ * (and may be modified)
+ * nlen is the length of this name (and is modified to hold the length of
+ * the final string).
+ * prnt is a flag that says whether to print the final result.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if substitution was successful, 1 if we are to skip the file (the name
+ * ended up empty)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+rep_name(char *name, int *nlen, int prnt)
+#else
+static int
+rep_name(name, nlen, prnt)
+ char *name;
+ int *nlen;
+ int prnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register REPLACE *pt;
+ register char *inpt;
+ register char *outpt;
+ register char *endpt;
+ register char *rpt;
+ register int found = 0;
+ register int res;
+# ifndef NET2_REGEX
+ regmatch_t pm[MAXSUBEXP];
+# endif
+ char nname[PAXPATHLEN+1]; /* final result of all replacements */
+ char buf1[PAXPATHLEN+1]; /* where we work on the name */
+
+ /*
+ * copy the name into buf1, where we will work on it. We need to keep
+ * the orig string around so we can print out the result of the final
+ * replacement. We build up the final result in nname. inpt points at
+ * the string we apply the regular expression to. prnt is used to
+ * suppress printing when we handle replacements on the link field
+ * (the user already saw that substitution go by)
+ */
+ pt = rephead;
+ (void)strcpy(buf1, name);
+ inpt = buf1;
+ outpt = nname;
+ endpt = outpt + PAXPATHLEN;
+
+ /*
+ * try each replacement string in order
+ */
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ do {
+ /*
+ * check for a successful substitution, if not go to
+ * the next pattern, or cleanup if we were global
+ */
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ if (regexec(pt->rcmp, inpt) == 0)
+# else
+ if (regexec(&(pt->rcmp), inpt, MAXSUBEXP, pm, 0) != 0)
+# endif
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * ok we found one. We have three parts, the prefix
+ * which did not match, the section that did and the
+ * tail (that also did not match). Copy the prefix to
+ * the final output buffer (watching to make sure we
+ * do not create a string too long).
+ */
+ found = 1;
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ rpt = pt->rcmp->startp[0];
+# else
+ rpt = inpt + pm[0].rm_so;
+# endif
+
+ while ((inpt < rpt) && (outpt < endpt))
+ *outpt++ = *inpt++;
+ if (outpt == endpt)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * for the second part (which matched the regular
+ * expression) apply the substitution using the
+ * replacement string and place it the prefix in the
+ * final output. If we have problems, skip it.
+ */
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ if ((res = resub(pt->rcmp,pt->nstr,outpt,endpt)) < 0) {
+# else
+ if ((res = resub(&(pt->rcmp),pm,pt->nstr,outpt,endpt))
+ < 0) {
+# endif
+ if (prnt)
+ paxwarn(1, "Replacement name error %s",
+ name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ outpt += res;
+
+ /*
+ * we set up to look again starting at the first
+ * character in the tail (of the input string right
+ * after the last character matched by the regular
+ * expression (inpt always points at the first char in
+ * the string to process). If we are not doing a global
+ * substitution, we will use inpt to copy the tail to
+ * the final result. Make sure we do not overrun the
+ * output buffer
+ */
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ inpt = pt->rcmp->endp[0];
+# else
+ inpt += pm[0].rm_eo - pm[0].rm_so;
+# endif
+
+ if ((outpt == endpt) || (*inpt == '\0'))
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * if the user wants global we keep trying to
+ * substitute until it fails, then we are done.
+ */
+ } while (pt->flgs & GLOB);
+
+ if (found)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * a successful substitution did NOT occur, try the next one
+ */
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ if (found) {
+ /*
+ * we had a substitution, copy the last tail piece (if there is
+ * room) to the final result
+ */
+ while ((outpt < endpt) && (*inpt != '\0'))
+ *outpt++ = *inpt++;
+
+ *outpt = '\0';
+ if ((outpt == endpt) && (*inpt != '\0')) {
+ if (prnt)
+ paxwarn(1,"Replacement name too long %s >> %s",
+ name, nname);
+ return(1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * inform the user of the result if wanted
+ */
+ if (prnt && (pt->flgs & PRNT)) {
+ if (*nname == '\0')
+ (void)fprintf(stderr,"%s >> <empty string>\n",
+ name);
+ else
+ (void)fprintf(stderr,"%s >> %s\n", name, nname);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if empty inform the caller this file is to be skipped
+ * otherwise copy the new name over the orig name and return
+ */
+ if (*nname == '\0')
+ return(1);
+ *nlen = l_strncpy(name, nname, PAXPATHLEN + 1);
+ name[PAXPATHLEN] = '\0';
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+#ifdef NET2_REGEX
+/*
+ * resub()
+ * apply the replacement to the matched expression. expand out the old
+ * style ed(1) subexpression expansion.
+ * Return:
+ * -1 if error, or the number of characters added to the destination.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+resub(regexp *prog, char *src, char *dest, register char *destend)
+#else
+static int
+resub(prog, src, dest, destend)
+ regexp *prog;
+ char *src;
+ char *dest;
+ register char *destend;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *spt;
+ register char *dpt;
+ register char c;
+ register int no;
+ register int len;
+
+ spt = src;
+ dpt = dest;
+ while ((dpt < destend) && ((c = *spt++) != '\0')) {
+ if (c == '&')
+ no = 0;
+ else if ((c == '\\') && (*spt >= '0') && (*spt <= '9'))
+ no = *spt++ - '0';
+ else {
+ if ((c == '\\') && ((*spt == '\\') || (*spt == '&')))
+ c = *spt++;
+ *dpt++ = c;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if ((prog->startp[no] == NULL) || (prog->endp[no] == NULL) ||
+ ((len = prog->endp[no] - prog->startp[no]) <= 0))
+ continue;
+
+ /*
+ * copy the subexpression to the destination.
+ * fail if we run out of space or the match string is damaged
+ */
+ if (len > (destend - dpt))
+ len = destend - dpt;
+ if (l_strncpy(dpt, prog->startp[no], len) != len)
+ return(-1);
+ dpt += len;
+ }
+ return(dpt - dest);
+}
+
+#else
+
+/*
+ * resub()
+ * apply the replacement to the matched expression. expand out the old
+ * style ed(1) subexpression expansion.
+ * Return:
+ * -1 if error, or the number of characters added to the destination.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+resub(regex_t *rp, register regmatch_t *pm, char *src, char *dest,
+ register char *destend)
+#else
+static int
+resub(rp, pm, src, dest, destend)
+ regex_t *rp;
+ register regmatch_t *pm;
+ char *src;
+ char *dest;
+ register char *destend;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *spt;
+ register char *dpt;
+ register char c;
+ register regmatch_t *pmpt;
+ register int len;
+ int subexcnt;
+
+ spt = src;
+ dpt = dest;
+ subexcnt = rp->re_nsub;
+ while ((dpt < destend) && ((c = *spt++) != '\0')) {
+ /*
+ * see if we just have an ordinary replacement character
+ * or we refer to a subexpression.
+ */
+ if (c == '&') {
+ pmpt = pm;
+ } else if ((c == '\\') && (*spt >= '0') && (*spt <= '9')) {
+ /*
+ * make sure there is a subexpression as specified
+ */
+ if ((len = *spt++ - '0') > subexcnt)
+ return(-1);
+ pmpt = pm + len;
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * Ordinary character, just copy it
+ */
+ if ((c == '\\') && ((*spt == '\\') || (*spt == '&')))
+ c = *spt++;
+ *dpt++ = c;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * continue if the subexpression is bogus
+ */
+ if ((pmpt->rm_so < 0) || (pmpt->rm_eo < 0) ||
+ ((len = pmpt->rm_eo - pmpt->rm_so) <= 0))
+ continue;
+
+ /*
+ * copy the subexpression to the destination.
+ * fail if we run out of space or the match string is damaged
+ */
+ if (len > (destend - dpt))
+ len = destend - dpt;
+ if (l_strncpy(dpt, src + pmpt->rm_so, len) != len)
+ return(-1);
+ dpt += len;
+ }
+ return(dpt - dest);
+}
+#endif
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: pat_rep.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:38 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: pat_rep.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:35 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)pat_rep.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * data structure for storing user supplied replacement strings (-s)
+ */
+typedef struct replace {
+ char *nstr; /* the new string we will substitute with */
+# ifdef NET2_REGEX
+ regexp *rcmp; /* compiled regular expression used to match */
+# else
+ regex_t rcmp; /* compiled regular expression used to match */
+# endif
+ int flgs; /* print conversions? global in operation? */
+#define PRNT 0x1
+#define GLOB 0x2
+ struct replace *fow; /* pointer to next pattern */
+} REPLACE;
--- /dev/null
+.\" $OpenBSD: pax.1,v 1.7 1998/09/23 00:13:49 aaron Exp $
+.\" $NetBSD: pax.1,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:37 cgd Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\" without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" @(#)pax.1 8.4 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+.\"
+.Dd April 18, 1994
+.Dt PAX 1
+.Os BSD 4.4
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm pax
+.Nd read and write file archives and copy directory hierarchies
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm pax
+.Op Fl cdnv
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl f Ar archive
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl s Ar replstr
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl U Ar user
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl G Ar group
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Oo
+.Fl T
+.Op Ar from_date
+.Op Ar ,to_date
+.Oc
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Op Ar pattern ...
+.Nm pax
+.Fl r
+.Op Fl cdiknuvDYZ
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl f Ar archive
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl o Ar options
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl p Ar string
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl s Ar replstr
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Op Fl E Ar limit
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl U Ar user
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl G Ar group
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Oo
+.Fl T
+.Op Ar from_date
+.Op Ar ,to_date
+.Oc
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Op Ar pattern ...
+.Nm pax
+.Fl w
+.Op Fl dituvHLPX
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl b Ar blocksize
+.Ek
+.Oo
+.Op Fl a
+.Op Fl f Ar archive
+.Oc
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl x Ar format
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl s Ar replstr
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl o Ar options
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl U Ar user
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl G Ar group
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl B Ar bytes
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Oo
+.Fl T
+.Op Ar from_date
+.Op Ar ,to_date
+.Op Ar /[c][m]
+.Oc
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Op Ar file ...
+.Nm pax
+.Fl r
+.Fl w
+.Op Fl diklntuvDHLPXYZ
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl p Ar string
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl s Ar replstr
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl U Ar user
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl G Ar group
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Bk -words
+.Oo
+.Fl T
+.Op Ar from_date
+.Op Ar ,to_date
+.Op Ar /[c][m]
+.Oc
+.Ar ...
+.Ek
+.Op Ar file ...
+.Ar directory
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm pax
+will read, write, and list the members of an archive file,
+and will copy directory hierarchies.
+.Nm pax
+operation is independent of the specific archive format,
+and supports a wide variety of different archive formats.
+A list of supported archive formats can be found under the description of the
+.Fl x
+option.
+.Pp
+The presence of the
+.Fl r
+and the
+.Fl w
+options specifies which of the following functional modes
+.Nm pax
+will operate under:
+.Em list , read , write ,
+and
+.Em copy .
+.Bl -tag -width 6n
+.It <none>
+.Em List .
+.Nm pax
+will write to
+.Dv standard output
+a table of contents of the members of the archive file read from
+.Dv standard input ,
+whose pathnames match the specified
+.Ar patterns .
+The table of contents contains one filename per line
+and is written using single line buffering.
+.It Fl r
+.Em Read .
+.Nm pax
+extracts the members of the archive file read from the
+.Dv standard input ,
+with pathnames matching the specified
+.Ar patterns .
+The archive format and blocking is automatically determined on input.
+When an extracted file is a directory, the entire file hierarchy
+rooted at that directory is extracted.
+All extracted files are created relative to the current file hierarchy.
+The setting of ownership, access and modification times, and file mode of
+the extracted files are discussed in more detail under the
+.Fl p
+option.
+.It Fl w
+.Em Write .
+.Nm pax
+writes an archive containing the
+.Ar file
+operands to
+.Dv standard output
+using the specified archive format.
+When no
+.Ar file
+operands are specified, a list of files to copy with one per line is read from
+.Dv standard input .
+When a
+.Ar file
+operand is also a directory, the entire file hierarchy rooted
+at that directory will be included.
+.It Fl r Fl w
+.Em Copy .
+.Nm pax
+copies the
+.Ar file
+operands to the destination
+.Ar directory .
+When no
+.Ar file
+operands are specified, a list of files to copy with one per line is read from
+the
+.Dv standard input .
+When a
+.Ar file
+operand is also a directory the entire file
+hierarchy rooted at that directory will be included.
+The effect of the
+.Em copy
+is as if the copied files were written to an archive file and then
+subsequently extracted, except that there may be hard links between
+the original and the copied files (see the
+.Fl l
+option below).
+.Pp
+.Em Warning :
+The destination
+.Ar directory
+must not be one of the
+.Ar file
+operands or a member of a file hierarchy rooted at one of the
+.Ar file
+operands.
+The result of a
+.Em copy
+under these conditions is unpredictable.
+.El
+.Pp
+While processing a damaged archive during a
+.Em read
+or
+.Em list
+operation,
+.Nm pax
+will attempt to recover from media defects and will search through the archive
+to locate and process the largest number of archive members possible (see the
+.Fl E
+option for more details on error handling).
+.Sh OPERANDS
+The
+.Ar directory
+operand specifies a destination directory pathname.
+If the
+.Ar directory
+operand does not exist, or it is not writable by the user,
+or it is not of type directory,
+.Nm pax
+will exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.Pp
+The
+.Ar pattern
+operand is used to select one or more pathnames of archive members.
+Archive members are selected using the pattern matching notation described
+by
+.Xr fnmatch 3 .
+When the
+.Ar pattern
+operand is not supplied, all members of the archive will be selected.
+When a
+.Ar pattern
+matches a directory, the entire file hierarchy rooted at that directory will
+be selected.
+When a
+.Ar pattern
+operand does not select at least one archive member,
+.Nm pax
+will write these
+.Ar pattern
+operands in a diagnostic message to
+.Dv standard error
+and then exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.Pp
+The
+.Ar file
+operand specifies the pathname of a file to be copied or archived.
+When a
+.Ar file
+operand does not select at least one archive member,
+.Nm pax
+will write these
+.Ar file
+operand pathnames in a diagnostic message to
+.Dv standard error
+and then exit with a non-zero exit status.
+.Sh OPTIONS
+The following options are supported:
+.Bl -tag -width 4n
+.It Fl r
+Read an archive file from
+.Dv standard input
+and extract the specified
+.Ar files .
+If any intermediate directories are needed in order to extract an archive
+member, these directories will be created as if
+.Xr mkdir 2
+was called with the bitwise inclusive
+.Dv OR
+of
+.Dv S_IRWXU , S_IRWXG ,
+and
+.Dv S_IRWXO
+as the mode argument.
+When the selected archive format supports the specification of linked
+files and these files cannot be linked while the archive is being extracted,
+.Nm pax
+will write a diagnostic message to
+.Dv standard error
+and exit with a non-zero exit status at the completion of operation.
+.It Fl w
+Write files to the
+.Dv standard output
+in the specified archive format.
+When no
+.Ar file
+operands are specified,
+.Dv standard input
+is read for a list of pathnames with one per line without any leading or
+trailing
+.Aq blanks .
+.It Fl a
+Append
+.Ar files
+to the end of an archive that was previously written.
+If an archive format is not specified with a
+.Fl x
+option, the format currently being used in the archive will be selected.
+Any attempt to append to an archive in a format different from the
+format already used in the archive will cause
+.Nm pax
+to exit immediately
+with a non-zero exit status.
+The blocking size used in the archive volume where writing starts
+will continue to be used for the remainder of that archive volume.
+.Pp
+.Em Warning :
+Many storage devices are not able to support the operations necessary
+to perform an append operation.
+Any attempt to append to an archive stored on such a device may damage the
+archive or have other unpredictable results.
+Tape drives in particular are more likely to not support an append operation.
+An archive stored in a regular file system file or on a disk device will
+usually support an append operation.
+.It Fl b Ar blocksize
+When
+.Em writing
+an archive,
+block the output at a positive decimal integer number of
+bytes per write to the archive file.
+The
+.Ar blocksize
+must be a multiple of 512 bytes with a maximum of 64512 bytes.
+Archives larger than 32256 bytes violate the
+.Tn POSIX
+standard and will not be portable to all systems.
+A
+.Ar blocksize
+can end with
+.Sq Li k
+or
+.Sq Li b
+to specify multiplication by 1024 (1K) or 512, respectively.
+A pair of
+.Ar blocksizes
+can be separated by
+.Sq Li x
+to indicate a product.
+A specific archive device may impose additional restrictions on the size
+of blocking it will support.
+When blocking is not specified, the default
+.Ar blocksize
+is dependent on the specific archive format being used (see the
+.Fl x
+option).
+.It Fl c
+Match all file or archive members
+.Em except
+those specified by the
+.Ar pattern
+and
+.Ar file
+operands.
+.It Fl d
+Cause files of type directory being copied or archived, or archive members of
+type directory being extracted, to match only the directory file or archive
+member and not the file hierarchy rooted at the directory.
+.It Fl f Ar archive
+Specify
+.Ar archive
+as the pathname of the input or output archive, overriding the default
+.Dv standard input
+(for
+.Em list
+and
+.Em read )
+or
+.Dv standard output
+(for
+.Em write ) .
+A single archive may span multiple files and different archive devices.
+When required,
+.Nm pax
+will prompt for the pathname of the file or device of the next volume in the
+archive.
+.It Fl i
+Interactively rename files or archive members.
+For each archive member matching a
+.Ar pattern
+operand or each file matching a
+.Ar file
+operand,
+.Nm pax
+will prompt to
+.Pa /dev/tty
+giving the name of the file, its file mode and its modification time.
+.Nm pax
+will then read a line from
+.Pa /dev/tty .
+If this line is blank, the file or archive member is skipped.
+If this line consists of a single period, the
+file or archive member is processed with no modification to its name.
+Otherwise, its name is replaced with the contents of the line.
+.Nm pax
+will immediately exit with a non-zero exit status if
+.Dv <EOF>
+is encountered when reading a response or if
+.Pa /dev/tty
+cannot be opened for reading and writing.
+.It Fl k
+Do not overwrite existing files.
+.It Fl l
+(The lowercase letter ``ell.'') Link files.
+In the
+.Em copy
+mode
+.Pq Fl r Fl w ,
+hard links are made between the source and destination file hierarchies
+whenever possible.
+.It Fl n
+Select the first archive member that matches each
+.Ar pattern
+operand.
+No more than one archive member is matched for each
+.Ar pattern .
+When members of type directory are matched, the file hierarchy rooted at that
+directory is also matched (unless
+.Fl d
+is also specified).
+.It Fl o Ar options
+Information to modify the algorithm for extracting or writing archive files
+which is specific to the archive format specified by
+.Fl x .
+In general,
+.Ar options
+take the form:
+.Cm name=value .
+.It Fl p Ar string
+Specify one or more file characteristic options (privileges).
+The
+.Ar string
+option-argument is a string specifying file characteristics to be retained or
+discarded on extraction.
+The string consists of the specification characters
+.Cm a , e , m , o ,
+and
+.Cm p .
+Multiple characteristics can be concatenated within the same string
+and multiple
+.Fl p
+options can be specified.
+The meaning of the specification characters are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width 2n
+.It Cm a
+Do not preserve file access times.
+By default, file access times are preserved whenever possible.
+.It Cm e
+.Sq Preserve everything ,
+the user ID, group ID, file mode bits,
+file access time, and file modification time.
+This is intended to be used by
+.Em root ,
+someone with all the appropriate privileges, in order to preserve all
+aspects of the files as they are recorded in the archive.
+The
+.Cm e
+flag is the sum of the
+.Cm o
+and
+.Cm p
+flags.
+.It Cm m
+Do not preserve file modification times.
+By default, file modification times are preserved whenever possible.
+.It Cm o
+Preserve the user ID and group ID.
+.It Cm p
+.Sq Preserve
+the file mode bits.
+This intended to be used by a
+.Em user
+with regular privileges who wants to preserve all aspects of the file other
+than the ownership.
+The file times are preserved by default, but two other flags are offered to
+disable this and use the time of extraction instead.
+.El
+.Pp
+In the preceding list,
+.Sq preserve
+indicates that an attribute stored in the archive is given to the
+extracted file, subject to the permissions of the invoking
+process.
+Otherwise the attribute of the extracted file is determined as
+part of the normal file creation action.
+If neither the
+.Cm e
+nor the
+.Cm o
+specification character is specified, or the user ID and group ID are not
+preserved for any reason,
+.Nm pax
+will not set the
+.Dv S_ISUID
+.Em ( setuid )
+and
+.Dv S_ISGID
+.Em ( setgid )
+bits of the file mode.
+If the preservation of any of these items fails for any reason,
+.Nm pax
+will write a diagnostic message to
+.Dv standard error .
+Failure to preserve these items will affect the final exit status,
+but will not cause the extracted file to be deleted.
+If the file characteristic letters in any of the string option-arguments are
+duplicated or conflict with each other, the one(s) given last will take
+precedence.
+For example, if
+.Dl Fl p Ar eme
+is specified, file modification times are still preserved.
+.It Fl s Ar replstr
+Modify the file or archive member names specified by the
+.Ar pattern
+or
+.Ar file
+operands according to the substitution expression
+.Ar replstr ,
+using the syntax of the
+.Xr ed 1
+utility regular expressions.
+The format of these regular expressions are:
+.Dl /old/new/[gp]
+As in
+.Xr ed 1 ,
+.Cm old
+is a basic regular expression and
+.Cm new
+can contain an ampersand (&), \\n (where n is a digit) back-references,
+or subexpression matching.
+The
+.Cm old
+string may also contain
+.Dv <newline>
+characters.
+Any non-null character can be used as a delimiter (/ is shown here).
+Multiple
+.Fl s
+expressions can be specified.
+The expressions are applied in the order they are specified on the
+command line, terminating with the first successful substitution.
+The optional trailing
+.Cm g
+continues to apply the substitution expression to the pathname substring
+which starts with the first character following the end of the last successful
+substitution. The first unsuccessful substitution stops the operation of the
+.Cm g
+option.
+The optional trailing
+.Cm p
+will cause the final result of a successful substitution to be written to
+.Dv standard error
+in the following format:
+.Dl <original pathname> >> <new pathname>
+File or archive member names that substitute to the empty string
+are not selected and will be skipped.
+.It Fl t
+Reset the access times of any file or directory read or accessed by
+.Nm pax
+to be the same as they were before being read or accessed by
+.Nm pax .
+.It Fl u
+Ignore files that are older (having a less recent file modification time)
+than a pre-existing file or archive member with the same name.
+During
+.Em read ,
+an archive member with the same name as a file in the file system will be
+extracted if the archive member is newer than the file.
+During
+.Em write ,
+a file system member with the same name as an archive member will be
+written to the archive if it is newer than the archive member.
+During
+.Em copy ,
+the file in the destination hierarchy is replaced by the file in the source
+hierarchy or by a link to the file in the source hierarchy if the file in
+the source hierarchy is newer.
+.It Fl v
+During a
+.Em list
+operation, produce a verbose table of contents using the format of the
+.Xr ls 1
+utility with the
+.Fl l
+option.
+For pathnames representing a hard link to a previous member of the archive,
+the output has the format:
+.Dl <ls -l listing> == <link name>
+For pathnames representing a symbolic link, the output has the format:
+.Dl <ls -l listing> => <link name>
+Where <ls -l listing> is the output format specified by the
+.Xr ls 1
+utility when used with the
+.Fl l
+option.
+Otherwise for all the other operational modes
+.Po Em read , write , Li and Em copy
+.Pc ,
+pathnames are written and flushed to
+.Dv standard error
+without a trailing
+.Dv <newline>
+as soon as processing begins on that file or
+archive member.
+The trailing
+.Dv <newline> ,
+is not buffered, and is written only after the file has been read or written.
+.It Fl x Ar format
+Specify the output archive format, with the default format being
+.Ar ustar .
+.Nm pax
+currently supports the following formats:
+.Bl -tag -width "sv4cpio"
+.It Ar cpio
+The extended cpio interchange format specified in the
+.St -p1003.2
+standard.
+The default blocksize for this format is 5120 bytes.
+Inode and device information about a file (used for detecting file hard links
+by this format) which may be truncated by this format is detected by
+.Nm pax
+and is repaired.
+.It Ar bcpio
+The old binary cpio format.
+The default blocksize for this format is 5120 bytes.
+This format is not very portable and should not be used when other formats
+are available.
+Inode and device information about a file (used for detecting file hard links
+by this format) which may be truncated by this format is detected by
+.Nm pax
+and is repaired.
+.It Ar sv4cpio
+The System V release 4 cpio.
+The default blocksize for this format is 5120 bytes.
+Inode and device information about a file (used for detecting file hard links
+by this format) which may be truncated by this format is detected by
+.Nm pax
+and is repaired.
+.It Ar sv4crc
+The System V release 4 cpio with file crc checksums.
+The default blocksize for this format is 5120 bytes.
+Inode and device information about a file (used for detecting file hard links
+by this format) which may be truncated by this format is detected by
+.Nm pax
+and is repaired.
+.It Ar tar
+The old BSD tar format as found in BSD4.3.
+The default blocksize for this format is 10240 bytes.
+Pathnames stored by this format must be 100 characters or less in length.
+Only
+.Em regular
+files,
+.Em hard links , soft links ,
+and
+.Em directories
+will be archived (other file system types are not supported).
+For backwards compatibility with even older tar formats, a
+.Fl o
+option can be used when writing an archive to omit the storage of directories.
+This option takes the form:
+.Dl Fl o Cm write_opt=nodir
+.It Ar ustar
+The extended tar interchange format specified in the
+.St -p1003.2
+standard.
+The default blocksize for this format is 10240 bytes.
+Pathnames stored by this format must be 250 characters or less in length.
+.El
+.Pp
+.Nm pax
+will detect and report any file that it is unable to store or extract
+as the result of any specific archive format restrictions.
+The individual archive formats may impose additional restrictions on use.
+Typical archive format restrictions include (but are not limited to):
+file pathname length, file size, link pathname length, and the type of the
+file.
+.It Fl B Ar bytes
+Limit the number of bytes written to a single archive volume to
+.Ar bytes .
+The
+.Ar bytes
+limit can end with
+.Sq Li m ,
+.Sq Li k ,
+or
+.Sq Li b
+to specify multiplication by 1048576 (1M), 1024 (1K) or 512, respectively.
+A pair of
+.Ar bytes
+limits can be separated by
+.Sq Li x
+to indicate a product.
+.Pp
+.Em Warning :
+Only use this option when writing an archive to a device which supports
+an end of file read condition based on last (or largest) write offset
+(such as a regular file or a tape drive).
+The use of this option with a floppy or hard disk is not recommended.
+.It Fl D
+This option is the same as the
+.Fl u
+option, except that the file inode change time is checked instead of the
+file modification time.
+The file inode change time can be used to select files whose inode information
+(e.g. UID, GID, etc.) is newer than a copy of the file in the destination
+.Ar directory .
+.It Fl E Ar limit
+Limit the number of consecutive read faults while trying to read a flawed
+archive to
+.Ar limit .
+With a positive
+.Ar limit ,
+.Nm pax
+will attempt to recover from an archive read error and will
+continue processing starting with the next file stored in the archive.
+A
+.Ar limit
+of 0 will cause
+.Nm pax
+to stop operation after the first read error is detected on an archive volume.
+A
+.Ar limit
+of
+.Li NONE
+will cause
+.Nm pax
+to attempt to recover from read errors forever.
+The default
+.Ar limit
+is a small positive number of retries.
+.Pp
+.Em Warning:
+Using this option with
+.Li NONE
+should be used with extreme caution as
+.Nm pax
+may get stuck in an infinite loop on a very badly flawed archive.
+.It Fl G Ar group
+Select a file based on its
+.Ar group
+name, or when starting with a
+.Cm # ,
+a numeric gid.
+A '\\' can be used to escape the
+.Cm # .
+Multiple
+.Fl G
+options may be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
+.It Fl H
+Follow only command line symbolic links while performing a physical file
+system traversal.
+.It Fl L
+Follow all symbolic links to perform a logical file system traversal.
+.It Fl P
+Do not follow symbolic links, perform a physical file system traversal.
+This is the default mode.
+.It Fl T Ar [from_date][,to_date][/[c][m]]
+Allow files to be selected based on a file modification or inode change
+time falling within a specified time range of
+.Ar from_date
+to
+.Ar to_date
+(the dates are inclusive).
+If only a
+.Ar from_date
+is supplied, all files with a modification or inode change time
+equal to or younger are selected.
+If only a
+.Ar to_date
+is supplied, all files with a modification or inode change time
+equal to or older will be selected.
+When the
+.Ar from_date
+is equal to the
+.Ar to_date ,
+only files with a modification or inode change time of exactly that
+time will be selected.
+.Pp
+When
+.Nm pax
+is in the
+.Em write
+or
+.Em copy
+mode, the optional trailing field
+.Ar [c][m]
+can be used to determine which file time (inode change, file modification or
+both) are used in the comparison.
+If neither is specified, the default is to use file modification time only.
+The
+.Ar m
+specifies the comparison of file modification time (the time when
+the file was last written).
+The
+.Ar c
+specifies the comparison of inode change time (the time when the file
+inode was last changed; e.g. a change of owner, group, mode, etc).
+When
+.Ar c
+and
+.Ar m
+are both specified, then the modification and inode change times are
+both compared.
+The inode change time comparison is useful in selecting files whose
+attributes were recently changed or selecting files which were recently
+created and had their modification time reset to an older time (as what
+happens when a file is extracted from an archive and the modification time
+is preserved).
+Time comparisons using both file times is useful when
+.Nm pax
+is used to create a time based incremental archive (only files that were
+changed during a specified time range will be archived).
+.Pp
+A time range is made up of six different fields and each field must contain two
+digits.
+The format is:
+.Dl [yy[mm[dd[hh]]]]mm[.ss]
+Where
+.Cm yy
+is the last two digits of the year,
+the first
+.Cm mm
+is the month (from 01 to 12),
+.Cm dd
+is the day of the month (from 01 to 31),
+.Cm hh
+is the hour of the day (from 00 to 23),
+the second
+.Cm mm
+is the minute (from 00 to 59),
+and
+.Cm ss
+is the seconds (from 00 to 59).
+The minute field
+.Cm mm
+is required, while the other fields are optional and must be added in the
+following order:
+.Dl Cm hh , dd , mm , yy .
+The
+.Cm ss
+field may be added independently of the other fields.
+Time ranges are relative to the current time, so
+.Dl Fl T Ar 1234/cm
+would select all files with a modification or inode change time
+of 12:34 PM today or later.
+Multiple
+.Fl T
+time range can be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
+.It Fl U Ar user
+Select a file based on its
+.Ar user
+name, or when starting with a
+.Cm # ,
+a numeric UID.
+A '\\' can be used to escape the
+.Cm # .
+Multiple
+.Fl U
+options may be supplied and checking stops with the first match.
+.It Fl X
+When traversing the file hierarchy specified by a pathname,
+do not descend into directories that have a different device ID.
+See the
+.Li st_dev
+field as described in
+.Xr stat 2
+for more information about device IDs.
+.It Fl Y
+This option is the same as the
+.Fl D
+option, except that the inode change time is checked using the
+pathname created after all the file name modifications have completed.
+.It Fl Z
+This option is the same as the
+.Fl u
+option, except that the modification time is checked using the
+pathname created after all the file name modifications have completed.
+.El
+.Pp
+The options that operate on the names of files or archive members
+.Po Fl c ,
+.Fl i ,
+.Fl n ,
+.Fl s ,
+.Fl u ,
+.Fl v ,
+.Fl D ,
+.Fl G ,
+.Fl T ,
+.Fl U ,
+.Fl Y ,
+and
+.Fl Z
+.Pc
+interact as follows.
+.Pp
+When extracting files during a
+.Em read
+operation, archive members are
+.Sq selected ,
+based only on the user specified pattern operands as modified by the
+.Fl c ,
+.Fl n ,
+.Fl u ,
+.Fl D ,
+.Fl G ,
+.Fl T ,
+.Fl U
+options.
+Then any
+.Fl s
+and
+.Fl i
+options will modify in that order, the names of these selected files.
+Then the
+.Fl Y
+and
+.Fl Z
+options will be applied based on the final pathname.
+Finally, the
+.Fl v
+option will write the names resulting from these modifications.
+.Pp
+When archiving files during a
+.Em write
+operation, or copying files during a
+.Em copy
+operation, archive members are
+.Sq selected ,
+based only on the user specified pathnames as modified by the
+.Fl n ,
+.Fl u ,
+.Fl D ,
+.Fl G ,
+.Fl T ,
+and
+.Fl U
+options (the
+.Fl D
+option only applies during a copy operation).
+Then any
+.Fl s
+and
+.Fl i
+options will modify in that order, the names of these selected files.
+Then during a
+.Em copy
+operation the
+.Fl Y
+and the
+.Fl Z
+options will be applied based on the final pathname.
+Finally, the
+.Fl v
+option will write the names resulting from these modifications.
+.Pp
+When one or both of the
+.Fl u
+or
+.Fl D
+options are specified along with the
+.Fl n
+option, a file is not considered selected unless it is newer
+than the file to which it is compared.
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+The command:
+.Dl pax -w -f /dev/rst0 .\
+copies the contents of the current directory to the device
+.Pa /dev/rst0 .
+.Pp
+The command:
+.Dl pax -v -f filename
+gives the verbose table of contents for an archive stored in
+.Pa filename .
+.Pp
+The following commands:
+.Dl mkdir newdir
+.Dl cd olddir
+.Dl pax -rw .\ newdir
+will copy the entire
+.Pa olddir
+directory hierarchy to
+.Pa newdir .
+.Pp
+The command:
+.Dl pax -r -s ',^//*usr//*,,' -f a.pax
+reads the archive
+.Pa a.pax ,
+with all files rooted in ``/usr'' into the archive extracted relative to the
+current directory.
+.Pp
+The command:
+.Dl pax -rw -i .\ dest_dir
+can be used to interactively select the files to copy from the current
+directory to
+.Pa dest_dir .
+.Pp
+The command:
+.Dl pax -r -pe -U root -G bin -f a.pax
+will extract all files from the archive
+.Pa a.pax
+which are owned by
+.Em root
+with group
+.Em bin
+and will preserve all file permissions.
+.Pp
+The command:
+.Dl pax -r -w -v -Y -Z home /backup
+will update (and list) only those files in the destination directory
+.Pa /backup
+which are older (less recent inode change or file modification times) than
+files with the same name found in the source file tree
+.Pa home .
+.Sh STANDARDS
+The
+.Nm pax
+utility is a superset of the
+.St -p1003.2
+standard.
+The options
+.Fl B ,
+.Fl D ,
+.Fl E ,
+.Fl G ,
+.Fl H ,
+.Fl L ,
+.Fl P ,
+.Fl T ,
+.Fl U ,
+.Fl Y ,
+.Fl Z ,
+the archive formats
+.Ar bcpio ,
+.Ar sv4cpio ,
+.Ar sv4crc ,
+.Ar tar ,
+and the flawed archive handling during
+.Ar list
+and
+.Ar read
+operations are extensions to the
+.Tn POSIX
+standard.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr cpio 1 ,
+.Xr tar 1
+.Sh AUTHOR
+Keith Muller at the University of California, San Diego.
+.Sh ERRORS
+.Nm pax
+will exit with one of the following values:
+.Bl -tag -width 2n
+.It 0
+All files were processed successfully.
+.It 1
+An error occurred.
+.El
+.Pp
+Whenever
+.Nm pax
+cannot create a file or a link when reading an archive or cannot
+find a file when writing an archive, or cannot preserve the user ID,
+group ID, or file mode when the
+.Fl p
+option is specified, a diagnostic message is written to
+.Dv standard error
+and a non-zero exit status will be returned, but processing will continue.
+In the case where
+.Nm pax
+cannot create a link to a file,
+.Nm pax
+will not create a second copy of the file.
+.Pp
+If the extraction of a file from an archive is prematurely terminated by
+a signal or error,
+.Nm pax
+may have only partially extracted a file the user wanted.
+Additionally, the file modes of extracted files and directories
+may have incorrect file bits, and the modification and access times may be
+wrong.
+.Pp
+If the creation of an archive is prematurely terminated by a signal or error,
+.Nm pax
+may have only partially created the archive which may violate the specific
+archive format specification.
+.Pp
+If while doing a
+.Em copy ,
+.Nm pax
+detects a file is about to overwrite itself, the file is not copied,
+a diagnostic message is written to
+.Dv standard error
+and when
+.Nm pax
+completes it will exit with a non-zero exit status.
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: pax.c,v 1.14 1998/09/20 02:22:22 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: pax.c,v 1.5 1996/03/26 23:54:20 mrg Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+static char copyright[] =
+"@(#) Copyright (c) 1992, 1993\n\
+ The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.\n";
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)pax.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: pax.c,v 1.14 1998/09/20 02:22:22 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/resource.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+static int gen_init __P((void));
+
+/*
+ * PAX main routines, general globals and some simple start up routines
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Variables that can be accessed by any routine within pax
+ */
+int act = DEFOP; /* read/write/append/copy */
+FSUB *frmt = NULL; /* archive format type */
+int cflag; /* match all EXCEPT pattern/file */
+int cwdfd; /* starting cwd */
+int dflag; /* directory member match only */
+int iflag; /* interactive file/archive rename */
+int kflag; /* do not overwrite existing files */
+int lflag; /* use hard links when possible */
+int nflag; /* select first archive member match */
+int tflag; /* restore access time after read */
+int uflag; /* ignore older modification time files */
+int vflag; /* produce verbose output */
+int zflag; /* use gzip */
+int Dflag; /* same as uflag except inode change time */
+int Hflag; /* follow command line symlinks (write only) */
+int Lflag; /* follow symlinks when writing */
+int Xflag; /* archive files with same device id only */
+int Yflag; /* same as Dflg except after name mode */
+int Zflag; /* same as uflg except after name mode */
+int vfpart; /* is partial verbose output in progress */
+int patime = 1; /* preserve file access time */
+int pmtime = 1; /* preserve file modification times */
+int nodirs; /* do not create directories as needed */
+int pmode; /* preserve file mode bits */
+int pids; /* preserve file uid/gid */
+int rmleadslash = 0; /* remove leading '/' from pathnames */
+int exit_val; /* exit value */
+int docrc; /* check/create file crc */
+char *dirptr; /* destination dir in a copy */
+char *ltmfrmt; /* -v locale time format (if any) */
+char *argv0; /* root of argv[0] */
+sigset_t s_mask; /* signal mask for cleanup critical sect */
+FILE *listf = stderr; /* file pointer to print file list to */
+
+/*
+ * PAX - Portable Archive Interchange
+ *
+ * A utility to read, write, and write lists of the members of archive
+ * files and copy directory hierarchies. A variety of archive formats
+ * are supported (some are described in POSIX 1003.1 10.1):
+ *
+ * ustar - 10.1.1 extended tar interchange format
+ * cpio - 10.1.2 extended cpio interchange format
+ * tar - old BSD 4.3 tar format
+ * binary cpio - old cpio with binary header format
+ * sysVR4 cpio - with and without CRC
+ *
+ * This version is a superset of IEEE Std 1003.2b-d3
+ *
+ * Summary of Extensions to the IEEE Standard:
+ *
+ * 1 READ ENHANCEMENTS
+ * 1.1 Operations which read archives will continue to operate even when
+ * processing archives which may be damaged, truncated, or fail to meet
+ * format specs in several different ways. Damaged sections of archives
+ * are detected and avoided if possible. Attempts will be made to resync
+ * archive read operations even with badly damaged media.
+ * 1.2 Blocksize requirements are not strictly enforced on archive read.
+ * Tapes which have variable sized records can be read without errors.
+ * 1.3 The user can specify via the non-standard option flag -E if error
+ * resync operation should stop on a media error, try a specified number
+ * of times to correct, or try to correct forever.
+ * 1.4 Sparse files (lseek holes) stored on the archive (but stored with blocks
+ * of all zeros will be restored with holes appropriate for the target
+ * filesystem
+ * 1.5 The user is notified whenever something is found during archive
+ * read operations which violates spec (but the read will continue).
+ * 1.6 Multiple archive volumes can be read and may span over different
+ * archive devices
+ * 1.7 Rigidly restores all file attributes exactly as they are stored on the
+ * archive.
+ * 1.8 Modification change time ranges can be specified via multiple -T
+ * options. These allow a user to select files whose modification time
+ * lies within a specific time range.
+ * 1.9 Files can be selected based on owner (user name or uid) via one or more
+ * -U options.
+ * 1.10 Files can be selected based on group (group name or gid) via one o
+ * more -G options.
+ * 1.11 File modification time can be checked against exisiting file after
+ * name modification (-Z)
+ *
+ * 2 WRITE ENHANCEMENTS
+ * 2.1 Write operation will stop instead of allowing a user to create a flawed
+ * flawed archive (due to any problem).
+ * 2.2 Archives writtens by pax are forced to strictly conform to both the
+ * archive and pax the spceific format specifications.
+ * 2.3 Blocking size and format is rigidly enforced on writes.
+ * 2.4 Formats which may exhibit header overflow problems (they have fields
+ * too small for large file systems, such as inode number storage), use
+ * routines designed to repair this problem. These techniques still
+ * conform to both pax and format specifications, but no longer truncate
+ * these fields. This removes any restrictions on using these archive
+ * formats on large file systems.
+ * 2.5 Multiple archive volumes can be written and may span over different
+ * archive devices
+ * 2.6 A archive volume record limit allows the user to specify the number
+ * of bytes stored on an archive volume. When reached the user is
+ * prompted for the next archive volume. This is specified with the
+ * non-standard -B flag. THe limit is rounded up to the next blocksize.
+ * 2.7 All archive padding during write use zero filled sections. This makes
+ * it much easier to pull data out of flawed archive during read
+ * operations.
+ * 2.8 Access time reset with the -t applies to all file nodes (including
+ * directories).
+ * 2.9 Symbolic links can be followed with -L (optional in the spec).
+ * 2.10 Modification or inode change time ranges can be specified via
+ * multiple -T options. These allow a user to select files whose
+ * modification or inode change time lies within a specific time range.
+ * 2.11 Files can be selected based on owner (user name or uid) via one or more
+ * -U options.
+ * 2.12 Files can be selected based on group (group name or gid) via one o
+ * more -G options.
+ * 2.13 Symlinks which appear on the command line can be followed (without
+ * following other symlinks; -H flag)
+ *
+ * 3 COPY ENHANCEMENTS
+ * 3.1 Sparse files (lseek holes) can be copied without expanding the holes
+ * into zero filled blocks. The file copy is created with holes which are
+ * appropriate for the target filesystem
+ * 3.2 Access time as well as modification time on copied file trees can be
+ * preserved with the appropriate -p options.
+ * 3.3 Access time reset with the -t applies to all file nodes (including
+ * directories).
+ * 3.4 Symbolic links can be followed with -L (optional in the spec).
+ * 3.5 Modification or inode change time ranges can be specified via
+ * multiple -T options. These allow a user to select files whose
+ * modification or inode change time lies within a specific time range.
+ * 3.6 Files can be selected based on owner (user name or uid) via one or more
+ * -U options.
+ * 3.7 Files can be selected based on group (group name or gid) via one o
+ * more -G options.
+ * 3.8 Symlinks which appear on the command line can be followed (without
+ * following other symlinks; -H flag)
+ * 3.9 File inode change time can be checked against exisiting file before
+ * name modification (-D)
+ * 3.10 File inode change time can be checked against exisiting file after
+ * name modification (-Y)
+ * 3.11 File modification time can be checked against exisiting file after
+ * name modification (-Z)
+ *
+ * 4 GENERAL ENHANCEMENTS
+ * 4.1 Internal structure is designed to isolate format dependent and
+ * independent functions. Formats are selected via a format driver table.
+ * This encourages the addition of new archive formats by only having to
+ * write those routines which id, read and write the archive header.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * main()
+ * parse options, set up and operate as specified by the user.
+ * any operational flaw will set exit_val to non-zero
+ * Return: 0 if ok, 1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+main(int argc, char **argv)
+#else
+int
+main(argc, argv)
+ int argc;
+ char **argv;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * Keep a reference to cwd, so we can always come back home.
+ */
+ cwdfd = open(".", O_RDONLY);
+ if (cwdfd < 0) {
+ syswarn(0, errno, "Can't open current working directory.");
+ return(exit_val);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * parse options, determine operational mode, general init
+ */
+ options(argc, argv);
+ if ((gen_init() < 0) || (tty_init() < 0))
+ return(exit_val);
+
+ /*
+ * select a primary operation mode
+ */
+ switch(act) {
+ case EXTRACT:
+ extract();
+ break;
+ case ARCHIVE:
+ archive();
+ break;
+ case APPND:
+ append();
+ break;
+ case COPY:
+ copy();
+ break;
+ default:
+ case LIST:
+ list();
+ break;
+ }
+ return(exit_val);
+}
+
+/*
+ * sig_cleanup()
+ * when interrupted we try to do whatever delayed processing we can.
+ * This is not critical, but we really ought to limit our damage when we
+ * are aborted by the user.
+ * Return:
+ * never....
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+sig_cleanup(int which_sig)
+#else
+void
+sig_cleanup(which_sig)
+ int which_sig;
+#endif
+{
+ /*
+ * restore modes and times for any dirs we may have created
+ * or any dirs we may have read. Set vflag and vfpart so the user
+ * will clearly see the message on a line by itself.
+ */
+ vflag = vfpart = 1;
+ if (which_sig == SIGXCPU)
+ paxwarn(0, "Cpu time limit reached, cleaning up.");
+ else
+ paxwarn(0, "Signal caught, cleaning up.");
+
+ ar_close();
+ proc_dir();
+ if (tflag)
+ atdir_end();
+ exit(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * gen_init()
+ * general setup routines. Not all are required, but they really help
+ * when dealing with a medium to large sized archives.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+gen_init(void)
+#else
+static int
+gen_init()
+#endif
+{
+ struct rlimit reslimit;
+ struct sigaction n_hand;
+ struct sigaction o_hand;
+
+ /*
+ * Really needed to handle large archives. We can run out of memory for
+ * internal tables really fast when we have a whole lot of files...
+ */
+ if (getrlimit(RLIMIT_DATA , &reslimit) == 0){
+ reslimit.rlim_cur = reslimit.rlim_max;
+ (void)setrlimit(RLIMIT_DATA , &reslimit);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * should file size limits be waived? if the os limits us, this is
+ * needed if we want to write a large archive
+ */
+ if (getrlimit(RLIMIT_FSIZE , &reslimit) == 0){
+ reslimit.rlim_cur = reslimit.rlim_max;
+ (void)setrlimit(RLIMIT_FSIZE , &reslimit);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * increase the size the stack can grow to
+ */
+ if (getrlimit(RLIMIT_STACK , &reslimit) == 0){
+ reslimit.rlim_cur = reslimit.rlim_max;
+ (void)setrlimit(RLIMIT_STACK , &reslimit);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * not really needed, but doesn't hurt
+ */
+ if (getrlimit(RLIMIT_RSS , &reslimit) == 0){
+ reslimit.rlim_cur = reslimit.rlim_max;
+ (void)setrlimit(RLIMIT_RSS , &reslimit);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * Handle posix locale
+ *
+ * set user defines time printing format for -v option
+ */
+ ltmfrmt = getenv("LC_TIME");
+
+ /*
+ * signal handling to reset stored directory times and modes. Since
+ * we deal with broken pipes via failed writes we ignore it. We also
+ * deal with any file size limit thorugh failed writes. Cpu time
+ * limits are caught and a cleanup is forced.
+ */
+ if ((sigemptyset(&s_mask) < 0) || (sigaddset(&s_mask, SIGTERM) < 0) ||
+ (sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGINT) < 0)||(sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGHUP) < 0) ||
+ (sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGPIPE) < 0)||(sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGQUIT)<0) ||
+ (sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGXCPU) < 0)||(sigaddset(&s_mask,SIGXFSZ)<0)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to set up signal mask");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ memset(&n_hand, 0, sizeof n_hand);
+ n_hand.sa_mask = s_mask;
+ n_hand.sa_flags = 0;
+ n_hand.sa_handler = sig_cleanup;
+
+ if ((sigaction(SIGHUP, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) &&
+ (o_hand.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) &&
+ (sigaction(SIGHUP, &o_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ if ((sigaction(SIGTERM, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) &&
+ (o_hand.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) &&
+ (sigaction(SIGTERM, &o_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ if ((sigaction(SIGINT, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) &&
+ (o_hand.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) &&
+ (sigaction(SIGINT, &o_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ if ((sigaction(SIGQUIT, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) &&
+ (o_hand.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) &&
+ (sigaction(SIGQUIT, &o_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ if ((sigaction(SIGXCPU, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) &&
+ (o_hand.sa_handler == SIG_IGN) &&
+ (sigaction(SIGXCPU, &o_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+
+ n_hand.sa_handler = SIG_IGN;
+ if ((sigaction(SIGPIPE, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0) ||
+ (sigaction(SIGXFSZ, &n_hand, &o_hand) < 0))
+ goto out;
+ return(0);
+
+ out:
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to set up signal handler");
+ return(-1);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: pax.h,v 1.9 1997/07/23 19:15:58 kstailey Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: pax.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:41 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)pax.h 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+ */
+
+/*
+ * BSD PAX global data structures and constants.
+ */
+
+#define MAXBLK 64512 /* MAX blocksize supported (posix SPEC) */
+ /* WARNING: increasing MAXBLK past 32256 */
+ /* will violate posix spec. */
+#define MAXBLK_POSIX 32256 /* MAX blocksize supported as per POSIX */
+#define BLKMULT 512 /* blocksize must be even mult of 512 bytes */
+ /* Don't even think of changing this */
+#define DEVBLK 8192 /* default read blksize for devices */
+#define FILEBLK 10240 /* default read blksize for files */
+#define PAXPATHLEN 3072 /* maximium path length for pax. MUST be */
+ /* longer than the system MAXPATHLEN */
+
+/*
+ * Pax modes of operation
+ */
+#define LIST 0 /* List the file in an archive */
+#define EXTRACT 1 /* extract the files in an archive */
+#define ARCHIVE 2 /* write a new archive */
+#define APPND 3 /* append to the end of an archive */
+#define COPY 4 /* copy files to destination dir */
+#define DEFOP LIST /* if no flags default is to LIST */
+
+/*
+ * Device type of the current archive volume
+ */
+#define ISREG 0 /* regular file */
+#define ISCHR 1 /* character device */
+#define ISBLK 2 /* block device */
+#define ISTAPE 3 /* tape drive */
+#define ISPIPE 4 /* pipe/socket */
+
+/*
+ * Format Specific Routine Table
+ *
+ * The format specific routine table allows new archive formats to be quickly
+ * added. Overall pax operation is independent of the actual format used to
+ * form the archive. Only those routines which deal directly with the archive
+ * are tailored to the oddities of the specifc format. All other routines are
+ * independent of the archive format. Data flow in and out of the format
+ * dependent routines pass pointers to ARCHD structure (described below).
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ char *name; /* name of format, this is the name the user */
+ /* gives to -x option to select it. */
+ int bsz; /* default block size. used when the user */
+ /* does not specify a blocksize for writing */
+ /* Appends continue to with the blocksize */
+ /* the archive is currently using. */
+ int hsz; /* Header size in bytes. this is the size of */
+ /* the smallest header this format supports. */
+ /* Headers are assumed to fit in a BLKMULT. */
+ /* If they are bigger, get_head() and */
+ /* get_arc() must be adjusted */
+ int udev; /* does append require unique dev/ino? some */
+ /* formats use the device and inode fields */
+ /* to specify hard links. when members in */
+ /* the archive have the same inode/dev they */
+ /* are assumed to be hard links. During */
+ /* append we may have to generate unique ids */
+ /* to avoid creating incorrect hard links */
+ int hlk; /* does archive store hard links info? if */
+ /* not, we do not bother to look for them */
+ /* during archive write operations */
+ int blkalgn; /* writes must be aligned to blkalgn boundry */
+ int inhead; /* is the trailer encoded in a valid header? */
+ /* if not, trailers are assumed to be found */
+ /* in invalid headers (i.e like tar) */
+ int (*id)(); /* checks if a buffer is a valid header */
+ /* returns 1 if it is, o.w. returns a 0 */
+ int (*st_rd)(); /* initialize routine for read. so format */
+ /* can set up tables etc before it starts */
+ /* reading an archive */
+ int (*rd)(); /* read header routine. passed a pointer to */
+ /* ARCHD. It must extract the info from the */
+ /* format and store it in the ARCHD struct. */
+ /* This routine is expected to fill all the */
+ /* fields in the ARCHD (including stat buf) */
+ /* 0 is returned when a valid header is */
+ /* found. -1 when not valid. This routine */
+ /* set the skip and pad fields so the format */
+ /* independent routines know the amount of */
+ /* padding and the number of bytes of data */
+ /* which follow the header. This info is */
+ /* used skip to the next file header */
+ off_t (*end_rd)(); /* read cleanup. Allows format to clean up */
+ /* and MUST RETURN THE LENGTH OF THE TRAILER */
+ /* RECORD (so append knows how many bytes */
+ /* to move back to rewrite the trailer) */
+ int (*st_wr)(); /* initialize routine for write operations */
+ int (*wr)(); /* write archive header. Passed an ARCHD */
+ /* filled with the specs on the next file to */
+ /* archived. Returns a 1 if no file data is */
+ /* is to be stored; 0 if file data is to be */
+ /* added. A -1 is returned if a write */
+ /* operation to the archive failed. this */
+ /* function sets the skip and pad fields so */
+ /* the proper padding can be added after */
+ /* file data. This routine must NEVER write */
+ /* a flawed archive header. */
+ int (*end_wr)(); /* end write. write the trailer and do any */
+ /* other format specific functions needed */
+ /* at the ecnd of a archive write */
+ int (*trail)(); /* returns 0 if a valid trailer, -1 if not */
+ /* For formats which encode the trailer */
+ /* outside of a valid header, a return value */
+ /* of 1 indicates that the block passed to */
+ /* it can never contain a valid header (skip */
+ /* this block, no point in looking at it) */
+ /* CAUTION: parameters to this function are */
+ /* different for trailers inside or outside */
+ /* of headers. See get_head() for details */
+ int (*rd_data)(); /* read/process file data from the archive */
+ int (*wr_data)(); /* write/process file data to the archive */
+ int (*options)(); /* process format specific options (-o) */
+} FSUB;
+
+/*
+ * Pattern matching structure
+ *
+ * Used to store command line patterns
+ */
+typedef struct pattern {
+ char *pstr; /* pattern to match, user supplied */
+ char *pend; /* end of a prefix match */
+ char *chdname; /* the dir to change to if not NULL. */
+ int plen; /* length of pstr */
+ int flgs; /* processing/state flags */
+#define MTCH 0x1 /* pattern has been matched */
+#define DIR_MTCH 0x2 /* pattern matched a directory */
+ struct pattern *fow; /* next pattern */
+} PATTERN;
+
+/*
+ * General Archive Structure (used internal to pax)
+ *
+ * This structure is used to pass information about archive members between
+ * the format independent routines and the format specific routines. When
+ * new archive formats are added, they must accept requests and supply info
+ * encoded in a structure of this type. The name fields are declared statically
+ * here, as there is only ONE of these floating around, size is not a major
+ * consideration. Eventually converting the name fields to a dynamic length
+ * may be required if and when the supporting operating system removes all
+ * restrictions on the length of pathnames it will resolve.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ int nlen; /* file name length */
+ char name[PAXPATHLEN+1]; /* file name */
+ int ln_nlen; /* link name length */
+ char ln_name[PAXPATHLEN+1]; /* name to link to (if any) */
+ char *org_name; /* orig name in file system */
+ PATTERN *pat; /* ptr to pattern match (if any) */
+ struct stat sb; /* stat buffer see stat(2) */
+ off_t pad; /* bytes of padding after file xfer */
+ off_t skip; /* bytes of real data after header */
+ /* IMPORTANT. The st_size field does */
+ /* not always indicate the amount of */
+ /* data following the header. */
+ u_long crc; /* file crc */
+ int type; /* type of file node */
+#define PAX_DIR 1 /* directory */
+#define PAX_CHR 2 /* character device */
+#define PAX_BLK 3 /* block device */
+#define PAX_REG 4 /* regular file */
+#define PAX_SLK 5 /* symbolic link */
+#define PAX_SCK 6 /* socket */
+#define PAX_FIF 7 /* fifo */
+#define PAX_HLK 8 /* hard link */
+#define PAX_HRG 9 /* hard link to a regular file */
+#define PAX_CTG 10 /* high performance file */
+} ARCHD;
+
+/*
+ * Format Specific Options List
+ *
+ * Used to pass format options to the format options handler
+ */
+typedef struct oplist {
+ char *name; /* option variable name e.g. name= */
+ char *value; /* value for option variable */
+ struct oplist *fow; /* next option */
+} OPLIST;
+
+/*
+ * General Macros
+ */
+#ifndef MIN
+#define MIN(a,b) (((a)<(b))?(a):(b))
+#endif
+#define MAJOR(x) major(x)
+#define MINOR(x) minor(x)
+#define TODEV(x, y) makedev((x), (y))
+
+/*
+ * General Defines
+ */
+#define HEX 16
+#define OCT 8
+#define _PAX_ 1
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: sel_subs.c,v 1.7 1997/08/17 23:05:09 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: sel_subs.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:42 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)sel_subs.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: sel_subs.c,v 1.7 1997/08/17 23:05:09 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <grp.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "sel_subs.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+static int str_sec __P((register char *, time_t *));
+static int usr_match __P((register ARCHD *));
+static int grp_match __P((register ARCHD *));
+static int trng_match __P((register ARCHD *));
+
+static TIME_RNG *trhead = NULL; /* time range list head */
+static TIME_RNG *trtail = NULL; /* time range list tail */
+static USRT **usrtb = NULL; /* user selection table */
+static GRPT **grptb = NULL; /* group selection table */
+
+/*
+ * Routines for selection of archive members
+ */
+
+/*
+ * sel_chk()
+ * check if this file matches a specfied uid, gid or time range
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be skipped
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+sel_chk(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+sel_chk(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ if (((usrtb != NULL) && usr_match(arcn)) ||
+ ((grptb != NULL) && grp_match(arcn)) ||
+ ((trhead != NULL) && trng_match(arcn)))
+ return(1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * User/group selection routines
+ *
+ * Routines to handle user selection of files based on the file uid/gid. To
+ * add an entry, the user supplies either then name or the uid/gid starting with
+ * a # on the command line. A \# will eascape the #.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * usr_add()
+ * add a user match to the user match hash table
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if added ok, -1 otherwise;
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+usr_add(register char *str)
+#else
+int
+usr_add(str)
+ register char *str;
+#endif
+{
+ register u_int indx;
+ register USRT *pt;
+ register struct passwd *pw;
+ register uid_t uid;
+
+ /*
+ * create the table if it doesn't exist
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0'))
+ return(-1);
+ if ((usrtb == NULL) &&
+ ((usrtb = (USRT **)calloc(USR_TB_SZ, sizeof(USRT *))) == NULL)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for user selection table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * figure out user spec
+ */
+ if (str[0] != '#') {
+ /*
+ * it is a user name, \# escapes # as first char in user name
+ */
+ if ((str[0] == '\\') && (str[1] == '#'))
+ ++str;
+ if ((pw = getpwnam(str)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to find uid for user: %s", str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ uid = (uid_t)pw->pw_uid;
+ } else
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ uid = (uid_t)atoi(str+1);
+# else
+ uid = (uid_t)strtoul(str+1, NULL, 10);
+# endif
+ endpwent();
+
+ /*
+ * hash it and go down the hash chain (if any) looking for it
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)uid) % USR_TB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = usrtb[indx]) != NULL) {
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if (pt->uid == uid)
+ return(0);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * uid is not yet in the table, add it to the front of the chain
+ */
+ if ((pt = (USRT *)malloc(sizeof(USRT))) != NULL) {
+ pt->uid = uid;
+ pt->fow = usrtb[indx];
+ usrtb[indx] = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "User selection table out of memory");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * usr_match()
+ * check if this files uid matches a selected uid.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be skipped
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+usr_match(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+usr_match(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register USRT *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * hash and look for it in the table
+ */
+ pt = usrtb[((unsigned)arcn->sb.st_uid) % USR_TB_SZ];
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if (pt->uid == arcn->sb.st_uid)
+ return(0);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * not found
+ */
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * grp_add()
+ * add a group match to the group match hash table
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if added ok, -1 otherwise;
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+grp_add(register char *str)
+#else
+int
+grp_add(str)
+ register char *str;
+#endif
+{
+ register u_int indx;
+ register GRPT *pt;
+ register struct group *gr;
+ register gid_t gid;
+
+ /*
+ * create the table if it doesn't exist
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0'))
+ return(-1);
+ if ((grptb == NULL) &&
+ ((grptb = (GRPT **)calloc(GRP_TB_SZ, sizeof(GRPT *))) == NULL)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory fo group selection table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * figure out user spec
+ */
+ if (str[0] != '#') {
+ /*
+ * it is a group name, \# escapes # as first char in group name
+ */
+ if ((str[0] == '\\') && (str[1] == '#'))
+ ++str;
+ if ((gr = getgrnam(str)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Cannot determine gid for group name: %s", str);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ gid = (gid_t)gr->gr_gid;
+ } else
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ gid = (gid_t)atoi(str+1);
+# else
+ gid = (gid_t)strtoul(str+1, NULL, 10);
+# endif
+ endgrent();
+
+ /*
+ * hash it and go down the hash chain (if any) looking for it
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)gid) % GRP_TB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = grptb[indx]) != NULL) {
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if (pt->gid == gid)
+ return(0);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * gid not in the table, add it to the front of the chain
+ */
+ if ((pt = (GRPT *)malloc(sizeof(GRPT))) != NULL) {
+ pt->gid = gid;
+ pt->fow = grptb[indx];
+ grptb[indx] = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "Group selection table out of memory");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * grp_match()
+ * check if this files gid matches a selected gid.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be skipped
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+grp_match(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+grp_match(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register GRPT *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * hash and look for it in the table
+ */
+ pt = grptb[((unsigned)arcn->sb.st_gid) % GRP_TB_SZ];
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if (pt->gid == arcn->sb.st_gid)
+ return(0);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * not found
+ */
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Time range selection routines
+ *
+ * Routines to handle user selection of files based on the modification and/or
+ * inode change time falling within a specified time range (the non-standard
+ * -T flag). The user may specify any number of different file time ranges.
+ * Time ranges are checked one at a time until a match is found (if at all).
+ * If the file has a mtime (and/or ctime) which lies within one of the time
+ * ranges, the file is selected. Time ranges may have a lower and/or a upper
+ * value. These ranges are inclusive. When no time ranges are supplied to pax
+ * with the -T option, all members in the archive will be selected by the time
+ * range routines. When only a lower range is supplied, only files with a
+ * mtime (and/or ctime) equal to or younger are selected. When only a upper
+ * range is supplied, only files with a mtime (and/or ctime) equal to or older
+ * are selected. When the lower time range is equal to the upper time range,
+ * only files with a mtime (or ctime) of exactly that time are selected.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * trng_add()
+ * add a time range match to the time range list.
+ * This is a non-standard pax option. Lower and upper ranges are in the
+ * format: [yy[mm[dd[hh]]]]mm[.ss] and are comma separated.
+ * Time ranges are based on current time, so 1234 would specify a time of
+ * 12:34 today.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the time range was added to the list, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+trng_add(register char *str)
+#else
+int
+trng_add(str)
+ register char *str;
+#endif
+{
+ register TIME_RNG *pt;
+ register char *up_pt = NULL;
+ register char *stpt;
+ register char *flgpt;
+ register int dot = 0;
+
+ /*
+ * throw out the badly formed time ranges
+ */
+ if ((str == NULL) || (*str == '\0')) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Empty time range string");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * locate optional flags suffix /{cm}.
+ */
+ if ((flgpt = strrchr(str, '/')) != NULL)
+ *flgpt++ = '\0';
+
+ for (stpt = str; *stpt != '\0'; ++stpt) {
+ if ((*stpt >= '0') && (*stpt <= '9'))
+ continue;
+ if ((*stpt == ',') && (up_pt == NULL)) {
+ *stpt = '\0';
+ up_pt = stpt + 1;
+ dot = 0;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * allow only one dot per range (secs)
+ */
+ if ((*stpt == '.') && (!dot)) {
+ ++dot;
+ continue;
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "Improperly specified time range: %s", str);
+ goto out;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * allocate space for the time range and store the limits
+ */
+ if ((pt = (TIME_RNG *)malloc(sizeof(TIME_RNG))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to allocate memory for time range");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * by default we only will check file mtime, but usee can specify
+ * mtime, ctime (inode change time) or both.
+ */
+ if ((flgpt == NULL) || (*flgpt == '\0'))
+ pt->flgs = CMPMTME;
+ else {
+ pt->flgs = 0;
+ while (*flgpt != '\0') {
+ switch(*flgpt) {
+ case 'M':
+ case 'm':
+ pt->flgs |= CMPMTME;
+ break;
+ case 'C':
+ case 'c':
+ pt->flgs |= CMPCTME;
+ break;
+ default:
+ paxwarn(1, "Bad option %c with time range %s",
+ *flgpt, str);
+ goto out;
+ }
+ ++flgpt;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * start off with the current time
+ */
+ pt->low_time = pt->high_time = time(NULL);
+ if (*str != '\0') {
+ /*
+ * add lower limit
+ */
+ if (str_sec(str, &(pt->low_time)) < 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Illegal lower time range %s", str);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ goto out;
+ }
+ pt->flgs |= HASLOW;
+ }
+
+ if ((up_pt != NULL) && (*up_pt != '\0')) {
+ /*
+ * add upper limit
+ */
+ if (str_sec(up_pt, &(pt->high_time)) < 0) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Illegal upper time range %s", up_pt);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ goto out;
+ }
+ pt->flgs |= HASHIGH;
+
+ /*
+ * check that the upper and lower do not overlap
+ */
+ if (pt->flgs & HASLOW) {
+ if (pt->low_time > pt->high_time) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Upper %s and lower %s time overlap",
+ up_pt, str);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ pt->fow = NULL;
+ if (trhead == NULL) {
+ trtail = trhead = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ trtail->fow = pt;
+ trtail = pt;
+ return(0);
+
+ out:
+ paxwarn(1, "Time range format is: [yy[mm[dd[hh]]]]mm[.ss][/[c][m]]");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * trng_match()
+ * check if this files mtime/ctime falls within any supplied time range.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if this archive member should be processed, 1 if it should be skipped
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+trng_match(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+static int
+trng_match(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register TIME_RNG *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * have to search down the list one at a time looking for a match.
+ * remember time range limits are inclusive.
+ */
+ pt = trhead;
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ switch(pt->flgs & CMPBOTH) {
+ case CMPBOTH:
+ /*
+ * user wants both mtime and ctime checked for this
+ * time range
+ */
+ if (((pt->flgs & HASLOW) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_mtime < pt->low_time) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime < pt->low_time)) ||
+ ((pt->flgs & HASHIGH) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_mtime > pt->high_time) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime > pt->high_time))) {
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ continue;
+ }
+ break;
+ case CMPCTME:
+ /*
+ * user wants only ctime checked for this time range
+ */
+ if (((pt->flgs & HASLOW) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime < pt->low_time)) ||
+ ((pt->flgs & HASHIGH) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_ctime > pt->high_time))) {
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ continue;
+ }
+ break;
+ case CMPMTME:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * user wants only mtime checked for this time range
+ */
+ if (((pt->flgs & HASLOW) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_mtime < pt->low_time)) ||
+ ((pt->flgs & HASHIGH) &&
+ (arcn->sb.st_mtime > pt->high_time))) {
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ continue;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (pt == NULL)
+ return(1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * str_sec()
+ * Convert a time string in the format of [yy[mm[dd[hh]]]]mm[.ss] to gmt
+ * seconds. Tval already has current time loaded into it at entry.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if converted ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+str_sec(register char *str, time_t *tval)
+#else
+static int
+str_sec(str, tval)
+ register char *str;
+ time_t *tval;
+#endif
+{
+ register struct tm *lt;
+ register char *dot = NULL;
+
+ lt = localtime(tval);
+ if ((dot = strchr(str, '.')) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * seconds (.ss)
+ */
+ *dot++ = '\0';
+ if (strlen(dot) != 2)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((lt->tm_sec = ATOI2(dot)) > 61)
+ return(-1);
+ } else
+ lt->tm_sec = 0;
+
+ switch (strlen(str)) {
+ case 10:
+ /*
+ * year (yy)
+ * watch out for year 2000
+ */
+ if ((lt->tm_year = ATOI2(str)) < 69)
+ lt->tm_year += 100;
+ str += 2;
+ /* FALLTHROUGH */
+ case 8:
+ /*
+ * month (mm)
+ * watch out months are from 0 - 11 internally
+ */
+ if ((lt->tm_mon = ATOI2(str)) > 12)
+ return(-1);
+ --lt->tm_mon;
+ str += 2;
+ /* FALLTHROUGH */
+ case 6:
+ /*
+ * day (dd)
+ */
+ if ((lt->tm_mday = ATOI2(str)) > 31)
+ return(-1);
+ str += 2;
+ /* FALLTHROUGH */
+ case 4:
+ /*
+ * hour (hh)
+ */
+ if ((lt->tm_hour = ATOI2(str)) > 23)
+ return(-1);
+ str += 2;
+ /* FALLTHROUGH */
+ case 2:
+ /*
+ * minute (mm)
+ */
+ if ((lt->tm_min = ATOI2(str)) > 59)
+ return(-1);
+ break;
+ default:
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ /*
+ * convert broken-down time to GMT clock time seconds
+ */
+ if ((*tval = mktime(lt)) == -1)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: sel_subs.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:41 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: sel_subs.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:44 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)sel_subs.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * data structure for storing uid/grp selects (-U, -G non standard options)
+ */
+
+#define USR_TB_SZ 317 /* user selection table size */
+#define GRP_TB_SZ 317 /* user selection table size */
+
+typedef struct usrt {
+ uid_t uid;
+ struct usrt *fow; /* next uid */
+} USRT;
+
+typedef struct grpt {
+ gid_t gid;
+ struct grpt *fow; /* next gid */
+} GRPT;
+
+/*
+ * data structure for storing user supplied time ranges (-T option)
+ */
+
+#define ATOI2(s) ((((s)[0] - '0') * 10) + ((s)[1] - '0'))
+
+typedef struct time_rng {
+ time_t low_time; /* lower inclusive time limit */
+ time_t high_time; /* higher inclusive time limit */
+ int flgs; /* option flags */
+#define HASLOW 0x01 /* has lower time limit */
+#define HASHIGH 0x02 /* has higher time limit */
+#define CMPMTME 0x04 /* compare file modification time */
+#define CMPCTME 0x08 /* compare inode change time */
+#define CMPBOTH (CMPMTME|CMPCTME) /* compare inode and mod time */
+ struct time_rng *fow; /* next pattern */
+} TIME_RNG;
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: tables.c,v 1.10 1998/07/03 06:01:20 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: tables.c,v 1.4 1995/03/21 09:07:45 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)tables.c 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: tables.c,v 1.10 1998/07/03 06:01:20 deraadt Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <sys/fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "tables.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+
+/*
+ * Routines for controlling the contents of all the different databases pax
+ * keeps. Tables are dynamically created only when they are needed. The
+ * goal was speed and the ability to work with HUGE archives. The databases
+ * were kept simple, but do have complex rules for when the contents change.
+ * As of this writing, the posix library functions were more complex than
+ * needed for this application (pax databases have very short lifetimes and
+ * do not survive after pax is finished). Pax is required to handle very
+ * large archives. These database routines carefully combine memory usage and
+ * temporary file storage in ways which will not significantly impact runtime
+ * performance while allowing the largest possible archives to be handled.
+ * Trying to force the fit to the posix databases routines was not considered
+ * time well spent.
+ */
+
+static HRDLNK **ltab = NULL; /* hard link table for detecting hard links */
+static FTM **ftab = NULL; /* file time table for updating arch */
+static NAMT **ntab = NULL; /* interactive rename storage table */
+static DEVT **dtab = NULL; /* device/inode mapping tables */
+static ATDIR **atab = NULL; /* file tree directory time reset table */
+static int dirfd = -1; /* storage for setting created dir time/mode */
+static u_long dircnt; /* entries in dir time/mode storage */
+static int ffd = -1; /* tmp file for file time table name storage */
+
+static DEVT *chk_dev __P((dev_t, int));
+
+/*
+ * hard link table routines
+ *
+ * The hard link table tries to detect hard links to files using the device and
+ * inode values. We do this when writing an archive, so we can tell the format
+ * write routine that this file is a hard link to another file. The format
+ * write routine then can store this file in whatever way it wants (as a hard
+ * link if the format supports that like tar, or ignore this info like cpio).
+ * (Actually a field in the format driver table tells us if the format wants
+ * hard link info. if not, we do not waste time looking for them). We also use
+ * the same table when reading an archive. In that situation, this table is
+ * used by the format read routine to detect hard links from stored dev and
+ * inode numbers (like cpio). This will allow pax to create a link when one
+ * can be detected by the archive format.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * lnk_start
+ * Creates the hard link table.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if created, -1 if failure
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+lnk_start(void)
+#else
+int
+lnk_start()
+#endif
+{
+ if (ltab != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if ((ltab = (HRDLNK **)calloc(L_TAB_SZ, sizeof(HRDLNK *))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot allocate memory for hard link table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * chk_lnk()
+ * Looks up entry in hard link hash table. If found, it copies the name
+ * of the file it is linked to (we already saw that file) into ln_name.
+ * lnkcnt is decremented and if goes to 1 the node is deleted from the
+ * database. (We have seen all the links to this file). If not found,
+ * we add the file to the database if it has the potential for having
+ * hard links to other files we may process (it has a link count > 1)
+ * Return:
+ * if found returns 1; if not found returns 0; -1 on error
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+chk_lnk(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+chk_lnk(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HRDLNK *pt;
+ register HRDLNK **ppt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (ltab == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ /*
+ * ignore those nodes that cannot have hard links
+ */
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_DIR) || (arcn->sb.st_nlink <= 1))
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * hash inode number and look for this file
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)arcn->sb.st_ino) % L_TAB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = ltab[indx]) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * it's hash chain in not empty, walk down looking for it
+ */
+ ppt = &(ltab[indx]);
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->ino == arcn->sb.st_ino) &&
+ (pt->dev == arcn->sb.st_dev))
+ break;
+ ppt = &(pt->fow);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ if (pt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * found a link. set the node type and copy in the
+ * name of the file it is to link to. we need to
+ * handle hardlinks to regular files differently than
+ * other links.
+ */
+ arcn->ln_nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->ln_name, pt->name,
+ sizeof(arcn->ln_name) - 1);
+ arcn->ln_name[arcn->ln_nlen] = '\0';
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_REG)
+ arcn->type = PAX_HRG;
+ else
+ arcn->type = PAX_HLK;
+
+ /*
+ * if we have found all the links to this file, remove
+ * it from the database
+ */
+ if (--pt->nlink <= 1) {
+ *ppt = pt->fow;
+ (void)free((char *)pt->name);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ }
+ return(1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we never saw this file before. It has links so we add it to the
+ * front of this hash chain
+ */
+ if ((pt = (HRDLNK *)malloc(sizeof(HRDLNK))) != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->name = strdup(arcn->name)) != NULL) {
+ pt->dev = arcn->sb.st_dev;
+ pt->ino = arcn->sb.st_ino;
+ pt->nlink = arcn->sb.st_nlink;
+ pt->fow = ltab[indx];
+ ltab[indx] = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ }
+
+ paxwarn(1, "Hard link table out of memory");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * purg_lnk
+ * remove reference for a file that we may have added to the data base as
+ * a potential source for hard links. We ended up not using the file, so
+ * we do not want to accidently point another file at it later on.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+purg_lnk(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+void
+purg_lnk(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HRDLNK *pt;
+ register HRDLNK **ppt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (ltab == NULL)
+ return;
+ /*
+ * do not bother to look if it could not be in the database
+ */
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_nlink <= 1) || (arcn->type == PAX_DIR) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG))
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * find the hash chain for this inode value, if empty return
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)arcn->sb.st_ino) % L_TAB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = ltab[indx]) == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * walk down the list looking for the inode/dev pair, unlink and
+ * free if found
+ */
+ ppt = &(ltab[indx]);
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->ino == arcn->sb.st_ino) &&
+ (pt->dev == arcn->sb.st_dev))
+ break;
+ ppt = &(pt->fow);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+ if (pt == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * remove and free it
+ */
+ *ppt = pt->fow;
+ (void)free((char *)pt->name);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+}
+
+/*
+ * lnk_end()
+ * pull apart a existing link table so we can reuse it. We do this between
+ * read and write phases of append with update. (The format may have
+ * used the link table, and we need to start with a fresh table for the
+ * write phase
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+lnk_end(void)
+#else
+void
+lnk_end()
+#endif
+{
+ register int i;
+ register HRDLNK *pt;
+ register HRDLNK *ppt;
+
+ if (ltab == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < L_TAB_SZ; ++i) {
+ if (ltab[i] == NULL)
+ continue;
+ pt = ltab[i];
+ ltab[i] = NULL;
+
+ /*
+ * free up each entry on this chain
+ */
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ ppt = pt;
+ pt = ppt->fow;
+ (void)free((char *)ppt->name);
+ (void)free((char *)ppt);
+ }
+ }
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * modification time table routines
+ *
+ * The modification time table keeps track of last modification times for all
+ * files stored in an archive during a write phase when -u is set. We only
+ * add a file to the archive if it is newer than a file with the same name
+ * already stored on the archive (if there is no other file with the same
+ * name on the archive it is added). This applies to writes and appends.
+ * An append with an -u must read the archive and store the modification time
+ * for every file on that archive before starting the write phase. It is clear
+ * that this is one HUGE database. To save memory space, the actual file names
+ * are stored in a scatch file and indexed by an in memory hash table. The
+ * hash table is indexed by hashing the file path. The nodes in the table store
+ * the length of the filename and the lseek offset within the scratch file
+ * where the actual name is stored. Since there are never any deletions to this
+ * table, fragmentation of the scratch file is never a issue. Lookups seem to
+ * not exhibit any locality at all (files in the database are rarely
+ * looked up more than once...). So caching is just a waste of memory. The
+ * only limitation is the amount of scatch file space available to store the
+ * path names.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * ftime_start()
+ * create the file time hash table and open for read/write the scratch
+ * file. (after created it is unlinked, so when we exit we leave
+ * no witnesses).
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the table and file was created ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ftime_start(void)
+#else
+int
+ftime_start()
+#endif
+{
+ char *pt;
+
+ if (ftab != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if ((ftab = (FTM **)calloc(F_TAB_SZ, sizeof(FTM *))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot allocate memory for file time table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * get random name and create temporary scratch file, unlink name
+ * so it will get removed on exit
+ */
+ pt = strdup("/tmp/paxXXXXXXXXXX");
+ if ((ffd = mkstemp(pt)) < 0) {
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Unable to create temporary file: %s", pt);
+ free(pt);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ (void)unlink(pt);
+ free(pt);
+
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * chk_ftime()
+ * looks up entry in file time hash table. If not found, the file is
+ * added to the hash table and the file named stored in the scratch file.
+ * If a file with the same name is found, the file times are compared and
+ * the most recent file time is retained. If the new file was younger (or
+ * was not in the database) the new file is selected for storage.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if file should be added to the archive, 1 if it should be skipped,
+ * -1 on error
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+chk_ftime(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+chk_ftime(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register FTM *pt;
+ register int namelen;
+ register u_int indx;
+ char ckname[PAXPATHLEN+1];
+
+ /*
+ * no info, go ahead and add to archive
+ */
+ if (ftab == NULL)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * hash the pathname and look up in table
+ */
+ namelen = arcn->nlen;
+ indx = st_hash(arcn->name, namelen, F_TAB_SZ);
+ if ((pt = ftab[indx]) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * the hash chain is not empty, walk down looking for match
+ * only read up the path names if the lengths match, speeds
+ * up the search a lot
+ */
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if (pt->namelen == namelen) {
+ /*
+ * potential match, have to read the name
+ * from the scratch file.
+ */
+ if (lseek(ffd,pt->seek,SEEK_SET) != pt->seek) {
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+ "Failed ftime table seek");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ if (read(ffd, ckname, namelen) != namelen) {
+ syswarn(1, errno,
+ "Failed ftime table read");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if the names match, we are done
+ */
+ if (!strncmp(ckname, arcn->name, namelen))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * try the next entry on the chain
+ */
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ if (pt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * found the file, compare the times, save the newer
+ */
+ if (arcn->sb.st_mtime > pt->mtime) {
+ /*
+ * file is newer
+ */
+ pt->mtime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ /*
+ * file is older
+ */
+ return(1);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * not in table, add it
+ */
+ if ((pt = (FTM *)malloc(sizeof(FTM))) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * add the name at the end of the scratch file, saving the
+ * offset. add the file to the head of the hash chain
+ */
+ if ((pt->seek = lseek(ffd, (off_t)0, SEEK_END)) >= 0) {
+ if (write(ffd, arcn->name, namelen) == namelen) {
+ pt->mtime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+ pt->namelen = namelen;
+ pt->fow = ftab[indx];
+ ftab[indx] = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed write to file time table");
+ } else
+ syswarn(1, errno, "Failed seek on file time table");
+ } else
+ paxwarn(1, "File time table ran out of memory");
+
+ if (pt != NULL)
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Interactive rename table routines
+ *
+ * The interactive rename table keeps track of the new names that the user
+ * assignes to files from tty input. Since this map is unique for each file
+ * we must store it in case there is a reference to the file later in archive
+ * (a link). Otherwise we will be unable to find the file we know was
+ * extracted. The remapping of these files is stored in a memory based hash
+ * table (it is assumed since input must come from /dev/tty, it is unlikely to
+ * be a very large table).
+ */
+
+/*
+ * name_start()
+ * create the interactive rename table
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if successful, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+name_start(void)
+#else
+int
+name_start()
+#endif
+{
+ if (ntab != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if ((ntab = (NAMT **)calloc(N_TAB_SZ, sizeof(NAMT *))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot allocate memory for interactive rename table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * add_name()
+ * add the new name to old name mapping just created by the user.
+ * If an old name mapping is found (there may be duplicate names on an
+ * archive) only the most recent is kept.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if added, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+add_name(register char *oname, int onamelen, char *nname)
+#else
+int
+add_name(oname, onamelen, nname)
+ register char *oname;
+ int onamelen;
+ char *nname;
+#endif
+{
+ register NAMT *pt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (ntab == NULL) {
+ /*
+ * should never happen
+ */
+ paxwarn(0, "No interactive rename table, links may fail\n");
+ return(0);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * look to see if we have already mapped this file, if so we
+ * will update it
+ */
+ indx = st_hash(oname, onamelen, N_TAB_SZ);
+ if ((pt = ntab[indx]) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * look down the has chain for the file
+ */
+ while ((pt != NULL) && (strcmp(oname, pt->oname) != 0))
+ pt = pt->fow;
+
+ if (pt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * found an old mapping, replace it with the new one
+ * the user just input (if it is different)
+ */
+ if (strcmp(nname, pt->nname) == 0)
+ return(0);
+
+ (void)free((char *)pt->nname);
+ if ((pt->nname = strdup(nname)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot update rename table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * this is a new mapping, add it to the table
+ */
+ if ((pt = (NAMT *)malloc(sizeof(NAMT))) != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->oname = strdup(oname)) != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->nname = strdup(nname)) != NULL) {
+ pt->fow = ntab[indx];
+ ntab[indx] = pt;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ (void)free((char *)pt->oname);
+ }
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "Interactive rename table out of memory");
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * sub_name()
+ * look up a link name to see if it points at a file that has been
+ * remapped by the user. If found, the link is adjusted to contain the
+ * new name (oname is the link to name)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+sub_name(register char *oname, int *onamelen, size_t onamesize)
+#else
+void
+sub_name(oname, onamelen, onamesize)
+ register char *oname;
+ int *onamelen;
+ size_t onamesize;
+#endif
+{
+ register NAMT *pt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (ntab == NULL)
+ return;
+ /*
+ * look the name up in the hash table
+ */
+ indx = st_hash(oname, *onamelen, N_TAB_SZ);
+ if ((pt = ntab[indx]) == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * walk down the hash chain looking for a match
+ */
+ if (strcmp(oname, pt->oname) == 0) {
+ /*
+ * found it, replace it with the new name
+ * and return (we know that oname has enough space)
+ */
+ *onamelen = l_strncpy(oname, pt->nname, onamesize - 1);
+ oname[*onamelen] = '\0';
+ return;
+ }
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * no match, just return
+ */
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * device/inode mapping table routines
+ * (used with formats that store device and inodes fields)
+ *
+ * device/inode mapping tables remap the device field in a archive header. The
+ * device/inode fields are used to determine when files are hard links to each
+ * other. However these values have very little meaning outside of that. This
+ * database is used to solve one of two different problems.
+ *
+ * 1) when files are appended to an archive, while the new files may have hard
+ * links to each other, you cannot determine if they have hard links to any
+ * file already stored on the archive from a prior run of pax. We must assume
+ * that these inode/device pairs are unique only within a SINGLE run of pax
+ * (which adds a set of files to an archive). So we have to make sure the
+ * inode/dev pairs we add each time are always unique. We do this by observing
+ * while the inode field is very dense, the use of the dev field is fairly
+ * sparse. Within each run of pax, we remap any device number of a new archive
+ * member that has a device number used in a prior run and already stored in a
+ * file on the archive. During the read phase of the append, we store the
+ * device numbers used and mark them to not be used by any file during the
+ * write phase. If during write we go to use one of those old device numbers,
+ * we remap it to a new value.
+ *
+ * 2) Often the fields in the archive header used to store these values are
+ * too small to store the entire value. The result is an inode or device value
+ * which can be truncated. This really can foul up an archive. With truncation
+ * we end up creating links between files that are really not links (after
+ * truncation the inodes are the same value). We address that by detecting
+ * truncation and forcing a remap of the device field to split truncated
+ * inodes away from each other. Each truncation creates a pattern of bits that
+ * are removed. We use this pattern of truncated bits to partition the inodes
+ * on a single device to many different devices (each one represented by the
+ * truncated bit pattern). All inodes on the same device that have the same
+ * truncation pattern are mapped to the same new device. Two inodes that
+ * truncate to the same value clearly will always have different truncation
+ * bit patterns, so they will be split from away each other. When we spot
+ * device truncation we remap the device number to a non truncated value.
+ * (for more info see table.h for the data structures involved).
+ */
+
+/*
+ * dev_start()
+ * create the device mapping table
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if successful, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+dev_start(void)
+#else
+int
+dev_start()
+#endif
+{
+ if (dtab != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if ((dtab = (DEVT **)calloc(D_TAB_SZ, sizeof(DEVT *))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Cannot allocate memory for device mapping table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * add_dev()
+ * add a device number to the table. this will force the device to be
+ * remapped to a new value if it be used during a write phase. This
+ * function is called during the read phase of an append to prohibit the
+ * use of any device number already in the archive.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if added ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+add_dev(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+add_dev(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ if (chk_dev(arcn->sb.st_dev, 1) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * chk_dev()
+ * check for a device value in the device table. If not found and the add
+ * flag is set, it is added. This does NOT assign any mapping values, just
+ * adds the device number as one that need to be remapped. If this device
+ * is alread mapped, just return with a pointer to that entry.
+ * Return:
+ * pointer to the entry for this device in the device map table. Null
+ * if the add flag is not set and the device is not in the table (it is
+ * not been seen yet). If add is set and the device cannot be added, null
+ * is returned (indicates an error).
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static DEVT *
+chk_dev(dev_t dev, int add)
+#else
+static DEVT *
+chk_dev(dev, add)
+ dev_t dev;
+ int add;
+#endif
+{
+ register DEVT *pt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (dtab == NULL)
+ return(NULL);
+ /*
+ * look to see if this device is already in the table
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)dev) % D_TAB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = dtab[indx]) != NULL) {
+ while ((pt != NULL) && (pt->dev != dev))
+ pt = pt->fow;
+
+ /*
+ * found it, return a pointer to it
+ */
+ if (pt != NULL)
+ return(pt);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * not in table, we add it only if told to as this may just be a check
+ * to see if a device number is being used.
+ */
+ if (add == 0)
+ return(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * allocate a node for this device and add it to the front of the hash
+ * chain. Note we do not assign remaps values here, so the pt->list
+ * list must be NULL.
+ */
+ if ((pt = (DEVT *)malloc(sizeof(DEVT))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Device map table out of memory");
+ return(NULL);
+ }
+ pt->dev = dev;
+ pt->list = NULL;
+ pt->fow = dtab[indx];
+ dtab[indx] = pt;
+ return(pt);
+}
+/*
+ * map_dev()
+ * given an inode and device storage mask (the mask has a 1 for each bit
+ * the archive format is able to store in a header), we check for inode
+ * and device truncation and remap the device as required. Device mapping
+ * can also occur when during the read phase of append a device number was
+ * seen (and was marked as do not use during the write phase). WE ASSUME
+ * that unsigned longs are the same size or bigger than the fields used
+ * for ino_t and dev_t. If not the types will have to be changed.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if all ok, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+map_dev(register ARCHD *arcn, u_long dev_mask, u_long ino_mask)
+#else
+int
+map_dev(arcn, dev_mask, ino_mask)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ u_long dev_mask;
+ u_long ino_mask;
+#endif
+{
+ register DEVT *pt;
+ register DLIST *dpt;
+ static dev_t lastdev = 0; /* next device number to try */
+ int trc_ino = 0;
+ int trc_dev = 0;
+ ino_t trunc_bits = 0;
+ ino_t nino;
+
+ if (dtab == NULL)
+ return(0);
+ /*
+ * check for device and inode truncation, and extract the truncated
+ * bit pattern.
+ */
+ if ((arcn->sb.st_dev & (dev_t)dev_mask) != arcn->sb.st_dev)
+ ++trc_dev;
+ if ((nino = arcn->sb.st_ino & (ino_t)ino_mask) != arcn->sb.st_ino) {
+ ++trc_ino;
+ trunc_bits = arcn->sb.st_ino & (ino_t)(~ino_mask);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * see if this device is already being mapped, look up the device
+ * then find the truncation bit pattern which applies
+ */
+ if ((pt = chk_dev(arcn->sb.st_dev, 0)) != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * this device is already marked to be remapped
+ */
+ for (dpt = pt->list; dpt != NULL; dpt = dpt->fow)
+ if (dpt->trunc_bits == trunc_bits)
+ break;
+
+ if (dpt != NULL) {
+ /*
+ * we are being remapped for this device and pattern
+ * change the device number to be stored and return
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = dpt->dev;
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = nino;
+ return(0);
+ }
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * this device is not being remapped YET. if we do not have any
+ * form of truncation, we do not need a remap
+ */
+ if (!trc_ino && !trc_dev)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * we have truncation, have to add this as a device to remap
+ */
+ if ((pt = chk_dev(arcn->sb.st_dev, 1)) == NULL)
+ goto bad;
+
+ /*
+ * if we just have a truncated inode, we have to make sure that
+ * all future inodes that do not truncate (they have the
+ * truncation pattern of all 0's) continue to map to the same
+ * device number. We probably have already written inodes with
+ * this device number to the archive with the truncation
+ * pattern of all 0's. So we add the mapping for all 0's to the
+ * same device number.
+ */
+ if (!trc_dev && (trunc_bits != 0)) {
+ if ((dpt = (DLIST *)malloc(sizeof(DLIST))) == NULL)
+ goto bad;
+ dpt->trunc_bits = 0;
+ dpt->dev = arcn->sb.st_dev;
+ dpt->fow = pt->list;
+ pt->list = dpt;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * look for a device number not being used. We must watch for wrap
+ * around on lastdev (so we do not get stuck looking forever!)
+ */
+ while (++lastdev > 0) {
+ if (chk_dev(lastdev, 0) != NULL)
+ continue;
+ /*
+ * found an unused value. If we have reached truncation point
+ * for this format we are hosed, so we give up. Otherwise we
+ * mark it as being used.
+ */
+ if (((lastdev & ((dev_t)dev_mask)) != lastdev) ||
+ (chk_dev(lastdev, 1) == NULL))
+ goto bad;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if ((lastdev <= 0) || ((dpt = (DLIST *)malloc(sizeof(DLIST))) == NULL))
+ goto bad;
+
+ /*
+ * got a new device number, store it under this truncation pattern.
+ * change the device number this file is being stored with.
+ */
+ dpt->trunc_bits = trunc_bits;
+ dpt->dev = lastdev;
+ dpt->fow = pt->list;
+ pt->list = dpt;
+ arcn->sb.st_dev = lastdev;
+ arcn->sb.st_ino = nino;
+ return(0);
+
+ bad:
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to fix truncated inode/device field when storing %s",
+ arcn->name);
+ paxwarn(0, "Archive may create improper hard links when extracted");
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * directory access/mod time reset table routines (for directories READ by pax)
+ *
+ * The pax -t flag requires that access times of archive files to be the same
+ * before being read by pax. For regular files, access time is restored after
+ * the file has been copied. This database provides the same functionality for
+ * directories read during file tree traversal. Restoring directory access time
+ * is more complex than files since directories may be read several times until
+ * all the descendants in their subtree are visited by fts. Directory access
+ * and modification times are stored during the fts pre-order visit (done
+ * before any descendants in the subtree is visited) and restored after the
+ * fts post-order visit (after all the descendants have been visited). In the
+ * case of premature exit from a subtree (like from the effects of -n), any
+ * directory entries left in this database are reset during final cleanup
+ * operations of pax. Entries are hashed by inode number for fast lookup.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * atdir_start()
+ * create the directory access time database for directories READ by pax.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 is created ok, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+atdir_start(void)
+#else
+int
+atdir_start()
+#endif
+{
+ if (atab != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ if ((atab = (ATDIR **)calloc(A_TAB_SZ, sizeof(ATDIR *))) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Cannot allocate space for directory access time table");
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * atdir_end()
+ * walk through the directory access time table and reset the access time
+ * of any directory who still has an entry left in the database. These
+ * entries are for directories READ by pax
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+atdir_end(void)
+#else
+void
+atdir_end()
+#endif
+{
+ register ATDIR *pt;
+ register int i;
+
+ if (atab == NULL)
+ return;
+ /*
+ * for each non-empty hash table entry reset all the directories
+ * chained there.
+ */
+ for (i = 0; i < A_TAB_SZ; ++i) {
+ if ((pt = atab[i]) == NULL)
+ continue;
+ /*
+ * remember to force the times, set_ftime() looks at pmtime
+ * and patime, which only applies to things CREATED by pax,
+ * not read by pax. Read time reset is controlled by -t.
+ */
+ for (; pt != NULL; pt = pt->fow)
+ set_ftime(pt->name, pt->mtime, pt->atime, 1);
+ }
+}
+
+/*
+ * add_atdir()
+ * add a directory to the directory access time table. Table is hashed
+ * and chained by inode number. This is for directories READ by pax
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+add_atdir(char *fname, dev_t dev, ino_t ino, time_t mtime, time_t atime)
+#else
+void
+add_atdir(fname, dev, ino, mtime, atime)
+ char *fname;
+ dev_t dev;
+ ino_t ino;
+ time_t mtime;
+ time_t atime;
+#endif
+{
+ register ATDIR *pt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (atab == NULL)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * make sure this directory is not already in the table, if so just
+ * return (the older entry always has the correct time). The only
+ * way this will happen is when the same subtree can be traversed by
+ * different args to pax and the -n option is aborting fts out of a
+ * subtree before all the post-order visits have been made).
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)ino) % A_TAB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = atab[indx]) != NULL) {
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->ino == ino) && (pt->dev == dev))
+ break;
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * oops, already there. Leave it alone.
+ */
+ if (pt != NULL)
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * add it to the front of the hash chain
+ */
+ if ((pt = (ATDIR *)malloc(sizeof(ATDIR))) != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->name = strdup(fname)) != NULL) {
+ pt->dev = dev;
+ pt->ino = ino;
+ pt->mtime = mtime;
+ pt->atime = atime;
+ pt->fow = atab[indx];
+ atab[indx] = pt;
+ return;
+ }
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ }
+
+ paxwarn(1, "Directory access time reset table ran out of memory");
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * get_atdir()
+ * look up a directory by inode and device number to obtain the access
+ * and modification time you want to set to. If found, the modification
+ * and access time parameters are set and the entry is removed from the
+ * table (as it is no longer needed). These are for directories READ by
+ * pax
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if found, -1 if not found.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+get_atdir(dev_t dev, ino_t ino, time_t *mtime, time_t *atime)
+#else
+int
+get_atdir(dev, ino, mtime, atime)
+ dev_t dev;
+ ino_t ino;
+ time_t *mtime;
+ time_t *atime;
+#endif
+{
+ register ATDIR *pt;
+ register ATDIR **ppt;
+ register u_int indx;
+
+ if (atab == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+ /*
+ * hash by inode and search the chain for an inode and device match
+ */
+ indx = ((unsigned)ino) % A_TAB_SZ;
+ if ((pt = atab[indx]) == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+
+ ppt = &(atab[indx]);
+ while (pt != NULL) {
+ if ((pt->ino == ino) && (pt->dev == dev))
+ break;
+ /*
+ * no match, go to next one
+ */
+ ppt = &(pt->fow);
+ pt = pt->fow;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * return if we did not find it.
+ */
+ if (pt == NULL)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * found it. return the times and remove the entry from the table.
+ */
+ *ppt = pt->fow;
+ *mtime = pt->mtime;
+ *atime = pt->atime;
+ (void)free((char *)pt->name);
+ (void)free((char *)pt);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * directory access mode and time storage routines (for directories CREATED
+ * by pax).
+ *
+ * Pax requires that extracted directories, by default, have their access/mod
+ * times and permissions set to the values specified in the archive. During the
+ * actions of extracting (and creating the destination subtree during -rw copy)
+ * directories extracted may be modified after being created. Even worse is
+ * that these directories may have been created with file permissions which
+ * prohibits any descendants of these directories from being extracted. When
+ * directories are created by pax, access rights may be added to permit the
+ * creation of files in their subtree. Every time pax creates a directory, the
+ * times and file permissions specified by the archive are stored. After all
+ * files have been extracted (or copied), these directories have their times
+ * and file modes reset to the stored values. The directory info is restored in
+ * reverse order as entries were added to the data file from root to leaf. To
+ * restore atime properly, we must go backwards. The data file consists of
+ * records with two parts, the file name followed by a DIRDATA trailer. The
+ * fixed sized trailer contains the size of the name plus the off_t location in
+ * the file. To restore we work backwards through the file reading the trailer
+ * then the file name.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * dir_start()
+ * set up the directory time and file mode storage for directories CREATED
+ * by pax.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+dir_start(void)
+#else
+int
+dir_start()
+#endif
+{
+ char *pt;
+
+ if (dirfd != -1)
+ return(0);
+
+ /*
+ * unlink the file so it goes away at termination by itself
+ */
+ pt = strdup("/tmp/paxXXXXXXXXXX");
+ if ((dirfd = mkstemp(pt)) >= 0) {
+ (void)unlink(pt);
+ free(pt);
+ return(0);
+ }
+ paxwarn(1, "Unable to create temporary file for directory times: %s", pt);
+ free(pt);
+ return(-1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * add_dir()
+ * add the mode and times for a newly CREATED directory
+ * name is name of the directory, psb the stat buffer with the data in it,
+ * frc_mode is a flag that says whether to force the setting of the mode
+ * (ignoring the user set values for preserving file mode). Frc_mode is
+ * for the case where we created a file and found that the resulting
+ * directory was not writeable and the user asked for file modes to NOT
+ * be preserved. (we have to preserve what was created by default, so we
+ * have to force the setting at the end. this is stated explicitly in the
+ * pax spec)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+add_dir(char *name, int nlen, struct stat *psb, int frc_mode)
+#else
+void
+add_dir(name, nlen, psb, frc_mode)
+ char *name;
+ int nlen;
+ struct stat *psb;
+ int frc_mode;
+#endif
+{
+ DIRDATA dblk;
+
+ if (dirfd < 0)
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * get current position (where file name will start) so we can store it
+ * in the trailer
+ */
+ if ((dblk.npos = lseek(dirfd, 0L, SEEK_CUR)) < 0) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to store mode and times for directory: %s",name);
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * write the file name followed by the trailer
+ */
+ dblk.nlen = nlen + 1;
+ dblk.mode = psb->st_mode & 0xffff;
+ dblk.mtime = psb->st_mtime;
+ dblk.atime = psb->st_atime;
+ dblk.frc_mode = frc_mode;
+ if ((write(dirfd, name, dblk.nlen) == dblk.nlen) &&
+ (write(dirfd, (char *)&dblk, sizeof(dblk)) == sizeof(dblk))) {
+ ++dircnt;
+ return;
+ }
+
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to store mode and times for created directory: %s",name);
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * proc_dir()
+ * process all file modes and times stored for directories CREATED
+ * by pax
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+proc_dir(void)
+#else
+void
+proc_dir()
+#endif
+{
+ char name[PAXPATHLEN+1];
+ DIRDATA dblk;
+ u_long cnt;
+
+ if (dirfd < 0)
+ return;
+ /*
+ * read backwards through the file and process each directory
+ */
+ for (cnt = 0; cnt < dircnt; ++cnt) {
+ /*
+ * read the trailer, then the file name, if this fails
+ * just give up.
+ */
+ if (lseek(dirfd, -((off_t)sizeof(dblk)), SEEK_CUR) < 0)
+ break;
+ if (read(dirfd,(char *)&dblk, sizeof(dblk)) != sizeof(dblk))
+ break;
+ if (lseek(dirfd, dblk.npos, SEEK_SET) < 0)
+ break;
+ if (read(dirfd, name, dblk.nlen) != dblk.nlen)
+ break;
+ if (lseek(dirfd, dblk.npos, SEEK_SET) < 0)
+ break;
+
+ /*
+ * frc_mode set, make sure we set the file modes even if
+ * the user didn't ask for it (see file_subs.c for more info)
+ */
+ if (pmode || dblk.frc_mode)
+ set_pmode(name, dblk.mode);
+ if (patime || pmtime)
+ set_ftime(name, dblk.mtime, dblk.atime, 0);
+ }
+
+ (void)close(dirfd);
+ dirfd = -1;
+ if (cnt != dircnt)
+ paxwarn(1,"Unable to set mode and times for created directories");
+ return;
+}
+
+/*
+ * database independent routines
+ */
+
+/*
+ * st_hash()
+ * hashes filenames to a u_int for hashing into a table. Looks at the tail
+ * end of file, as this provides far better distribution than any other
+ * part of the name. For performance reasons we only care about the last
+ * MAXKEYLEN chars (should be at LEAST large enough to pick off the file
+ * name). Was tested on 500,000 name file tree traversal from the root
+ * and gave almost a perfectly uniform distribution of keys when used with
+ * prime sized tables (MAXKEYLEN was 128 in test). Hashes (sizeof int)
+ * chars at a time and pads with 0 for last addition.
+ * Return:
+ * the hash value of the string MOD (%) the table size.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+u_int
+st_hash(char *name, int len, int tabsz)
+#else
+u_int
+st_hash(name, len, tabsz)
+ char *name;
+ int len;
+ int tabsz;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+ register char *dest;
+ register char *end;
+ register int i;
+ register u_int key = 0;
+ register int steps;
+ register int res;
+ u_int val;
+
+ /*
+ * only look at the tail up to MAXKEYLEN, we do not need to waste
+ * time here (remember these are pathnames, the tail is what will
+ * spread out the keys)
+ */
+ if (len > MAXKEYLEN) {
+ pt = &(name[len - MAXKEYLEN]);
+ len = MAXKEYLEN;
+ } else
+ pt = name;
+
+ /*
+ * calculate the number of u_int size steps in the string and if
+ * there is a runt to deal with
+ */
+ steps = len/sizeof(u_int);
+ res = len % sizeof(u_int);
+
+ /*
+ * add up the value of the string in unsigned integer sized pieces
+ * too bad we cannot have unsigned int aligned strings, then we
+ * could avoid the expensive copy.
+ */
+ for (i = 0; i < steps; ++i) {
+ end = pt + sizeof(u_int);
+ dest = (char *)&val;
+ while (pt < end)
+ *dest++ = *pt++;
+ key += val;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * add in the runt padded with zero to the right
+ */
+ if (res) {
+ val = 0;
+ end = pt + res;
+ dest = (char *)&val;
+ while (pt < end)
+ *dest++ = *pt++;
+ key += val;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * return the result mod the table size
+ */
+ return(key % tabsz);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: tables.h,v 1.2 1996/06/23 14:20:43 deraadt Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: tables.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:47 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)tables.h 8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+ */
+
+/*
+ * data structures and constants used by the different databases kept by pax
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Hash Table Sizes MUST BE PRIME, if set too small performance suffers.
+ * Probably safe to expect 500000 inodes per tape. Assuming good key
+ * distribution (inodes) chains of under 50 long (worse case) is ok.
+ */
+#define L_TAB_SZ 2503 /* hard link hash table size */
+#define F_TAB_SZ 50503 /* file time hash table size */
+#define N_TAB_SZ 541 /* interactive rename hash table */
+#define D_TAB_SZ 317 /* unique device mapping table */
+#define A_TAB_SZ 317 /* ftree dir access time reset table */
+#define MAXKEYLEN 64 /* max number of chars for hash */
+
+/*
+ * file hard link structure (hashed by dev/ino and chained) used to find the
+ * hard links in a file system or with some archive formats (cpio)
+ */
+typedef struct hrdlnk {
+ char *name; /* name of first file seen with this ino/dev */
+ dev_t dev; /* files device number */
+ ino_t ino; /* files inode number */
+ u_long nlink; /* expected link count */
+ struct hrdlnk *fow;
+} HRDLNK;
+
+/*
+ * Archive write update file time table (the -u, -C flag), hashed by filename.
+ * Filenames are stored in a scratch file at seek offset into the file. The
+ * file time (mod time) and the file name length (for a quick check) are
+ * stored in a hash table node. We were forced to use a scratch file because
+ * with -u, the mtime for every node in the archive must always be available
+ * to compare against (and this data can get REALLY large with big archives).
+ * By being careful to read only when we have a good chance of a match, the
+ * performance loss is not measurable (and the size of the archive we can
+ * handle is greatly increased).
+ */
+typedef struct ftm {
+ int namelen; /* file name length */
+ time_t mtime; /* files last modification time */
+ off_t seek; /* loacation in scratch file */
+ struct ftm *fow;
+} FTM;
+
+/*
+ * Interactive rename table (-i flag), hashed by orig filename.
+ * We assume this will not be a large table as this mapping data can only be
+ * obtained through interactive input by the user. Nobody is going to type in
+ * changes for 500000 files? We use chaining to resolve collisions.
+ */
+
+typedef struct namt {
+ char *oname; /* old name */
+ char *nname; /* new name typed in by the user */
+ struct namt *fow;
+} NAMT;
+
+/*
+ * Unique device mapping tables. Some protocols (e.g. cpio) require that the
+ * <c_dev,c_ino> pair will uniquely identify a file in an archive unless they
+ * are links to the same file. Appending to archives can break this. For those
+ * protocols that have this requirement we map c_dev to a unique value not seen
+ * in the archive when we append. We also try to handle inode truncation with
+ * this table. (When the inode field in the archive header are too small, we
+ * remap the dev on writes to remove accidental collisions).
+ *
+ * The list is hashed by device number using chain collision resolution. Off of
+ * each DEVT are linked the various remaps for this device based on those bits
+ * in the inode which were truncated. For example if we are just remapping to
+ * avoid a device number during an update append, off the DEVT we would have
+ * only a single DLIST that has a truncation id of 0 (no inode bits were
+ * stripped for this device so far). When we spot inode truncation we create
+ * a new mapping based on the set of bits in the inode which were stripped off.
+ * so if the top four bits of the inode are stripped and they have a pattern of
+ * 0110...... (where . are those bits not truncated) we would have a mapping
+ * assigned for all inodes that has the same 0110.... pattern (with this dev
+ * number of course). This keeps the mapping sparse and should be able to store
+ * close to the limit of files which can be represented by the optimal
+ * combination of dev and inode bits, and without creating a fouled up archive.
+ * Note we also remap truncated devs in the same way (an exercise for the
+ * dedicated reader; always wanted to say that...:)
+ */
+
+typedef struct devt {
+ dev_t dev; /* the orig device number we now have to map */
+ struct devt *fow; /* new device map list */
+ struct dlist *list; /* map list based on inode truncation bits */
+} DEVT;
+
+typedef struct dlist {
+ ino_t trunc_bits; /* truncation pattern for a specific map */
+ dev_t dev; /* the new device id we use */
+ struct dlist *fow;
+} DLIST;
+
+/*
+ * ftree directory access time reset table. When we are done with with a
+ * subtree we reset the access and mod time of the directory when the tflag is
+ * set. Not really explicitly specified in the pax spec, but easy and fast to
+ * do (and this may have even been intended in the spec, it is not clear).
+ * table is hashed by inode with chaining.
+ */
+
+typedef struct atdir {
+ char *name; /* name of directory to reset */
+ dev_t dev; /* dev and inode for fast lookup */
+ ino_t ino;
+ time_t mtime; /* access and mod time to reset to */
+ time_t atime;
+ struct atdir *fow;
+} ATDIR;
+
+/*
+ * created directory time and mode storage entry. After pax is finished during
+ * extraction or copy, we must reset directory access modes and times that
+ * may have been modified after creation (they no longer have the specified
+ * times and/or modes). We must reset time in the reverse order of creation,
+ * because entries are added from the top of the file tree to the bottom.
+ * We MUST reset times from leaf to root (it will not work the other
+ * direction). Entries are recorded into a spool file to make reverse
+ * reading faster.
+ */
+
+typedef struct dirdata {
+ int nlen; /* length of the directory name (includes \0) */
+ off_t npos; /* position in file where this dir name starts */
+ mode_t mode; /* file mode to restore */
+ time_t mtime; /* mtime to set */
+ time_t atime; /* atime to set */
+ int frc_mode; /* do we force mode settings? */
+} DIRDATA;
--- /dev/null
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1996 SigmaSoft, Th. Lockert
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\" This product includes software developed by SigmaSoft, Th. Lockert.
+.\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
+.\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" $OpenBSD: tar.1,v 1.17 1998/09/23 00:13:49 aaron Exp $
+.\"
+.Dd June 11, 1996
+.Dt TAR 1
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm tar
+.Nd tape archiver
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm
+.No [-]{crtux}[befhmopvwzHLPXZ014578]
+.Op Ar archive
+.Op Ar blocksize
+.\" XXX how to do this right?
+.No [-C
+.Ar directory
+.No ]
+.No [-s
+.Ar replstr
+.No ]
+.Ar file1
+.Op Ar file2 ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm
+command creates, adds files to, or extracts files from an
+archive file in \*Qtar\*U format. A tar archive is often
+stored on a magnetic tape, but can be a floppy or a regular
+disk file.
+.Pp
+One of the following flags must be present:
+.Bl -tag -width Ar
+.It Fl c
+Create new archive, or overwrite an existing archive,
+adding the specified files to it.
+.It Fl r
+Append the named new files to existing archive. Note that
+this will only work on media on which an end-of-file mark
+can be overwritten.
+.It Fl t
+List contents of archive. If any files are named on the
+command line, only those files will be listed.
+.It Fl u
+Alias for
+.Fl r .
+.It Fl x
+Extract files from archive. If any files are named on the
+command line, only those files will be extracted from the
+archive. If more than one copy of a file exists in the
+archive, later copies will overwrite earlier copies during
+extraction. The file mode and modification time are preserved
+if possible. The file mode is subject to modification by the
+.Xr umask 2 .
+.El
+.Pp
+In addition to the flags mentioned above, any of the following
+flags may be used:
+.Bl -tag -width Ar
+.It Fl b Ar "blocking factor"
+Set blocking factor to use for the archive.
+.Nm
+uses 512 byte blocks. The default is 20, the maximum is 126.
+Archives with a blocking factor larger 63 violate the
+.Tn POSIX
+standard and will not be portable to all systems.
+.It Fl e
+Stop after first error.
+.It Fl f Ar archive
+Filename where the archive is stored. Defaults to
+.Pa /dev/rst0 .
+.It Fl h
+Follow symbolic links as if they were normal files
+or directories.
+.It Fl m
+Do not preserve modification time.
+.It Fl O
+Write old-style (non-POSIX) archives.
+.It Fl o
+Don't write directory information that the older (V7) style
+.Nm
+is unable to decode.
+This implies the
+.Fl O
+flag.
+.It Fl p
+Preserve user and group ID as well as file mode regardless of
+the current
+.Xr umask 2 .
+The setuid and setgid bits are only preserved if the user is
+the superuser. Only meaningful in conjunction with the
+.Fl x
+flag.
+.It Fl s Ar replstr
+Modify the file or archive member names specified by the
+.Ar pattern
+or
+.Ar file
+operands according to the substitution expression
+.Ar replstr ,
+using the syntax of the
+.Xr ed 1
+utility regular expressions.
+The format of these regular expressions are:
+.Dl /old/new/[gp]
+As in
+.Xr ed 1 ,
+.Cm old
+is a basic regular expression and
+.Cm new
+can contain an ampersand (&), \\n (where n is a digit) back-references,
+or subexpression matching.
+The
+.Cm old
+string may also contain
+.Dv <newline>
+characters.
+Any non-null character can be used as a delimiter (/ is shown here).
+Multiple
+.Fl s
+expressions can be specified.
+The expressions are applied in the order they are specified on the
+command line, terminating with the first successful substitution.
+The optional trailing
+.Cm g
+continues to apply the substitution expression to the pathname substring
+which starts with the first character following the end of the last successful
+substitution. The first unsuccessful substitution stops the operation of the
+.Cm g
+option.
+The optional trailing
+.Cm p
+will cause the final result of a successful substitution to be written to
+.Dv standard error
+in the following format:
+.Dl <original pathname> >> <new pathname>
+File or archive member names that substitute to the empty string
+are not selected and will be skipped.
+.It Fl v
+Verbose operation mode.
+.It Fl w
+Interactively rename files. This option causes
+.Nm
+to prompt the user for the filename to use when storing or
+extracting files in an archive.
+.It Fl z
+Compress archive using gzip.
+.It Fl C Ar directory
+This is a positional argument which sets the working directory for the
+following files. When extracting, files will be extracted into
+the specified directory; when creating, the specified files will be matched
+from the directory.
+.It Fl H
+Follow symlinks given on command line only.
+.It Fl L
+Follow all symlinks.
+.It Fl P
+Do not strip leading slashes (``/'') from pathnames.
+The default is to strip leading slashes.
+.It Fl X
+Do not cross mount points in the file system.
+.It Fl Z
+Compress archive using compress.
+.El
+.Pp
+The options
+.Op Fl 014578
+can be used to select one of the compiled-in backup devices,
+.Pa /dev/rstN .
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/dev/rst0"
+.It Pa /dev/rst0
+default archive name
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr cpio 1 ,
+.Xr pax 1
+.Sh AUTHOR
+Keith Muller at the University of California, San Diego.
+.Sh ERRORS
+.Nm
+will exit with one of the following values:
+.Bl -tag -width 2n
+.It 0
+All files were processed successfully.
+.It 1
+An error occurred.
+.El
+.Pp
+Whenever
+.Nm
+cannot create a file or a link when extracting an archive or cannot
+find a file while writing an archive, or cannot preserve the user
+ID, group ID, file mode or access and modification times when the
+.Fl p
+option is specified, a diagnostic message is written to standard
+error and a non-zero exit value will be returned, but processing
+will continue. In the case where
+.Nm
+cannot create a link to a file,
+.Nm
+will not create a second copy of the file.
+.Pp
+If the extraction of a file from an archive is prematurely terminated
+by a signal or error,
+.Nm
+may have only partially extracted the file the user wanted.
+Additionally, the file modes of extracted files and directories may
+have incorrect file bits, and the modification and access times may
+be wrong.
+.Pp
+If the creation of an archive is prematurely terminated by a signal
+or error,
+.Nm
+may have only partially created the archive which may violate the
+specific archive format specification.
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: tar.c,v 1.13 1998/09/26 21:29:41 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: tar.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:49 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)tar.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: tar.c,v 1.13 1998/09/26 21:29:41 millert Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+#include "tar.h"
+
+/*
+ * Routines for reading, writing and header identify of various versions of tar
+ */
+
+static u_long tar_chksm __P((register char *, register int));
+static char *name_split __P((register char *, register int));
+static int ul_oct __P((u_long, register char *, register int, int));
+#ifndef NET2_STAT
+static int uqd_oct __P((u_quad_t, register char *, register int, int));
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Routines common to all versions of tar
+ */
+
+static int tar_nodir; /* do not write dirs under old tar */
+
+/*
+ * tar_endwr()
+ * add the tar trailer of two null blocks
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise (what wr_skip returns)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_endwr(void)
+#else
+int
+tar_endwr()
+#endif
+{
+ return(wr_skip((off_t)(NULLCNT*BLKMULT)));
+}
+
+/*
+ * tar_endrd()
+ * no cleanup needed here, just return size of trailer (for append)
+ * Return:
+ * size of trailer (2 * BLKMULT)
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+off_t
+tar_endrd(void)
+#else
+off_t
+tar_endrd()
+#endif
+{
+ return((off_t)(NULLCNT*BLKMULT));
+}
+
+/*
+ * tar_trail()
+ * Called to determine if a header block is a valid trailer. We are passed
+ * the block, the in_sync flag (which tells us we are in resync mode;
+ * looking for a valid header), and cnt (which starts at zero) which is
+ * used to count the number of empty blocks we have seen so far.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a valid trailer, -1 if not a valid trailer, or 1 if the block
+ * could never contain a header.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_trail(register char *buf, register int in_resync, register int *cnt)
+#else
+int
+tar_trail(buf, in_resync, cnt)
+ register char *buf;
+ register int in_resync;
+ register int *cnt;
+#endif
+{
+ register int i;
+
+ /*
+ * look for all zero, trailer is two consecutive blocks of zero
+ */
+ for (i = 0; i < BLKMULT; ++i) {
+ if (buf[i] != '\0')
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * if not all zero it is not a trailer, but MIGHT be a header.
+ */
+ if (i != BLKMULT)
+ return(-1);
+
+ /*
+ * When given a zero block, we must be careful!
+ * If we are not in resync mode, check for the trailer. Have to watch
+ * out that we do not mis-identify file data as the trailer, so we do
+ * NOT try to id a trailer during resync mode. During resync mode we
+ * might as well throw this block out since a valid header can NEVER be
+ * a block of all 0 (we must have a valid file name).
+ */
+ if (!in_resync && (++*cnt >= NULLCNT))
+ return(0);
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ul_oct()
+ * convert an unsigned long to an octal string. many oddball field
+ * termination characters are used by the various versions of tar in the
+ * different fields. term selects which kind to use. str is '0' padded
+ * at the front to len. we are unable to use only one format as many old
+ * tar readers are very cranky about this.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the number fit into the string, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+ul_oct(u_long val, register char *str, register int len, int term)
+#else
+static int
+ul_oct(val, str, len, term)
+ u_long val;
+ register char *str;
+ register int len;
+ int term;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * term selects the appropriate character(s) for the end of the string
+ */
+ pt = str + len - 1;
+ switch(term) {
+ case 3:
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ break;
+ case 2:
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ break;
+ case 1:
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ break;
+ case 0:
+ default:
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * convert and blank pad if there is space
+ */
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)(val & 0x7);
+ if ((val = val >> 3) == (u_long)0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ while (pt >= str)
+ *pt-- = '0';
+ if (val != (u_long)0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+#ifndef NET2_STAT
+/*
+ * uqd_oct()
+ * convert an u_quad_t to an octal string. one of many oddball field
+ * termination characters are used by the various versions of tar in the
+ * different fields. term selects which kind to use. str is '0' padded
+ * at the front to len. we are unable to use only one format as many old
+ * tar readers are very cranky about this.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if the number fit into the string, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static int
+uqd_oct(u_quad_t val, register char *str, register int len, int term)
+#else
+static int
+uqd_oct(val, str, len, term)
+ u_quad_t val;
+ register char *str;
+ register int len;
+ int term;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * term selects the appropriate character(s) for the end of the string
+ */
+ pt = str + len - 1;
+ switch(term) {
+ case 3:
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ break;
+ case 2:
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ break;
+ case 1:
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ break;
+ case 0:
+ default:
+ *pt-- = '\0';
+ *pt-- = ' ';
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * convert and blank pad if there is space
+ */
+ while (pt >= str) {
+ *pt-- = '0' + (char)(val & 0x7);
+ if ((val = val >> 3) == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ while (pt >= str)
+ *pt-- = '0';
+ if (val != (u_quad_t)0)
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * tar_chksm()
+ * calculate the checksum for a tar block counting the checksum field as
+ * all blanks (BLNKSUM is that value pre-calculated, the sume of 8 blanks).
+ * NOTE: we use len to short circuit summing 0's on write since we ALWAYS
+ * pad headers with 0.
+ * Return:
+ * unsigned long checksum
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static u_long
+tar_chksm(register char *blk, register int len)
+#else
+static u_long
+tar_chksm(blk, len)
+ register char *blk;
+ register int len;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *stop;
+ register char *pt;
+ u_long chksm = BLNKSUM; /* inital value is checksum field sum */
+
+ /*
+ * add the part of the block before the checksum field
+ */
+ pt = blk;
+ stop = blk + CHK_OFFSET;
+ while (pt < stop)
+ chksm += (u_long)(*pt++ & 0xff);
+ /*
+ * move past the checksum field and keep going, spec counts the
+ * checksum field as the sum of 8 blanks (which is pre-computed as
+ * BLNKSUM).
+ * ASSUMED: len is greater than CHK_OFFSET. (len is where our 0 padding
+ * starts, no point in summing zero's)
+ */
+ pt += CHK_LEN;
+ stop = blk + len;
+ while (pt < stop)
+ chksm += (u_long)(*pt++ & 0xff);
+ return(chksm);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Routines for old BSD style tar (also made portable to sysV tar)
+ */
+
+/*
+ * tar_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a valid tar header (and not a USTAR
+ * header). We have to be on the lookout for those pesky blocks of all
+ * zero's.
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a tar header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_id(register char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+tar_id(blk, size)
+ register char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_TAR *hd;
+ register HD_USTAR *uhd;
+
+ if (size < BLKMULT)
+ return(-1);
+ hd = (HD_TAR *)blk;
+ uhd = (HD_USTAR *)blk;
+
+ /*
+ * check for block of zero's first, a simple and fast test, then make
+ * sure this is not a ustar header by looking for the ustar magic
+ * cookie. We should use TMAGLEN, but some USTAR archive programs are
+ * wrong and create archives missing the \0. Last we check the
+ * checksum. If this is ok we have to assume it is a valid header.
+ */
+ if (hd->name[0] == '\0')
+ return(-1);
+ if (strncmp(uhd->magic, TMAGIC, TMAGLEN - 1) == 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (asc_ul(hd->chksum,sizeof(hd->chksum),OCT) != tar_chksm(blk,BLKMULT))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tar_opt()
+ * handle tar format specific -o options
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_opt(void)
+#else
+int
+tar_opt()
+#endif
+{
+ OPLIST *opt;
+
+ while ((opt = opt_next()) != NULL) {
+ if (strcmp(opt->name, TAR_OPTION) ||
+ strcmp(opt->value, TAR_NODIR)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Unknown tar format -o option/value pair %s=%s",
+ opt->name, opt->value);
+ paxwarn(1,"%s=%s is the only supported tar format option",
+ TAR_OPTION, TAR_NODIR);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * we only support one option, and only when writing
+ */
+ if ((act != APPND) && (act != ARCHIVE)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "%s=%s is only supported when writing.",
+ opt->name, opt->value);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ tar_nodir = 1;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+
+/*
+ * tar_rd()
+ * extract the values out of block already determined to be a tar header.
+ * store the values in the ARCHD parameter.
+ * Return:
+ * 0
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_rd(register ARCHD *arcn, register char *buf)
+#else
+int
+tar_rd(arcn, buf)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register char *buf;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_TAR *hd;
+ register char *pt;
+
+ /*
+ * we only get proper sized buffers passed to us
+ */
+ if (tar_id(buf, BLKMULT) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->org_name = arcn->name;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 1;
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+
+ /*
+ * copy out the name and values in the stat buffer
+ */
+ hd = (HD_TAR *)buf;
+ arcn->nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->name, hd->name, sizeof(arcn->name) - 1);
+ arcn->name[arcn->nlen] = '\0';
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)(asc_ul(hd->mode,sizeof(hd->mode),OCT) &
+ 0xfff);
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)asc_ul(hd->uid, sizeof(hd->uid), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)asc_ul(hd->gid, sizeof(hd->gid), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (size_t)asc_ul(hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)asc_ul(hd->mtime, sizeof(hd->mtime), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_ctime = arcn->sb.st_atime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+
+ /*
+ * have to look at the last character, it may be a '/' and that is used
+ * to encode this as a directory
+ */
+ pt = &(arcn->name[arcn->nlen - 1]);
+ arcn->pad = 0;
+ arcn->skip = 0;
+ switch(hd->linkflag) {
+ case SYMTYPE:
+ /*
+ * symbolic link, need to get the link name and set the type in
+ * the st_mode so -v printing will look correct.
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_SLK;
+ arcn->ln_nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->ln_name, hd->linkname,
+ sizeof(arcn->ln_name) - 1);
+ arcn->ln_name[arcn->ln_nlen] = '\0';
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFLNK;
+ break;
+ case LNKTYPE:
+ /*
+ * hard link, need to get the link name, set the type in the
+ * st_mode and st_nlink so -v printing will look better.
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_HLK;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 2;
+ arcn->ln_nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->ln_name, hd->linkname,
+ sizeof(arcn->ln_name) - 1);
+ arcn->ln_name[arcn->ln_nlen] = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * no idea of what type this thing really points at, but
+ * we set something for printing only.
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFREG;
+ break;
+ case DIRTYPE:
+ /*
+ * It is a directory, set the mode for -v printing
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_DIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFDIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 2;
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ break;
+ case AREGTYPE:
+ case REGTYPE:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * If we have a trailing / this is a directory and NOT a file.
+ */
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ if (*pt == '/') {
+ /*
+ * it is a directory, set the mode for -v printing
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_DIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFDIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 2;
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * have a file that will be followed by data. Set the
+ * skip value to the size field and caluculate the size
+ * of the padding.
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_REG;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFREG;
+ arcn->pad = TAR_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ arcn->skip = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * strip off any trailing slash.
+ */
+ if (*pt == '/') {
+ *pt = '\0';
+ --arcn->nlen;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tar_wr()
+ * write a tar header for the file specified in the ARCHD to the archive.
+ * Have to check for file types that cannot be stored and file names that
+ * are too long. Be careful of the term (last arg) to ul_oct, each field
+ * of tar has it own spec for the termination character(s).
+ * ASSUMED: space after header in header block is zero filled
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if file has data to be written after the header, 1 if file has NO
+ * data to write after the header, -1 if archive write failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tar_wr(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+tar_wr(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_TAR *hd;
+ int len;
+ char hdblk[sizeof(HD_TAR)];
+
+ /*
+ * check for those file system types which tar cannot store
+ */
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_DIR:
+ /*
+ * user asked that dirs not be written to the archive
+ */
+ if (tar_nodir)
+ return(1);
+ break;
+ case PAX_CHR:
+ paxwarn(1, "Tar cannot archive a character device %s",
+ arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ case PAX_BLK:
+ paxwarn(1, "Tar cannot archive a block device %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ case PAX_SCK:
+ paxwarn(1, "Tar cannot archive a socket %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ case PAX_FIF:
+ paxwarn(1, "Tar cannot archive a fifo %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ case PAX_HLK:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ if (arcn->ln_nlen > sizeof(hd->linkname)) {
+ paxwarn(1,"Link name too long for tar %s", arcn->ln_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ break;
+ case PAX_REG:
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ default:
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * check file name len, remember extra char for dirs (the / at the end)
+ */
+ len = arcn->nlen;
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_DIR)
+ ++len;
+ if (len >= sizeof(hd->name)) {
+ paxwarn(1, "File name too long for tar %s", arcn->name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * copy the data out of the ARCHD into the tar header based on the type
+ * of the file. Remember many tar readers want the unused fields to be
+ * padded with zero. We set the linkflag field (type), the linkname
+ * (or zero if not used),the size, and set the padding (if any) to be
+ * added after the file data (0 for all other types, as they only have
+ * a header)
+ */
+ hd = (HD_TAR *)hdblk;
+ l_strncpy(hd->name, arcn->name, sizeof(hd->name) - 1);
+ hd->name[sizeof(hd->name) - 1] = '\0';
+ arcn->pad = 0;
+
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_DIR) {
+ /*
+ * directories are the same as files, except have a filename
+ * that ends with a /, we add the slash here. No data follows,
+ * dirs, so no pad.
+ */
+ hd->linkflag = AREGTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+ hd->name[len-1] = '/';
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 1))
+ goto out;
+ } else if (arcn->type == PAX_SLK) {
+ /*
+ * no data follows this file, so no pad
+ */
+ hd->linkflag = SYMTYPE;
+ l_strncpy(hd->linkname,arcn->ln_name, sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1);
+ hd->linkname[sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1] = '\0';
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 1))
+ goto out;
+ } else if ((arcn->type == PAX_HLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HRG)) {
+ /*
+ * no data follows this file, so no pad
+ */
+ hd->linkflag = LNKTYPE;
+ l_strncpy(hd->linkname,arcn->ln_name, sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1);
+ hd->linkname[sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1] = '\0';
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 1))
+ goto out;
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * data follows this file, so set the pad
+ */
+ hd->linkflag = AREGTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->size,
+ sizeof(hd->size), 1)) {
+# else
+ if (uqd_oct((u_quad_t)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->size,
+ sizeof(hd->size), 1)) {
+# endif
+ paxwarn(1,"File is too large for tar %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ arcn->pad = TAR_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * copy those fields that are independent of the type
+ */
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mode, hd->mode, sizeof(hd->mode), 0) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_uid, hd->uid, sizeof(hd->uid), 0) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_gid, hd->gid, sizeof(hd->gid), 0) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mtime, hd->mtime, sizeof(hd->mtime), 1))
+ goto out;
+
+ /*
+ * calculate and add the checksum, then write the header. A return of
+ * 0 tells the caller to now write the file data, 1 says no data needs
+ * to be written
+ */
+ if (ul_oct(tar_chksm(hdblk, sizeof(HD_TAR)), hd->chksum,
+ sizeof(hd->chksum), 3))
+ goto out;
+ if (wr_rdbuf(hdblk, sizeof(HD_TAR)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (wr_skip((off_t)(BLKMULT - sizeof(HD_TAR))) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CTG) || (arcn->type == PAX_REG))
+ return(0);
+ return(1);
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * header field is out of range
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Tar header field is too small for %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * Routines for POSIX ustar
+ */
+
+/*
+ * ustar_strd()
+ * initialization for ustar read
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ustar_strd(void)
+#else
+int
+ustar_strd()
+#endif
+{
+ if ((usrtb_start() < 0) || (grptb_start() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ustar_stwr()
+ * initialization for ustar write
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if ok, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ustar_stwr(void)
+#else
+int
+ustar_stwr()
+#endif
+{
+ if ((uidtb_start() < 0) || (gidtb_start() < 0))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ustar_id()
+ * determine if a block given to us is a valid ustar header. We have to
+ * be on the lookout for those pesky blocks of all zero's
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if a ustar header, -1 otherwise
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ustar_id(char *blk, int size)
+#else
+int
+ustar_id(blk, size)
+ char *blk;
+ int size;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_USTAR *hd;
+
+ if (size < BLKMULT)
+ return(-1);
+ hd = (HD_USTAR *)blk;
+
+ /*
+ * check for block of zero's first, a simple and fast test then check
+ * ustar magic cookie. We should use TMAGLEN, but some USTAR archive
+ * programs are fouled up and create archives missing the \0. Last we
+ * check the checksum. If ok we have to assume it is a valid header.
+ */
+ if (hd->name[0] == '\0')
+ return(-1);
+ if (strncmp(hd->magic, TMAGIC, TMAGLEN - 1) != 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (asc_ul(hd->chksum,sizeof(hd->chksum),OCT) != tar_chksm(blk,BLKMULT))
+ return(-1);
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ustar_rd()
+ * extract the values out of block already determined to be a ustar header.
+ * store the values in the ARCHD parameter.
+ * Return:
+ * 0
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ustar_rd(register ARCHD *arcn, register char *buf)
+#else
+int
+ustar_rd(arcn, buf)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+ register char *buf;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_USTAR *hd;
+ register char *dest;
+ register int cnt = 0;
+ dev_t devmajor;
+ dev_t devminor;
+
+ /*
+ * we only get proper sized buffers
+ */
+ if (ustar_id(buf, BLKMULT) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ arcn->org_name = arcn->name;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 1;
+ arcn->pat = NULL;
+ arcn->nlen = 0;
+ hd = (HD_USTAR *)buf;
+
+ /*
+ * see if the filename is split into two parts. if, so joint the parts.
+ * we copy the prefix first and add a / between the prefix and name.
+ */
+ dest = arcn->name;
+ if (*(hd->prefix) != '\0') {
+ cnt = l_strncpy(dest, hd->prefix, sizeof(arcn->name) - 2);
+ dest += cnt;
+ *dest++ = '/';
+ cnt++;
+ }
+ arcn->nlen = cnt + l_strncpy(dest, hd->name, sizeof(arcn->name) - cnt);
+ arcn->name[arcn->nlen] = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * follow the spec to the letter. we should only have mode bits, strip
+ * off all other crud we may be passed.
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_mode = (mode_t)(asc_ul(hd->mode, sizeof(hd->mode), OCT) &
+ 0xfff);
+ arcn->sb.st_size = (size_t)asc_ul(hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_mtime = (time_t)asc_ul(hd->mtime, sizeof(hd->mtime), OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_ctime = arcn->sb.st_atime = arcn->sb.st_mtime;
+
+ /*
+ * If we can find the ascii names for gname and uname in the password
+ * and group files we will use the uid's and gid they bind. Otherwise
+ * we use the uid and gid values stored in the header. (This is what
+ * the posix spec wants).
+ */
+ hd->gname[sizeof(hd->gname) - 1] = '\0';
+ if (gid_name(hd->gname, &(arcn->sb.st_gid)) < 0)
+ arcn->sb.st_gid = (gid_t)asc_ul(hd->gid, sizeof(hd->gid), OCT);
+ hd->uname[sizeof(hd->uname) - 1] = '\0';
+ if (uid_name(hd->uname, &(arcn->sb.st_uid)) < 0)
+ arcn->sb.st_uid = (uid_t)asc_ul(hd->uid, sizeof(hd->uid), OCT);
+
+ /*
+ * set the defaults, these may be changed depending on the file type
+ */
+ arcn->ln_name[0] = '\0';
+ arcn->ln_nlen = 0;
+ arcn->pad = 0;
+ arcn->skip = 0;
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = (dev_t)0;
+
+ /*
+ * set the mode and PAX type according to the typeflag in the header
+ */
+ switch(hd->typeflag) {
+ case FIFOTYPE:
+ arcn->type = PAX_FIF;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFIFO;
+ break;
+ case DIRTYPE:
+ arcn->type = PAX_DIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFDIR;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 2;
+
+ /*
+ * Some programs that create ustar archives append a '/'
+ * to the pathname for directories. This clearly violates
+ * ustar specs, but we will silently strip it off anyway.
+ */
+ if (arcn->name[arcn->nlen - 1] == '/')
+ arcn->name[--arcn->nlen] = '\0';
+ break;
+ case BLKTYPE:
+ case CHRTYPE:
+ /*
+ * this type requires the rdev field to be set.
+ */
+ if (hd->typeflag == BLKTYPE) {
+ arcn->type = PAX_BLK;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFBLK;
+ } else {
+ arcn->type = PAX_CHR;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFCHR;
+ }
+ devmajor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->devmajor,sizeof(hd->devmajor),OCT);
+ devminor = (dev_t)asc_ul(hd->devminor,sizeof(hd->devminor),OCT);
+ arcn->sb.st_rdev = TODEV(devmajor, devminor);
+ break;
+ case SYMTYPE:
+ case LNKTYPE:
+ if (hd->typeflag == SYMTYPE) {
+ arcn->type = PAX_SLK;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFLNK;
+ } else {
+ arcn->type = PAX_HLK;
+ /*
+ * so printing looks better
+ */
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFREG;
+ arcn->sb.st_nlink = 2;
+ }
+ /*
+ * copy the link name
+ */
+ arcn->ln_nlen = l_strncpy(arcn->ln_name, hd->linkname,
+ sizeof(arcn->ln_name) - 1);
+ arcn->ln_name[arcn->ln_nlen] = '\0';
+ break;
+ case CONTTYPE:
+ case AREGTYPE:
+ case REGTYPE:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * these types have file data that follows. Set the skip and
+ * pad fields.
+ */
+ arcn->type = PAX_REG;
+ arcn->pad = TAR_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+ arcn->skip = arcn->sb.st_size;
+ arcn->sb.st_mode |= S_IFREG;
+ break;
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * ustar_wr()
+ * write a ustar header for the file specified in the ARCHD to the archive
+ * Have to check for file types that cannot be stored and file names that
+ * are too long. Be careful of the term (last arg) to ul_oct, we only use
+ * '\0' for the termination character (this is different than picky tar)
+ * ASSUMED: space after header in header block is zero filled
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if file has data to be written after the header, 1 if file has NO
+ * data to write after the header, -1 if archive write failed
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+ustar_wr(register ARCHD *arcn)
+#else
+int
+ustar_wr(arcn)
+ register ARCHD *arcn;
+#endif
+{
+ register HD_USTAR *hd;
+ register char *pt;
+ char hdblk[sizeof(HD_USTAR)];
+
+ /*
+ * check for those file system types ustar cannot store
+ */
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_SCK) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Ustar cannot archive a socket %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * check the length of the linkname
+ */
+ if (((arcn->type == PAX_SLK) || (arcn->type == PAX_HLK) ||
+ (arcn->type == PAX_HRG)) && (arcn->ln_nlen > sizeof(hd->linkname))){
+ paxwarn(1, "Link name too long for ustar %s", arcn->ln_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+
+ /*
+ * split the path name into prefix and name fields (if needed). if
+ * pt != arcn->name, the name has to be split
+ */
+ if ((pt = name_split(arcn->name, arcn->nlen)) == NULL) {
+ paxwarn(1, "File name too long for ustar %s", arcn->name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ hd = (HD_USTAR *)hdblk;
+ arcn->pad = 0L;
+
+ /*
+ * split the name, or zero out the prefix
+ */
+ if (pt != arcn->name) {
+ /*
+ * name was split, pt points at the / where the split is to
+ * occur, we remove the / and copy the first part to the prefix
+ */
+ *pt = '\0';
+ l_strncpy(hd->prefix, arcn->name, sizeof(hd->prefix) - 1);
+ *pt++ = '/';
+ } else
+ memset(hd->prefix, 0, sizeof(hd->prefix));
+
+ /*
+ * copy the name part. this may be the whole path or the part after
+ * the prefix
+ */
+ l_strncpy(hd->name, pt, sizeof(hd->name) - 1);
+ hd->name[sizeof(hd->name) - 1] = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * set the fields in the header that are type dependent
+ */
+ switch(arcn->type) {
+ case PAX_DIR:
+ hd->typeflag = DIRTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+ memset(hd->devmajor, 0, sizeof(hd->devmajor));
+ memset(hd->devminor, 0, sizeof(hd->devminor));
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 3))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ case PAX_CHR:
+ case PAX_BLK:
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_CHR)
+ hd->typeflag = CHRTYPE;
+ else
+ hd->typeflag = BLKTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)MAJOR(arcn->sb.st_rdev), hd->devmajor,
+ sizeof(hd->devmajor), 3) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)MINOR(arcn->sb.st_rdev), hd->devminor,
+ sizeof(hd->devminor), 3) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 3))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ case PAX_FIF:
+ hd->typeflag = FIFOTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+ memset(hd->devmajor, 0, sizeof(hd->devmajor));
+ memset(hd->devminor, 0, sizeof(hd->devminor));
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 3))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ case PAX_SLK:
+ case PAX_HLK:
+ case PAX_HRG:
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_SLK)
+ hd->typeflag = SYMTYPE;
+ else
+ hd->typeflag = LNKTYPE;
+ l_strncpy(hd->linkname,arcn->ln_name, sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1);
+ hd->linkname[sizeof(hd->linkname) - 1] = '\0';
+ memset(hd->devmajor, 0, sizeof(hd->devmajor));
+ memset(hd->devminor, 0, sizeof(hd->devminor));
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)0L, hd->size, sizeof(hd->size), 3))
+ goto out;
+ break;
+ case PAX_REG:
+ case PAX_CTG:
+ default:
+ /*
+ * file data with this type, set the padding
+ */
+ if (arcn->type == PAX_CTG)
+ hd->typeflag = CONTTYPE;
+ else
+ hd->typeflag = REGTYPE;
+ memset(hd->linkname, 0, sizeof(hd->linkname));
+ memset(hd->devmajor, 0, sizeof(hd->devmajor));
+ memset(hd->devminor, 0, sizeof(hd->devminor));
+ arcn->pad = TAR_PAD(arcn->sb.st_size);
+# ifdef NET2_STAT
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->size,
+ sizeof(hd->size), 3)) {
+# else
+ if (uqd_oct((u_quad_t)arcn->sb.st_size, hd->size,
+ sizeof(hd->size), 3)) {
+# endif
+ paxwarn(1,"File is too long for ustar %s",arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ l_strncpy(hd->magic, TMAGIC, TMAGLEN);
+ l_strncpy(hd->version, TVERSION, TVERSLEN);
+
+ /*
+ * set the remaining fields. Some versions want all 16 bits of mode
+ * we better humor them (they really do not meet spec though)....
+ */
+ if (ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mode, hd->mode, sizeof(hd->mode), 3) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_uid, hd->uid, sizeof(hd->uid), 3) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_gid, hd->gid, sizeof(hd->gid), 3) ||
+ ul_oct((u_long)arcn->sb.st_mtime,hd->mtime,sizeof(hd->mtime),3))
+ goto out;
+ l_strncpy(hd->uname,name_uid(arcn->sb.st_uid, 0),sizeof(hd->uname));
+ l_strncpy(hd->gname,name_gid(arcn->sb.st_gid, 0),sizeof(hd->gname));
+
+ /*
+ * calculate and store the checksum write the header to the archive
+ * return 0 tells the caller to now write the file data, 1 says no data
+ * needs to be written
+ */
+ if (ul_oct(tar_chksm(hdblk, sizeof(HD_USTAR)), hd->chksum,
+ sizeof(hd->chksum), 3))
+ goto out;
+ if (wr_rdbuf(hdblk, sizeof(HD_USTAR)) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if (wr_skip((off_t)(BLKMULT - sizeof(HD_USTAR))) < 0)
+ return(-1);
+ if ((arcn->type == PAX_CTG) || (arcn->type == PAX_REG))
+ return(0);
+ return(1);
+
+ out:
+ /*
+ * header field is out of range
+ */
+ paxwarn(1, "Ustar header field is too small for %s", arcn->org_name);
+ return(1);
+}
+
+/*
+ * name_split()
+ * see if the name has to be split for storage in a ustar header. We try
+ * to fit the entire name in the name field without splitting if we can.
+ * The split point is always at a /
+ * Return
+ * character pointer to split point (always the / that is to be removed
+ * if the split is not needed, the points is set to the start of the file
+ * name (it would violate the spec to split there). A NULL is returned if
+ * the file name is too long
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+static char *
+name_split(register char *name, register int len)
+#else
+static char *
+name_split(name, len)
+ register char *name;
+ register int len;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *start;
+
+ /*
+ * check to see if the file name is small enough to fit in the name
+ * field. if so just return a pointer to the name.
+ */
+ if (len < TNMSZ)
+ return(name);
+ if (len > (TPFSZ + TNMSZ + 1))
+ return(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * we start looking at the biggest sized piece that fits in the name
+ * field. We walk foward looking for a slash to split at. The idea is
+ * to find the biggest piece to fit in the name field (or the smallest
+ * prefix we can find) (the -1 is correct the biggest piece would
+ * include the slash between the two parts that gets thrown away)
+ */
+ start = name + len - TNMSZ - 1;
+ while ((*start != '\0') && (*start != '/'))
+ ++start;
+
+ /*
+ * if we hit the end of the string, this name cannot be split, so we
+ * cannot store this file.
+ */
+ if (*start == '\0')
+ return(NULL);
+ len = start - name;
+
+ /*
+ * NOTE: /str where the length of str == TNMSZ can not be stored under
+ * the p1003.1-1990 spec for ustar. We could force a prefix of / and
+ * the file would then expand on extract to //str. The len == 0 below
+ * makes this special case follow the spec to the letter.
+ */
+ if ((len > TPFSZ) || (len == 0))
+ return(NULL);
+
+ /*
+ * ok have a split point, return it to the caller
+ */
+ return(start);
+}
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: tar.h,v 1.5 1997/04/16 03:50:25 millert Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: tar.h,v 1.3 1995/03/21 09:07:51 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * @(#)tar.h 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+ */
+
+/*
+ * defines and data structures common to all tar formats
+ */
+#define CHK_LEN 8 /* length of checksum field */
+#define TNMSZ 100 /* size of name field */
+#ifdef _PAX_
+#define NULLCNT 2 /* number of null blocks in trailer */
+#define CHK_OFFSET 148 /* start of chksum field */
+#define BLNKSUM 256L /* sum of checksum field using ' ' */
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
+
+/*
+ * Values used in typeflag field in all tar formats
+ * (only REGTYPE, LNKTYPE and SYMTYPE are used in old bsd tar headers)
+ */
+#define REGTYPE '0' /* Regular File */
+#define AREGTYPE '\0' /* Regular File */
+#define LNKTYPE '1' /* Link */
+#define SYMTYPE '2' /* Symlink */
+#define CHRTYPE '3' /* Character Special File */
+#define BLKTYPE '4' /* Block Special File */
+#define DIRTYPE '5' /* Directory */
+#define FIFOTYPE '6' /* FIFO */
+#define CONTTYPE '7' /* high perf file */
+
+/*
+ * Mode field encoding of the different file types - values in octal
+ */
+#define TSUID 04000 /* Set UID on execution */
+#define TSGID 02000 /* Set GID on execution */
+#define TSVTX 01000 /* Reserved */
+#define TUREAD 00400 /* Read by owner */
+#define TUWRITE 00200 /* Write by owner */
+#define TUEXEC 00100 /* Execute/Search by owner */
+#define TGREAD 00040 /* Read by group */
+#define TGWRITE 00020 /* Write by group */
+#define TGEXEC 00010 /* Execute/Search by group */
+#define TOREAD 00004 /* Read by other */
+#define TOWRITE 00002 /* Write by other */
+#define TOEXEC 00001 /* Execute/Search by other */
+
+#ifdef _PAX_
+/*
+ * Pad with a bit mask, much faster than doing a mod but only works on powers
+ * of 2. Macro below is for block of 512 bytes.
+ */
+#define TAR_PAD(x) ((512 - ((x) & 511)) & 511)
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
+
+/*
+ * structure of an old tar header as it appeared in BSD releases
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ char name[TNMSZ]; /* name of entry */
+ char mode[8]; /* mode */
+ char uid[8]; /* uid */
+ char gid[8]; /* gid */
+ char size[12]; /* size */
+ char mtime[12]; /* modification time */
+ char chksum[CHK_LEN]; /* checksum */
+ char linkflag; /* norm, hard, or sym. */
+ char linkname[TNMSZ]; /* linked to name */
+} HD_TAR;
+
+#ifdef _PAX_
+/*
+ * -o options for BSD tar to not write directories to the archive
+ */
+#define TAR_NODIR "nodir"
+#define TAR_OPTION "write_opt"
+
+/*
+ * default device names
+ */
+#define DEV_0 "/dev/rst0"
+#define DEV_1 "/dev/rst1"
+#define DEV_4 "/dev/rst4"
+#define DEV_5 "/dev/rst5"
+#define DEV_7 "/dev/rst7"
+#define DEV_8 "/dev/rst8"
+#endif /* _PAX_ */
+
+/*
+ * Data Interchange Format - Extended tar header format - POSIX 1003.1-1990
+ */
+#define TPFSZ 155
+#define TMAGIC "ustar" /* ustar and a null */
+#define TMAGLEN 6
+#define TVERSION "00" /* 00 and no null */
+#define TVERSLEN 2
+
+typedef struct {
+ char name[TNMSZ]; /* name of entry */
+ char mode[8]; /* mode */
+ char uid[8]; /* uid */
+ char gid[8]; /* gid */
+ char size[12]; /* size */
+ char mtime[12]; /* modification time */
+ char chksum[CHK_LEN]; /* checksum */
+ char typeflag; /* type of file. */
+ char linkname[TNMSZ]; /* linked to name */
+ char magic[TMAGLEN]; /* magic cookie */
+ char version[TVERSLEN]; /* version */
+ char uname[32]; /* ascii owner name */
+ char gname[32]; /* ascii group name */
+ char devmajor[8]; /* major device number */
+ char devminor[8]; /* minor device number */
+ char prefix[TPFSZ]; /* linked to name */
+} HD_USTAR;
--- /dev/null
+/* $OpenBSD: tty_subs.c,v 1.5 1997/07/25 18:58:39 mickey Exp $ */
+/* $NetBSD: tty_subs.c,v 1.5 1995/03/21 09:07:52 cgd Exp $ */
+
+/*-
+ * Copyright (c) 1992 Keith Muller.
+ * Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+ * The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+ * Keith Muller of the University of California, San Diego.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+ * must display the following acknowledgement:
+ * This product includes software developed by the University of
+ * California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+ * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+ * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ * without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef lint
+#if 0
+static char sccsid[] = "@(#)tty_subs.c 8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94";
+#else
+static char rcsid[] = "$OpenBSD: tty_subs.c,v 1.5 1997/07/25 18:58:39 mickey Exp $";
+#endif
+#endif /* not lint */
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <sys/param.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include "pax.h"
+#include "extern.h"
+#ifdef __STDC__
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#else
+#include <varargs.h>
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * routines that deal with I/O to and from the user
+ */
+
+#define DEVTTY "/dev/tty" /* device for interactive i/o */
+static FILE *ttyoutf = NULL; /* output pointing at control tty */
+static FILE *ttyinf = NULL; /* input pointing at control tty */
+
+/*
+ * tty_init()
+ * try to open the controlling termina (if any) for this process. if the
+ * open fails, future ops that require user input will get an EOF
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tty_init(void)
+#else
+int
+tty_init()
+#endif
+{
+ int ttyfd;
+
+ if ((ttyfd = open(DEVTTY, O_RDWR)) >= 0) {
+ if ((ttyoutf = fdopen(ttyfd, "w")) != NULL) {
+ if ((ttyinf = fdopen(ttyfd, "r")) != NULL)
+ return(0);
+ (void)fclose(ttyoutf);
+ }
+ (void)close(ttyfd);
+ }
+
+ if (iflag) {
+ paxwarn(1, "Fatal error, cannot open %s", DEVTTY);
+ return(-1);
+ }
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tty_prnt()
+ * print a message using the specified format to the controlling tty
+ * if there is no controlling terminal, just return.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+tty_prnt(char *fmt, ...)
+#else
+void
+tty_prnt(fmt, va_alist)
+ char *fmt;
+ va_dcl
+#endif
+{
+ va_list ap;
+# ifdef __STDC__
+ va_start(ap, fmt);
+# else
+ va_start(ap);
+# endif
+ if (ttyoutf == NULL)
+ return;
+ (void)vfprintf(ttyoutf, fmt, ap);
+ va_end(ap);
+ (void)fflush(ttyoutf);
+}
+
+/*
+ * tty_read()
+ * read a string from the controlling terminal if it is open into the
+ * supplied buffer
+ * Return:
+ * 0 if data was read, -1 otherwise.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+int
+tty_read(char *str, int len)
+#else
+int
+tty_read(str, len)
+ char *str;
+ int len;
+#endif
+{
+ register char *pt;
+
+ if ((--len <= 0) || (ttyinf == NULL) || (fgets(str,len,ttyinf) == NULL))
+ return(-1);
+ *(str + len) = '\0';
+
+ /*
+ * strip off that trailing newline
+ */
+ if ((pt = strchr(str, '\n')) != NULL)
+ *pt = '\0';
+ return(0);
+}
+
+/*
+ * paxwarn()
+ * write a warning message to stderr. if "set" the exit value of pax
+ * will be non-zero.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+paxwarn(int set, char *fmt, ...)
+#else
+void
+paxwarn(set, fmt, va_alist)
+ int set;
+ char *fmt;
+ va_dcl
+#endif
+{
+ va_list ap;
+# ifdef __STDC__
+ va_start(ap, fmt);
+# else
+ va_start(ap);
+# endif
+ if (set)
+ exit_val = 1;
+ /*
+ * when vflag we better ship out an extra \n to get this message on a
+ * line by itself
+ */
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)fputc('\n', stderr);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, "%s: ", argv0);
+ (void)vfprintf(stderr, fmt, ap);
+ va_end(ap);
+ (void)fputc('\n', stderr);
+}
+
+/*
+ * syswarn()
+ * write a warning message to stderr. if "set" the exit value of pax
+ * will be non-zero.
+ */
+
+#ifdef __STDC__
+void
+syswarn(int set, int errnum, char *fmt, ...)
+#else
+void
+syswarn(set, errnum, fmt, va_alist)
+ int set;
+ int errnum;
+ char *fmt;
+ va_dcl
+#endif
+{
+ va_list ap;
+# ifdef __STDC__
+ va_start(ap, fmt);
+# else
+ va_start(ap);
+# endif
+ if (set)
+ exit_val = 1;
+ /*
+ * when vflag we better ship out an extra \n to get this message on a
+ * line by itself
+ */
+ if (vflag && vfpart) {
+ (void)fputc('\n', stderr);
+ vfpart = 0;
+ }
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, "%s: ", argv0);
+ (void)vfprintf(stderr, fmt, ap);
+ va_end(ap);
+
+ /*
+ * format and print the errno
+ */
+ if (errnum > 0)
+ (void)fprintf(stderr, " <%s>", strerror(errnum));
+ (void)fputc('\n', stderr);
+}
projects / debian / pax / commitdiff